Samsung CLX-8385ND, Samsung CLX-8385 Color Laser Multifunction Printer series Owner's manual

Samsung CLX-8385ND, Samsung CLX-8385 Color Laser Multifunction Printer series Owner's manual

CLX-8385ND Series

Multi Functional Printer

User’s Guide

imagine the possibilities

Thank you for purchasing a Samsung product.

© 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice. Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide.

• CLX-8385ND is model name of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.

• Samsung and Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.

• PCL and PCL 6 are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard company.

• Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

• PostScript 3 is a trademark of Adobe System, Inc.

• UFST® and MicroType™ are registered trademarks of Monotype Imaging Inc.

• TrueType, LaserWriter and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.

• All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.

• This machine can be operated only in the country you have purchased. (Due to different voltage, frequency, telecommunication configuration and etc)

C

ONTACT

SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE

If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products, contact the Samsung customer care center.

Country Customer Care Center Web Site

ARGENTINE

AUSTRALIA

AUSTRIA

BELGIUM

BRAZIL

CANADA

CHILE

CHINA

0800-333-3733

1300 362 603 www.samsung.com/ar www.samsung.com/au www.samsung.com/at 0810-SAMSUNG (7267864, €

0.07/min)

02 201 2418 www.samsung.com/be

(Dutch) www.samsung.com/ be_fr (French) www.samsung.com/br 0800-124-421

4004-0000

1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/ca

800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/cl

800-810-5858

400-810-5858

010-6475 1880 www.samsung.com/cn

COLOMBIA

COSTA RICA

CZECH

REPUBLIC

DENMARK

ECUADOR

01-8000112112

0-800-507-7267 www.samsung.com.co

www.samsung.com/ latin

800-SAMSUNG (800-726786) www.samsung.com/cz

Samsung Zrt., č eská organiza č ní složka, Oasis Florenc,

Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8

8-SAMSUNG (7267864)

1-800-10-7267 www.samsung.com/dk www.samsung.com/ latin

EL SALVADOR

800-6225

ESTONIA

800-7267

KAZAKHSTAN

8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/ latin www.samsung.com/ee www.samsung.com/ kz_ru

KYRGYZSTAN

00-800-500-55-500

FINLAND

30-6227 515

FRANCE

GERMANY

GUATEMALA

01 4863 0000

01805 - SAMSUNG (726-

7864 € 0,14/min)

1-800-299-0013

HONDURAS

HONG KONG

HUNGARY

INDIA

INDONESIA

ITALIA

www.samsung.com/fi www.samsung.com/fr www.samsung.de

800-7919267 www.samsung.com/ latin www.samsung.com/ latin

3698-4698 www.samsung.com/hk

06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/hu

3030 8282

1800 110011

1800 3000 8282 www.samsung.com/in

0800-112-8888

800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com/id www.samsung.com/it

Country Customer Care Center Web Site

JAMAICA

JAPAN

LATVIA

LITHUANIA

LUXEMBURG

MALAYSIA

TADJIKISTAN

TAIWAN

THAILAND

TRINIDAD &

TOBAGO

1-800-234-7267

0120-327-527

8000-7267

8-800-77777

02 261 03 710

1800-88-9999 www.samsung.com/ latin www.samsung.com/jp www.samsung.com/lv www.samsung.com/lt www.samsung.com/lu www.samsung.com/my

MEXICO

01-800-SAMSUNG (726-

7864)

NETHERLANDS

0900-SAMSUNG (0900-

7267864) (€ 0,10/min) www.samsung.com/mx www.samsung.com/nl

NEW ZEALAND

0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726

786)

NICARAGUA

00-1800-5077267 www.samsung.com/nz www.samsung.com/ latin www.samsung.com/no

NORWAY

PANAMA

3-SAMSUNG (7267864)

800-7267 www.samsung.com/ latin www.samsung.com/ph

PHILIPPINES

POLAND

1800-10-SAMSUNG (726-

7864)

1-800-3-SAMSUNG (726-

7864)

02-5805777

0 801 1SAMSUNG (172678)

022-607-93-33 www.samsung.com/pl

PORTUGAL

80820-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/pt

PUERTO RICO

1-800-682-3180 www.samsung.com/ latin

REP. DOMINICA

1-800-751-2676 www.samsung.com/ latin

EIRE

RUSSIA

SINGAPORE

SLOVAKIA

0818 717 100

8-800-555-55-55 www.samsung.com/ie www.samsung.ru

1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/sg

0800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/sk

SOUTH AFRICA

0860 SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/za

SPAIN

902-1-SAMSUNG(902 172

678) www.samsung.com/es

SWEDEN

075-SAMSUNG (726 78 64)

SWITZERLAND

0848-SAMSUNG (7267864,

CHF 0.08/min) www.samsung.com/se www.samsung.com/ch

8-10-800-500-55-500

0800-329-999

1800-29-3232

02-689-3232 www.samsung.com/tw www.samsung.com/th

1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/ latin

Country

TURKEY

U.A.E

U.K

U.S.A

UKRAINE

UZBEKISTAN

VENEZUELA

VIETNAM

Customer Care Center Web Site

444 77 11 www.samsung.com/tr

800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)

8000-4726 www.samsung.com/ae

0845 SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/uk

1-800-SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/us

8-800-502-0000

8-10-800-500-55-500

0-800-100-5303

1 800 588 889 www.samsung.ua

www.samsung.com/ kz_ru www.samsung.com/ latin www.samsung.com/vn

C

ONTENTS

About this user’s guide .................................................................................................................................................i

Finding more information .............................................................................................................................................i

Safety and Regulatory Information .............................................................................................................................. ii

1. Introduction

Special features ...................................................................................................................................................... 1.1

Machine overview ................................................................................................................................................... 1.3

Front view ........................................................................................................................................................... 1.3

Rear view ............................................................................................................................................................ 1.4

Control panel overview ............................................................................................................................................ 1.5

Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons .................................................................................................... 1.6

Touch screen ...................................................................................................................................................... 1.6

Machine Setup

button ....................................................................................................................................... 1.6

Job Status

button .............................................................................................................................................. 1.6

Power Saver

button ........................................................................................................................................... 1.7

Interrupt

button .................................................................................................................................................. 1.7

Understanding the

Status

LED ............................................................................................................................... 1.7

Status

................................................................................................................................................................. 1.7

Menu map ............................................................................................................................................................... 1.8

Main screen ........................................................................................................................................................ 1.8

Machine Setup

button ....................................................................................................................................... 1.8

Job Status

button .............................................................................................................................................. 1.8

2. Software overview

Supplied software .................................................................................................................................................... 2.1

Printer driver features .............................................................................................................................................. 2.2

System requirements .............................................................................................................................................. 2.2

3. Getting Started

Setting up the hardware .......................................................................................................................................... 3.1

Setting a Color Standard ......................................................................................................................................... 3.2

Setting up the network ............................................................................................................................................ 3.2

Supported operating systems ............................................................................................................................. 3.2

Configuring network protocol via the machine .................................................................................................... 3.2

Installing the software ............................................................................................................................................. 3.3

Using the SetIP program ......................................................................................................................................... 3.4

Altitude adjustment .................................................................................................................................................. 3.5

Machine's basic settings ......................................................................................................................................... 3.5

Setting the authentication password ................................................................................................................... 3.5

Setting the date and time .................................................................................................................................... 3.5

Changing the display language .......................................................................................................................... 3.6

Setting job timeout .............................................................................................................................................. 3.6

Using power saving feature ................................................................................................................................ 3.6

Setting the default tray and paper ....................................................................................................................... 3.6

Changing the default settings ............................................................................................................................. 3.7

Changing the font setting .................................................................................................................................... 3.7

Understanding the keyboard ................................................................................................................................... 3.7

4. Loading originals and print media

Loading originals ..................................................................................................................................................... 4.1

On the scanner glass .......................................................................................................................................... 4.1

In the DADF ........................................................................................................................................................ 4.1

Selecting print media ............................................................................................................................................... 4.2

Specification on print media ................................................................................................................................ 4.3

Media sizes supported in each mode ................................................................................................................. 4.4

Guidelines for selecting and storing print media ................................................................................................. 4.4

Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray .................................................................................................... 4.6

Loading paper ......................................................................................................................................................... 4.7

Loading paper in tray 1, optional tray or optional high capacity feeder .............................................................. 4.7

In the multi-purpose tray ..................................................................................................................................... 4.8

Setting the paper size and type ............................................................................................................................... 4.9

5. Copying

Understanding the Copy screen .............................................................................................................................. 5.1

Basic

tab ............................................................................................................................................................ 5.1

Advanced

tab ..................................................................................................................................................... 5.1

Image

tab ........................................................................................................................................................... 5.2

Copying originals ..................................................................................................................................................... 5.2

Changing the settings for each copy ....................................................................................................................... 5.3

Changing the size of originals ............................................................................................................................. 5.3

Reducing or enlarging copies ............................................................................................................................. 5.3

Copying on both sides of originals (

Duplex

) ...................................................................................................... 5.3

Deciding the form of copy output (Collated / Staple) .......................................................................................... 5.4

Selecting the type of originals ............................................................................................................................. 5.5

Color Mode ......................................................................................................................................................... 5.5

Changing the darkness ....................................................................................................................................... 5.5

Using special copy features .................................................................................................................................... 5.5

Merging multiple jobs as a single copy ............................................................................................................... 5.5

ID card copying ................................................................................................................................................... 5.6

Copying ID with the manual ID copy option ........................................................................................................ 5.6

2-up or 4-up copying (N-up) ................................................................................................................................ 5.7

Poster copying .................................................................................................................................................... 5.7

Clone copying ..................................................................................................................................................... 5.8

Book copying ...................................................................................................................................................... 5.8

Booklet copying .................................................................................................................................................. 5.8

Cover copying ..................................................................................................................................................... 5.9

Transparency copying ........................................................................................................................................ 5.9

Watermark copying ............................................................................................................................................. 5.9

Overlay copying ................................................................................................................................................ 5.10

Auto crop copying ............................................................................................................................................. 5.10

Multi-Bin ............................................................................................................................................................ 5.10

Erasing edges ................................................................................................................................................... 5.10

Erasing background images ............................................................................................................................. 5.11

Shifting margins ................................................................................................................................................ 5.11

Gray enhance copying ...................................................................................................................................... 5.11

Adjusting backside images ............................................................................................................................... 5.11

6. Faxing (Optional)

Preparing to fax ....................................................................................................................................................... 6.1

Sending a fax from a computer ............................................................................................................................... 6.1

Sending a fax from your Computer ..................................................................................................................... 6.1

Checking a sent fax list ....................................................................................................................................... 6.2

Understanding the Fax screen ................................................................................................................................ 6.2

Basic

tab ............................................................................................................................................................ 6.2

Advanced

tab ..................................................................................................................................................... 6.2

Image

tab ........................................................................................................................................................... 6.3

Sending a fax .......................................................................................................................................................... 6.3

Setting the fax header ......................................................................................................................................... 6.3

Sending a fax ...................................................................................................................................................... 6.3

Sending a fax manually (

On Hook Dial

) ............................................................................................................ 6.4

Automatic resending ........................................................................................................................................... 6.4

Redialing the last number ................................................................................................................................... 6.4

Delaying a fax transmission ................................................................................................................................ 6.5

Sending a priority fax .......................................................................................................................................... 6.5

Sending multiple faxes in a single transmission ................................................................................................. 6.5

Receiving a fax ........................................................................................................................................................ 6.6

Changing the receive modes .............................................................................................................................. 6.6

Receiving manually in Telephone mode ............................................................................................................. 6.6

Receiving automatically in Answering Machine/Fax mode ................................................................................. 6.6

Receiving faxes manually using an extension telephone ................................................................................... 6.6

Receiving in secure receiving mode ................................................................................................................... 6.6

Printing received faxes on both sides of the paper ............................................................................................. 6.7

Receiving faxes in memory ................................................................................................................................. 6.7

Adjusting the document settings ............................................................................................................................. 6.7

Duplex

................................................................................................................................................................ 6.7

Resolution

......................................................................................................................................................... 6.7

Original Type

..................................................................................................................................................... 6.8

Darkness

............................................................................................................................................................ 6.8

Erase Background

............................................................................................................................................ 6.8

Color Mode

........................................................................................................................................................ 6.8

Setting up a fax phonebook .................................................................................................................................... 6.8

Storing individual phone numbers (

Speed No.

) ................................................................................................. 6.8

Storing Group fax numbers (

Group No.

) ............................................................................................................ 6.9

Setting up a fax phonebook using

SyncThru™ Web Service

........................................................................... 6.9

Using the polling option ........................................................................................................................................... 6.9

Storing the originals for polling ......................................................................................................................... 6.10

Printing (Deleting) the polling document ........................................................................................................... 6.10

Polling a remote fax .......................................................................................................................................... 6.11

Polling from a remote

Mailbox

......................................................................................................................... 6.11

Using

Mailbox

....................................................................................................................................................... 6.11

Creating

Mailbox

.............................................................................................................................................. 6.11

Storing originals in

Mailbox

.............................................................................................................................. 6.12

Faxing to a remote

Mailbox

............................................................................................................................. 6.12

Printing a report after sending a fax ...................................................................................................................... 6.13

Sending a fax in toll save time .............................................................................................................................. 6.13

Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job ..................................................................................................... 6.13

Forwarding a received fax to other destination ..................................................................................................... 6.14

Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a fax .......................................................................................... 6.14

Forwarding a received fax to other destination by a fax ................................................................................... 6.14

Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by an email .................................................................................... 6.14

Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an email ............................................................................. 6.14

Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by server ........................................................................................ 6.15

Forwarding a received fax to other destination by server ................................................................................. 6.15

Setting up the end fax tone ................................................................................................................................... 6.15

Setting up receiving faxes in color ........................................................................................................................ 6.15

7. Scanning

Understanding the

Scan

screen ............................................................................................................................. 7.1

Basic screen ....................................................................................................................................................... 7.1

Advanced

tab ..................................................................................................................................................... 7.3

Image

tab ........................................................................................................................................................... 7.3

Output

tab .......................................................................................................................................................... 7.3

Scanning originals and sending through email (

Scan to Email

) ............................................................................. 7.4

Sending a scanned image to several destinations as an email attachment ....................................................... 7.4

Setting up an email account ............................................................................................................................... 7.4

Storing email addresses ..................................................................................................................................... 7.5

Entering email addresses by the address book .................................................................................................. 7.5

Entering email addresses by the keyboard ......................................................................................................... 7.6

Using Samsung Scan Manager .............................................................................................................................. 7.6

Scanning originals and sending via SMB/ FTP (

Scan to Server

) ........................................................................... 7.7

Preparation for scanning to SMB/FTP ................................................................................................................ 7.7

Scanning and sending to SMB/FTP server ......................................................................................................... 7.8

Changing the scan feature settings ......................................................................................................................... 7.8

Duplex

................................................................................................................................................................ 7.8

Resolution

......................................................................................................................................................... 7.8

Original Size

...................................................................................................................................................... 7.9

Original Type

..................................................................................................................................................... 7.9

Color Mode

........................................................................................................................................................ 7.9

Darkness

............................................................................................................................................................ 7.9

Erase Background

............................................................................................................................................ 7.9

Scan to Edge

................................................................................................................................................... 7.10

Quality

.............................................................................................................................................................. 7.10

Scan Preset

..................................................................................................................................................... 7.10

File Format

...................................................................................................................................................... 7.10

PDF Encryption ................................................................................................................................................. 7.10

8. Basic printing

Printing a document ................................................................................................................................................ 8.1

Canceling a print job ............................................................................................................................................... 8.1

9. Using USB flash memory

About USB memory ................................................................................................................................................ 9.1

Understanding the USB screen ............................................................................................................................... 9.1

Plugging in an USB memory device ........................................................................................................................ 9.1

Scanning to an USB memory device ...................................................................................................................... 9.2

Scanning ............................................................................................................................................................. 9.2

Scan to USB

........................................................................................................................................................... 9.2

Basic

tab ............................................................................................................................................................ 9.2

Advanced

tab ..................................................................................................................................................... 9.2

Image

tab ........................................................................................................................................................... 9.3

Output

tab .......................................................................................................................................................... 9.3

Changing the scan feature settings ......................................................................................................................... 9.3

Duplex

................................................................................................................................................................ 9.3

Resolution

......................................................................................................................................................... 9.3

Original Size

...................................................................................................................................................... 9.4

Original Type

..................................................................................................................................................... 9.4

Color Mode

........................................................................................................................................................ 9.4

Darkness

............................................................................................................................................................ 9.4

Erase Background

............................................................................................................................................ 9.5

Scan to Edge

..................................................................................................................................................... 9.5

Quality

................................................................................................................................................................ 9.5

Scan Preset

....................................................................................................................................................... 9.5

File Format

........................................................................................................................................................ 9.5

File Policy

.......................................................................................................................................................... 9.6

Printing from a USB memory device ....................................................................................................................... 9.6

To print a document from a USB memory device: .............................................................................................. 9.6

10.Using Document Box

About Document Box ............................................................................................................................................ 10.1

Understanding the

Document Box

screen ........................................................................................................... 10.1

Document Box Screen ...................................................................................................................................... 10.1

Box Adding Screen ........................................................................................................................................... 10.2

Edit a Box Screen ............................................................................................................................................. 10.2

Document List Screen ...................................................................................................................................... 10.2

Storing documents to Document box .................................................................................................................... 10.3

Storing documents from document box ............................................................................................................ 10.3

Storing documents during copy, scan, fax function .......................................................................................... 10.3

11. Using Standard Workflow

About

Standard Workflow

................................................................................................................................... 11.1

Understanding the

Standard Workflow

Screen ................................................................................................... 11.1

Workflow Screen ............................................................................................................................................... 11.1

Workform Creating Screen ............................................................................................................................... 11.2

Various Operations with Workform ....................................................................................................................... 11.3

Scan to multi-destination .................................................................................................................................. 11.3

Fax forwarding .................................................................................................................................................. 11.3

Auto redirection ................................................................................................................................................. 11.3

Delayed start feature ........................................................................................................................................ 11.3

Notification feature ............................................................................................................................................ 11.3

Approval feature ............................................................................................................................................... 11.3

12. Machine status and advanced setup

Machine Setup

..................................................................................................................................................... 12.1

Machine Status

screen .................................................................................................................................... 12.1

Admin Setting

screen ...................................................................................................................................... 12.1

Browsing the machine’s status .............................................................................................................................. 12.2

General settings .................................................................................................................................................... 12.2

Copy Setup

.......................................................................................................................................................... 12.5

Fax Setup

............................................................................................................................................................. 12.5

Network Setup ....................................................................................................................................................... 12.7

Security

................................................................................................................................................................ 12.7

Access Control

............................................................................................................................................... 12.8

Log

........................................................................................................................................................ 12.11

Change Admin. Password

........................................................................................................................... 12.11

Information Hiding

............................................................................................................................... 12.11

Optional Service .................................................................................................................................................. 12.12

Adjusting the color contrast ................................................................................................................................. 12.12

Document Box Management

............................................................................................................................ 12.14

Standard Workflow Management

..................................................................................................................... 12.14

Printing a report ................................................................................................................................................... 12.15

13. Maintenance

Printing a machine report ...................................................................................................................................... 13.1

Monitoring the supplies life .................................................................................................................................... 13.1

Finding the serial number ...................................................................................................................................... 13.1

Sending the imaging unit reorder notification ........................................................................................................ 13.1

Sending the toner reorder notification ................................................................................................................... 13.2

Checking

Document Box

..................................................................................................................................... 13.2

Cleaning your machine ......................................................................................................................................... 13.2

Cleaning the outside ......................................................................................................................................... 13.2

Cleaning the inside ........................................................................................................................................... 13.2

Cleaning the scan unit ...................................................................................................................................... 13.2

Maintaining the toner cartridge .............................................................................................................................. 13.3

Toner cartridge storage .................................................................................................................................... 13.3

Handling instructions ........................................................................................................................................ 13.3

Use of non-Samsung and refilled toner cartridge ............................................................................................. 13.3

Expected cartridge life ...................................................................................................................................... 13.3

Redistributing toner ............................................................................................................................................... 13.3

Replacing the toner cartridge ................................................................................................................................ 13.4

Replacing the imaging unit .................................................................................................................................... 13.6

Replacing the waste toner container ..................................................................................................................... 13.8

Maintenance Parts ................................................................................................................................................ 13.9

Managing your machine from the website ............................................................................................................ 13.9

To access

SyncThru™ Web Service

: ............................................................................................................. 13.9

14. Troubleshooting

Tips for avoiding paper jams ................................................................................................................................. 14.1

Clearing document jams ....................................................................................................................................... 14.1

Misfeed of exiting paper .................................................................................................................................... 14.2

Roller misfeed ................................................................................................................................................... 14.2

Clearing paper jams .............................................................................................................................................. 14.3

In the tray 1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 14.3

In the optional tray ............................................................................................................................................ 14.5

In the optional high capacity feeder .................................................................................................................. 14.6

In the multi-purpose tray ................................................................................................................................... 14.7

In the paper inside the machine ........................................................................................................................ 14.7

In the fuser area ................................................................................................................................................ 14.8

In the duplex unit area ...................................................................................................................................... 14.8

In the stacker (finisher) ..................................................................................................................................... 14.9

Understanding display messages ....................................................................................................................... 14.10

Solving other problems ....................................................................................................................................... 14.14

Touch screen problem .................................................................................................................................... 14.14

Paper feeding problems .................................................................................................................................. 14.14

Printing problems ............................................................................................................................................ 14.14

Printing quality problems ................................................................................................................................ 14.16

Copying problems ........................................................................................................................................... 14.19

Scanning problems ......................................................................................................................................... 14.19

Fax problems (optional) .................................................................................................................................. 14.20

Common Windows problems .......................................................................................................................... 14.21

Common PostScript problems ........................................................................................................................ 14.21

Common Linux problems ................................................................................................................................ 14.22

Common Macintosh problems ........................................................................................................................ 14.24

15. Ordering supplies and accessories

Supplies ................................................................................................................................................................ 15.1

Accessories ........................................................................................................................................................... 15.1

How to purchase ................................................................................................................................................... 15.2

16. Installing accessories

Precautions to take when installing accessories ................................................................................................... 16.1

Installing a memory module .................................................................................................................................. 16.1

Activating the added memory in the PS printer properties ............................................................................... 16.2

Replacing the Stapler ............................................................................................................................................ 16.2

Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit ........................................................................................... 16.3

17. Specifications

General specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 17.1

Printer specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 17.2

Copier specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 17.2

Scanner specifications .......................................................................................................................................... 17.3

Facsimile specifications (optional) ........................................................................................................................ 17.3

18. Glossary

Index

About this user’s guide

This user’s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each step during the actual usage. Both novice users and professional users can refer to this guide for installing and using the machine.

Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:

• Document is synonymous with original.

• Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.

The following table offers the conventions of this guide:

Convention Description Example

Bold Used for texts on the screen or actual prints on the machine.

Copy Setup

Note

The date format may differ from country to country.

Caution

Footnote

>

(See page 1.1 for Special features.) additional information or detailed specification of the machine function and feature.

Used to give users information to protect the machine from possible mechanical damage or malfunction.

Used to provide more detailed information on certain words or a phrase.

Used to show the steps of selecting or pressing items in order.

The example means; press

Copy

from the

Main

screen, press the

Advanced

tab, and then press

Clone Copy

.

Used to guide users to the reference page for the additional detailed information.

Caution

Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge.

a. pages per minute

Copy

> the

Advanced

tab >

Clone Copy

(See page 1.1 for Special features.)

Note

• Items, features, options on the touch screen may differ between models depending on their configurations.

• The paper capacity in this user’s guide is based on 75 g/ m

2

(20 lb) plain paper, capacity for 80 g/m

2

(20 lb) is mentioned

in the paper specification (See page 4.3., See page 17.1.).

Finding more information

You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the following resources, either as a print-out or onscreen.

Quick Install

Guide

Provides information on setting up your machine and this requires that you follow the instructions in the guide to prepare the machine.

User’s Guide

Downloadable

Softwares

Printer Driver

Help

Provides you with step-by-step instructions for using your machine’s full features, and contains information for maintaining your machine, troubleshooting, and installing accessories.

This user’s guide also contains

Software section

to provide you with information on how to print documents with your machine in various operating systems, and how to use the included software utilities.

SyncThru

TM

Web Admin Service:

convenient for network administrators who need to manage many machines simultaneously.

(http://solution.samsungprinter.com)

Samsung AnyWeb Print:

helps personal users to screen-capture the website screen in Windows Internet

Explorer easily.

(http://solution.samsungprinter.com/ personal/anywebprint)

Samsung Easy Color Manager:

helps

Samsung color laser printer users to adjust color as they like.

(http://solution.samsungprinter.com/ personal/colormanager)

Provides you with help information on printer driver properties and instructions for setting up the properties for printing. To access a printer driver help screen, click

Help

from the printer properties dialog box.

Samsung website

If you have Internet access, you can get help, support, printer drivers, manuals, and order information from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com/printer .

i

Safety and Regulatory Information

Important Precautions and Safety Information

When using this machine, these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock and injury to people:

1 Read and understand all instructions.

2 Use common sense whenever operating electrical appliances.

3 Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine and in the literature accompanying the machine.

4 If an operating instruction appears to conflict with safety information, heed the safety information. You may have misunderstood the operating instruction. If you cannot resolve the conflict, contact your sales or service representative for assistance.

5 Unplug the machine from the AC wall socket and/or telephone jack before cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use only a damp cloth for cleaning.

6 Do not place the machine on an unstable cart, stand or table. It may fall, causing serious damage.

7 Your machine should never be placed on, near or over a radiator, heater, air conditioner or ventilation duct.

8 Do not allow anything to rest on the power. Do not locate your machine where the cords will be abused by persons walking on them.

9 Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords. This can diminish performance, and may result in the risk of fire or electric shock.

10 Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC interface cords.

11 Never push objects of any kind into the machine through case or cabinet openings. They may touch dangerous voltage points, creating a risk of fire or shock. Never spill liquid of any kind onto or into the machine.

12 To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble the machine.

Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required.

Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect reassembly could cause electric shock when the unit is subsequently used.

13 Unplug the machine from the telephone jack, PC and AC wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions:

• When any part of the power cord, plug or connecting cable is damaged or frayed.

• If liquid has been spilled into the machine.

• If the machine has been exposed to rain or water.

• If the machine does not operate properly after instructions have been followed.

• If the machine has been dropped, or the cabinet appears damaged.

• If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in performance.

ii

14 Adjust only those controls covered by the operating instructions.

Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage, and may require extensive work by a qualified service technician to restore the machine to normal operation.

15 Avoid using this machine during a lightning storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. If possible, unplug the AC power and telephone cord for the duration of the lightning storm.

16 The Power cord supplied with your machine should be used for safe operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 m with 110 V machine, then it should be 16 AWG a

or bigger.

17 Use only No.26 AWG

*

or larger telephone line cord.

18 SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

Laser Safety Statement

The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21

CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 825.

Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service condition.

WARNING

Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from

Laser/Scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage your eyes.

When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:

a AWG: American Wire Gauge

Ozone Safety

During normal operation, this machine produces ozone.

The ozone produced does not present a hazard to the operator. However, it is advisable that the machine be operated in a well ventilated area.

If you need additional information about ozone, please request your nearest Samsung dealer.

Power Saver

This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use.

When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of time, power consumption is automatically lowered.

ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks.

For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http://www.energystar.gov

Recycling

Please recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an environmentally responsible manner.

Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical

& Electronic Equipment)

(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems)

This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories

(e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources.

Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling.

Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal.

Correct disposal of batteries in this product

(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems.)

iii

This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed with other household waste at the end of their working life.

Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment.

To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local, free battery return system.

Radio Frequency Emissions

FCC Information to the User

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference, and

• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a

Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.

Caution:

Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Canadian Radio Interference Regulations

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and Science Canada.

Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe A prescrites dans la norme sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et Sciences Canada.

Fax Branding

The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the following information:

(1) the date and time of transmission

(2) identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the message; and

(3) telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business entity or individual.

The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities, equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68. If such changes can be reasonably expected to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company communications facilities, or require modification or alteration of such terminal equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or performance, the customer shall be given adequate notice in writing, to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service.

Ringer Equivalence Number

The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the machine. In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company.

The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical load placed on the telephone line, and is useful for determining whether you have

“overloaded” the line. Installing several types of equipment on the same telephone line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls, especially ringing when your line is called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence

Numbers of the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may not be usable on your line. If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may cause harm to the telephone network.

The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the left side of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.

WARNING:

FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company should notify the customer that service may be stopped. However, where prior notice is impractical, the company may temporarily cease service, providing that they: a) promptly notify the customer.

b) give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem.

c) inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal

Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68.

You should also know that:

• Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system.

• If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone line as your machine, you may experience transmission and reception problems with all the equipment. It is recommended that no other equipment, except for a regular telephone, share the line with your machine.

• If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or telephone and electronic specialty stores.

• When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to emergency numbers, use a non-emergency number to advise the emergency service dispatcher of your intentions. The dispatcher will give you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number.

• This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines.

• This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids.

• You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of a standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C.

Replacing the Fitted Plug (for UK Only)

Important

The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the fuse, you must re-fit the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover.

If you have lost the fuse cover, do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover.

Please contact the people from you purchased the machine.

The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be suitable. However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have normal 13 amp plug sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded plug.

Warning

If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.

You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket.

Important warning:

You must earth this machine.

The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:

• Green and Yellow: Earth

• Blue: Neutral

• Brown: Live

If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do the following:

You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter

“E” or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or green.

iv

You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N” or colored black.

You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L” or colored red.

You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board.

Declaration of Conformity (European Countries)

Approvals and Certifications

The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes

Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable 93/68/EEC Directives of the

European Union as of the dates indicated:

Hereby, Samsung Electronics declare that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive

1999/5/EC. The declaration of conformity may be consulted at

www.samsung.com/printer

, go to Support > Download center and enter your printer (MFP) name to browse the EuDoC.

January 1, 1995

: Council Directive 73/23/EEC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment.

January 1, 1996

: Council Directive 89/336/EEC (92/31/EEC), approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility.

March 9, 1999

: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity.

A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. representative.

EC Certification

Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications

Terminal Equipment Directive (FAX)

This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network (PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the

European countries:

In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung

Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance.

The product has been tested against TS 103 021. To assist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the

European Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an advisory document (EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional requirements to ensure network compatibility of TS 103 021 terminals. The product has been designed against, and is fully compliant with, all of the relevant advisory notes contained in this document.

OpenSSL License

Copyright (c) 1998-2001 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: v

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL

Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"

4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without

5. prior written permission. For written permission, please contact [email protected]

6. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.

7. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the

OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http:// www.openssl.org/)"

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS''

AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT

NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO

EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE

LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,

EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;

LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER

IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING

NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE

USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF

SUCH DAMAGE.

This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric

Young([email protected]). This product includes software written by

Tim Hudson ([email protected]).

Original SSLeay License

Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights reserved.

This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young

([email protected]). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.

This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]). Copyright remains Eric

Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])"

The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related:-).

4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim

Hudson ([email protected])"

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED

TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS

FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT

SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY

DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF

USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER

CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN

CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE

OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS

SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH

DAMAGE.

The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU

Public Licence.] vi

1

Introduction

Thank you for purchasing this Samsung multifunctional product. Your machine provides printing, copying, scanning, and faxing functions.

This chapter includes:

Special features

Machine overview

Control panel overview

Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons

Understanding the Status LED

Menu map

Note

Some features are optional. Please check the specifications

sections. (Page 17.1)

Special features

Your new machine is equipped with special features.

Print with excellent quality and speed

• You can print in full range of colors using yellow, magenta, cyan, and black.

• You can print with a resolution of up to 9,600 x 600 dpi effective output (600 x 600 x 4 dpi). See Software section.

• Your machine prints A4-sized paper at up to 38 ppm and letter-sized paper at up to 40 ppm.

• For duplex printing, your machine prints A4-sized paper at up to 33 ppm and letter-sized paper at up to

35 ppm

Handle different paper options with flexibility

• The multi-purpose tray supports letterhead, envelopes, labels, transparencies, custom-sized media, postcards, and heavy paper. The multi-purpose tray holds up to

100 sheets of plain paper.

• The 520-sheet tray 1 and 520-sheet optional tray support plain paper in various sizes.

• The 2,100 sheet optional high tray support plain paper in various sizes.

Create professional documents

• Print watermarks. You can customize your documents with words, such as “Confidential”. See Software section.

• Print posters. The text and pictures of each page of your document are magnified and printed across the sheet of paper and can then be taped together to form a poster. See Software section.

Save time and money

• You can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper to save paper.

• You can use preprinted forms and letterhead with plain paper. See Software section.

• This machine automatically conserves electricity by substantially reducing power consumption when not in use.

Expand your machine’s capacity

• Your machine has an extra memory slot to expand their

memory. (Page 16.1)

• A network interface enables network printing. Your machine comes with a built-in network interface, 10/

100/1000 Base TX.

• Zoran IPS Emulation* compatible with

PostScript 3

Emulation

* (PS) enables PS printing.

* Zoran IPS Emulation compatible with PostScript 3

© Copyright 1995-2005, Zoran Corporation. All rights reserved. Zoran, the Zoran logo, IPS/PS3, and

OneImage are trademarks of Zoran Corporation.

* 136 PS3 fonts

Contains UFST and MicroType from Monotype Imaging Inc.

Print in various environments

• You can print with various operating system such as

Windows, Linux and Macintosh systems.

• Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and a network interface.

Copy originals in several formats

• You can create a booklet using sequential 2-sided document production.

• There are special functions to erase punch holes, staple marks and newspaper background.

• The print quality and image size may be adjusted and enhance at the same time.

Scan the originals and send it right away

• Quickly scan and send files to multiple destinations using, E-mail, SMB, FTP or Networks scanning.

• Simply use the touch screen keyboard to enter email addresses and send the scanned image immediately.

• Scan in color and use the precise compressions of

JPEG, TIFF and PDF formats.

Set a specific time to transmit a Fax (Optional)

• You can specify a certain time to transmit the fax and also send the fax to several stored destinations.

• After the transmission, the machine may print out the fax reports according to the setting.

1

.1

<Introduction>

Use USB flash memory devices

If you have a USB memory device, you can use it in various ways with your machine.

• You can scan documents and save them to the device.

• You can directly print data stored to the device.

• You can back up data and restore backup files to the machine’s memory.

IPv6

This machine supports IPv6.

Machine features

The table below lists a general overview of features supported by your machine.

( : Included, O: Optional a

)

Features CLX-8385ND

USB 2.0

USB Memory

PostScript Emulation

DADF (Duplex Automatic

Document Feeder)

Hard Disk

Fax option kit

Optional tray 2/3

High Capacity Feeder

Stand

Stacker & Stapler (Finisher)

Staple Cartridge

FDI (Foreign Device Interface) kit

SmarThru Workflow

Network Interface

(Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base TX)

Duplex printing a

4-Bin Mailbox

2-Bin Finisher a. Printing on both sides of paper.

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

a.For ordering information for optionals. (Page 15.1)

1

.2

<Introduction>

These are the main components of your machine.

Front view

Machine overview

• The symbol * is a mark for the optional device.

1

DADF cover

2

DADF document width guides

3

DADF document input tray

4

DADF document output tray

5

Scanner lid

6

Control panel

7

Side cover

8

Front cover

9

Multi-purpose tray

10

Tray 1

11

Optional tray

*

12

Stand

*

13

CCD Lock

14

Output support

15

Multi-purpose tray extension

16

Multi-purpose tray paper width guides

17

Scanner glass

18

Image transfer unit

19

Toner cartridge

20

Imaging unit

21

Waste toner container

1

.3

<Introduction>

Rear view

4

5

6

1

2

3

• The symbol * is a mark for the optional device.

Finisher (Stacker & Stapler)

*

Finisher output tray (Stacker & Stapler)

*

Finisher cover (Stacker & Stapler)

*

USB memory port

Extension telephone socket (EXT)

*

Telephone line socket (LINE)

*

7

USB port

8

9

Network port

Dummy for FDI (Foreign Device Interface)

*

10

15-pin Finisher connection (Stacker & Stapler)

*

11

Power switch

12

Power receptacle

1

.4

<Introduction>

Control panel overview

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Machine Setup

: Leads you to the machine setup and

advanced settings. (Page 12.1)

Job Status

: Shows the jobs currently running, queued jobs or completed jobs.

Status

: Shows the status of your machine. (Page 1.7)

Display screen

: Displays the current machine status and prompts during an operation. You can set menus easily using the touch screen.

Numeric keypad

: Dials fax number, and enters the number value for document copies or other options.

Clear

: Deletes characters in the edit area.

Redial/Pause

: In standby mode, redials the last number, or in edit mode, inserts a pause into a fax number.

8

9

On Hook Dial

Interrupt

: Engages the telephone line.

: Stops a job in process to do an urgent copy job.

10

Clear All

: Reverts the current settings to the default values.

11

Power Saver

: Sends the machine into the power saver mode. You can also turn the power on and off with this

button. (Page 3.6)

12

Stop

: Stops an operation at any time. The pop up window appears on the screen showing the current job that the user can stop or resume.

13

Start

: Starts a job.

Caution

When you use the touch screen, use your finger only. The screen may be damaged with a sharpen pen or anything else.

1

.5

<Introduction>

Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons

Touch screen

The touch screen allows for user-friendly operation of the machine. Once you press the home icon ( ) on the screen, it shows the

Main

screen.

Note

• Icons shown on the display screen such as

Fax

may be grayed out, depending on the optional kit or program installed in your machine.

• To switch the display screen and see other available icons, press the right arrow on the display screen.

Machine Setup button

When you press

Machine Setup

button, you can browse current

machine settings or change machine values. (Page 12.1)

• : Shows Help. You can find the explanation by feature contents.

Copy

: Enters the

Copy

menu.

Fax

: Enters the

Fax

menu. (Optional)

Documents Box

: Enters the

Documents Box

menu. (Page 13.2)

USB

: When USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on

your machine, USB icon will not be grayed out. (Page 9.1)

Scan to Email

: Enters

Scan to Email

menu.(Page 7.1)

Scan to PC

:Enters

Scan to PC

menu.(Page 7.2)

Scan to Server

:Enters

Scan to Server

menu.(Page 7.2)

Scan to USB

: Enters

Scan to USB

menu.(Page 13.2)

SmarThru Workflow

: Enters the

SmarThru Workflow

menu.

(Optional)

Machine Status

: Enters

Machine Status

menu, which shows the current status of the machine.

Admin Setting

: Enters

Admin Setting

menu, which allows an administrator to set up the machine.

Tray Management

: Enters

Tray Management

menu, which shows the currently installed tray and their status. You can also change the paper settings for each tray.

Usage Page Report

:You can see the report on the amount of printouts depending on the type.

Toner Info.

: Shows amount of toner used.

LCD Brightness

: Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen.

• : You can change the display language.

• : Guides you to remove the USB memory devices from the machine. Follow the instruction on the LCD. This icon appears only when you connect an USB memory module.

Logout

: Logs out from the currently logged in account.

• This button allows you to move to menus on the

Main

screen. directly.

Machine Status

: Shows the current status of the machine.

Admin Setting

: Allows an administrator to set up the machine.

Tray Management

: Shows the currently installed tray and their status. You can also change the paper settings for each tray.

Usage Page Report

:You can see the report on the amount of printouts depending on the type.

Job Status button

When you press

Job Status

button, the screen shows the lists of currently running jobs, queued jobs and completed jobs.

Current Job

tab: Shows the list of jobs in progress and pending.

Completed Job

tab: Provides the list of completed jobs.

Active Notice

tab: Displays any error codes that have occurred.

No.

: Gives the order of jobs.

Job Name

: Shows job information like name and type.

Status

: Gives the current status of each job.

User

: Provides user name, mainly computer name.

1

.6

<Introduction>

Job Type

: Displays details of the active job, such as job type, recipient phone number and other information.

Detail

: Shows the detailed information of the selected option on the

Current Job

,

Completed Job

and

Active Notice

list.

Delete

: Removes the selected job from the list.

Delete All

: Removes all the jobs from the list.

Close

: Closes the job status window and switches to previous view.

Power Saver button

When the machine is not in use, save electricity with the provided power save mode. Pressing this button puts the machine into power save mode.

(Page 3.6)

If you press

Power Saver

button for more than two seconds, a window appears, requesting that you turn the power off. If you choose Yes, the power is turned off.

This button can also be used to turn the button on.

Status Description

Off • The machine is not in the power save mode.

• The machine is in the low power save mode.

Blue On

Blink

The machine is in the power save mode.

The machine is in the ready power save mode.

Interrupt button

When you press

Interrupt

button, the machine goes into interrupt mode which means it stops a printing job for urgent copy job. When the urgent copy job completes, the previous printing job continues.

Status Description

Off

Blue On

The machine is not in interrupt printing mode.

The machine is in interrupt printing mode.

Note

Interrupt mode is resumed at default value (Off) after the machine is shut down or reset.

Understanding the Status LED

When the problem occurs, the

Status

LED indicates the machine's condition by the light color of it's action.

Status

Status

Off

Description

• The machine is off-line.

• The machine is in power save mode. When data is received, or any button is pressed, it switches to on-line automatically.

Status Description

Green On The machine is on-line and can be used.

Blinking • When the backlight slowly blinks, the machine is receiving data from the computer.

• When the backlight blinks rapidly, the machine is printing data.

Red On • The imaging unit is out of lifespan. Remove the old imaging unit and install a new one.

(Page 13.6)

• A toner cartridge has reached its estimated cartridge life a

.

Remove the old toner cartridge

and install a new one. (Page 13.4)

• A paper jam has occurred. (Page 14.3)

• The cover is opened. Close the cover.

• There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray.

• The machine has stopped due to a major error. Check the display message.

(Page 14.10)

• The waste toner container not installated in the machine, or full waste toner container.

(Page 13.8)

Blinking • A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting the error to be cleared. Check the display message. When the problem is cleared, the machine resumes.

• Small amount of toner is left in the cartridge.

The estimated cartridge life of toner is close.

You can temporarily improve print quality by

redistributing the toner. (Page 13.4)

a. Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to

ISO/IEC 19798. (See General specifications.) The number of pages may be affected by operating environment, printing interval, media type, and media size. Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when “End of life, Replace with new [xxx] toner cartridge” appears and the printer stops printing.

Note

Check the message on the display screen, and follow the

instruction on the message or refer to Troubleshooting part.

(Page 14.1) If the problem persists, call for service.

1

.7

<Introduction>

Menu map

The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine's functions. These menus can be accessed by pressing

Machine Setup

,

Job Status

or touching menus on the display screen. Refer to the following diagram.

Main screen

The

Main

screen is shown on the display screen on the control panel.

Some menus are grayed out depending on your model

.

Copy

Basic

tab (Page 5.1)

Original Size

Reduce/Enlarge

Duplex

Output

Original Type

Color Mode

Darkness

Paper Supply

Advanced

tab (Page 5.1)

ID Copy

N-Up

Poster Copy

Clone Copy

Book Copy

Booklet

Covers

Transparencies

WaterMark

Overlay

AutoCrop

Multi-Bin

Image

tab

(Page 5.2)

Erase Edge

Erase

Background

Margin Shift

Scan Enhance

Adjust

Backside

Image

Fax

(Optional)

Basic

tab (Page 6.2)

Address Book

Duplex

Resolution

Advanced

tab (Page 6.2)

Original Size

Delay Send

Priority Send

Polling

Mailbox

Image

tab (Page 6.3)

Original Type

Darkness

Erase Background

Color Mode

Documents Box

User Box

tab (Page 13.2)

Add

Delete

Edit

Detail

Search

Enter

System Box

tab

(Page 13.2)

Detail

Enter

USB

(Optional)

(Page 9.1)

USB Format

USB Print

Scan to USB

Basic

tab

Advanced

tab

Image

tab

Output

tab

Scan to Email

Basic

(Page 7.1)

Advanced

tab

(Page 7.3)

Image

tab

(Page 7.3)

Output

tab

(Page 7.3)

Scan to Server

Basic

(Page 7.2)

Advanced

tab

(Page 7.3)

Image

tab

(Page 7.3)

Output

tab

(Page 7.3)

Scan to PC

Basic

(Page 7.2)

Advanced

tab

(Page 7.3)

Image

tab

(Page 7.3)

Output

tab

(Page 7.3)

Scan to USB

(Page 12.2)

Basic

tab

Advanced

tab

Image

tab

Output

tab

Standard

WorkFlow

(Page 11.1)

Favorite

tab

My Workform

tab

Public Workform

tab

1

.8

<Introduction>

Machine Status

(Page 12.1)

Supplies Life

tab

Machine Info.

tab

Usage Page Report

Supplies Life

Machine Info.

Admin Setting

General

tab (Page 12.2)

Setup

tab (Page 12.5)

Print/Report

tab

(Page 12.15)

Tray Management

Tray

MP Tray

Tray2

Tray3

Machine Setup button

When you press the

Machine Setup

button on the control panel, the screen displays four menus.

Machine Status

shows the supplies life, billing, counters and reports.

Admin Setting

lets you set the advanced setup to use your machine in depth and conveniently.

Tray Management

shows the currently installed tray and their status.

Usage Page Report

can print the report on the amount of printouts depending on the paper size and type.

Job Status button

This menu shows the job in process, in waiting, in completed and the

notice message such as an error. (Page 1.6)

Current Job

Detail

Delete

Delete All

Close

Completed Job

Detail

Close

Active Notice

Detail

Close

2

Software overview

This chapter gives you an overview of the software that comes with your machine. Further details how to use the software are explained in the

Software section

.

This chapter includes:

Supplied software

Printer driver features

System requirements

Supplied software

After you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer, you must install the printer and scanner software. If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS, install the software from the supplied CD and if you are a Linux OS user, download the software from the Samsung website

(www.samsung.com/printer) and install.

Note

Machine software are occasionally updated for reasons like release of new operating system and etc. If needed, download the latest version from the Samsung website (www.samsung.com/ printer).

OS

Windows

Linux

Macintosh

Contents

Printer driver

: Use this driver to take full advantage of your printer’s features.

PostScript Printer driver

: Use this driver to print documents with complex fonts and graphics in the PS language.

Scanner driver

: TWAIN and Windows Image

Acquisition (WIA) drivers are available for scanning documents on your machine.

Smart Panel

: This program allows you to monitor the machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing.

SmarThru Office

a

: This is the accompanying Windowsbased software for your multi-functional machine.

Scan Manager

:This program allows you to scan a document on your machine and save it to a networkconnected computer.

Direct Printing Utility

: This program allows you to print

PDF files directly.

SetIP

: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP addresses. You can only use IPv4 setting for SetIP.

Samsung Network PC Fax

:You can send a fax from your computer without going to the machine.

Samsung AnyWeb Print

: This program helps you to screen-capture, preview, scrap and print the screen of

Windows Internet Explorer more easily, than when you use the ordinary program. Click

Start

>

All programs

>

Samsung Priters

>

Samsung AnyWeb Print

>

Dowload the latest version

. This tool is available only for Windows operating systems.

Samsung Easy Color Manager

: This program helps

Samsung color laser machine users to adjust color as they like. Users can adjust the printout color as they see them on the monitor. The adjusted color can be stored on the printer driver and applied to printouts.

(http://solution.samsungprinter.com/personal/ colormanager)

Printer driver

: Use this driver to run your machine from a Linux computer and print documents.

SANE

: Use this driver to scan documents.

Smart Panel

: This program allows you to monitor the machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing.

Printer driver

: Use this file to run your machine from a

Macintosh computer and print documents.

Scan driver

: TWAIN driver is available for scanning documents on your machine.

Smart Panel

: This program allows you to monitor the machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing.

2

.1

<Software overview>

a. Allows you to edit a scanned image in many ways using a powerful image editor and to send the image by email. You can also open another image editor program, like Adobe Photoshop, from SmarThru. For details, please refer to the onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru program.

Printer driver features

Your printer drivers support the following standard features:

• Paper source selection

• Paper size, orientation and media type

• Number of copies

In addition, you can use various special printing features. The following table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer drivers:

PCL 6 PostScript

Feature

Print quality option

Poster printing

Multiple pages per sheet (N-up)

Fit to page printing

Scale printing

Different source for first page

Windows

O

O

O

O

O

O

Windows

O

X

O

O

O

X

Macintosh

O

X

O

O

O

O a

Watermark

Overlay

Duplex b

Store Print

O

O

O

O

O

O

X

X

Delay Print

Spool Print

Proof Print

Stapler

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

X

O a. This feature is not supported MAC OS X 10.3.

b. The machine with Duplex feature prints both side of a paper.

O

O

X

X

Linux

O

X

O

(2, 4)

O

O

X

X

O

X

O

O

O

X

X

System requirements

Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the following requirements:

Windows

Your machine supports the following Windows operating systems.

Operating system

Windows 2000

Windows XP

Windows

Server 2003

Windows

Server 2008

Windows Vista

Windows 7

Windows

Server 2008 R2

Requirement (recommended)

CPU RAM

Free disk space

Pentium II 400 MHz

(Pentium III 933 MHz)

Pentium III 933 MHz

(Pentium IV 1 GHz)

Pentium III 933 MHz

(Pentium IV 1 GHz)

64 MB

(128 MB)

128 MB

(256 MB)

128 MB

(512 MB)

600 MB

1.5 GB

1.25 GB to

2 GB

Pentinum IV 1 GHz

(Pentinum IV 2 GHz)

Pentium IV 3 GHz

512 MB

(2048 MB)

512 MB

(1024 MB)

10 GB

15 GB

Pentium IV 1 GHz 32bit or 64-bit processor or higher

1 GB (2

GB)

16 GB

• Supports DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme).

• DVD-R/W Drive

Pentium IV 1 GHz

(x86) or 1.4 GHz (x64) processors (2 GHz or faster)

512 MB

(2048 MB)

10 GB

Note

• Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems.

• Users who have an administrator right can install the software.

Windows Terminal Service

is compatible with this machine.

2

.2

<Software overview>

Macintosh

Requirement (recommended)

Operating system

CPU

RAM free HDD space

CPU RAM

Free disk space

1 GB

Mac OS X 10.4 or lower

• Intel Processor

• Power PC G4/ G5

• 128 MB for a

Power PC based Mac

(512 MB)

• 512 MB for a

Intel-based

Mac (1 GB)

512 MB (1 GB)

Mac OS X 10.5

• Intel Processor

• 867 MHz or faster

Power PC G4/ G5

Mac OS X 10.6

• Intel Processor 1 GB (2 GB

Linux

Item

Operating system

1 GB

1 GB

Requirement (recommended)

RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64bit)

Fedora Core 2~9 (32/64bit)

SuSE Linux 9.1 (32bit)

SuSE Linux 9.2, 9.3, 10.0, 10.1, 10.2, 10.3,

11.0, 11.1 (32/64bit)

Mandrake 10.0, 10.1 (32/64bit)

Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 (32/

64bit)

Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10 (32/

64bit)

SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9, 10 (32/

64bit)

Debian 3.1, 4.0, 5.0 (32/64bit)

Pentium IV 2.4GHz (IntelCore2)

512 MB (1024 MB)

1 GB (2 GB)

Note

• It is necessary to claim swap partition of 300 MB or larger for working with large scanned images.

• The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at maximum.

2

.3

<Software overview>

3

Getting Started

This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the machine.

This chapter includes:

Setting up the hardware

Setting up the network

Installing the software

Using the SetIP program

Altitude adjustment

Machine's basic settings

Understanding the keyboard

Setting up the hardware

This section shows the steps to set up the hardware which is explained in Quick Install Guide. Make sure you read Quick Install Guide and complete following steps.

1

Select a stable location.

Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation.

Allow extra space to open covers and trays. Under the altitude

1,000 m (3,281 ft) is effective for printing. See the general settings

for Altitude Adjustment in page 3.5.

The area should be well-ventilated and away from direct sunlight or sources of heat, cold, and humidity. Do not set the machine close to the edge of your desk or table.

A horizontal plane must be within 5 mm (0.02 inches) both from front to rear and from right to left.

Caution

• When you move the machine, do not tilt or turn it up side down, or the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner, which can cause damage to the printer or bad printing quality.

• If you are moving the machine or if machine is not in use for a long time, turn on the power and wait until it goes in to the ready mode. Then close the scan lid and turn the power off.

And open the scan lid and lock the scanner lock.

2

Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items.

3

Remove the tape holding the machine tightly.

4

Install both the toner cartridges and imaging units.

5

Load paper. (See page 4.7 for "Loading paper")

6

Make sure that all the cables are connected to the machine.

7

Turn the machine on.

Note

This equipment will be inoperable when mains power fails.

3

.1

<Getting Started>

Setting a Color Standard

When you first turn the machine’s power on, a pop up asking you to set the color standard will appear. This is to improve the printouts’ color quality. Follow below steps to set the color standard.

1

Turn the machine’s power on.

2

A pop up message appears asking you to start the setting a color standard.

Press

Start

to start setting a color standard.

Or press

Cancel

to do it later.

Note

• If a message asking you to select a country appears, select a country first, then the setting a color standard message will appear.

• If you press

Cancel

, this message will appear again the next time you turn the machine’s power on.

• The machine should be in a ready mode to set the color standard. If the machine is in use, a pop up informing you a job is in a pending state will appear. Press

Retry

to retry or press

Cancel

to try it later.

3

After a moment a message asking you to print a pattern paper will appear.

Press

Print

. Pattern printing will start.

Note

There should be a white paper in the tray to print a pattern paper.

4

When pattern paper is printed out, place the pattern paper on the scanner glass and press

Scan

.

Make sure to align the arrow on the pattern paper with the arrow on the coner of the scanner glass.

5

When setting a color standard completed message appears, press

Close

.

Note

You can also use

Setting Color Standard

menu to set the color standard anytime you want.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

>

Setup

>

Color

>

Auto Color Tone

Adjustment

>

Setting Color Standard

( You can only select this option if

Auto Color Tone Adjustment

is set to

On

).

Setting up the network

You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network printer. You can set up the basic network settings with the machine's touch screen.

Note

If you want to use the USB cable, connect the cable between a computer and you machine. Refer to the software installation in

Software section

.

Supported operating systems

The following table shows the network environments supported by the machine:

Item Requirements

Network interface 10/100/1000 Base-TX

Network operating system

• Windows 2000/XP/2003/2008/Vista/7/2008 R2

• Various Linux OS

• Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.6

Network protocols

• TCP/IP on windows

• DHCP

• BOOTP

Note

If you want to set up DHCP network protocol, go to http:// developer.apple.com/networking/bonjour/download/ , select the

Bonjour program that is appropriate for your computer operating system and install the program. This program will allow you to set network parameters automatically. Follow the instructions in the installation window. This program does not support Linux.

Configuring network protocol via the machine

You can setup TCP/IP Network parameters please follow the steps listed below.

1

Make sure your machine is connected to the network with an RJ-45

Ethernet cable.

2

Make sure you turned on the machine.

3

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

4

Press

Admin Setting

.

5

When the login message appears, enter password. Touch the password input area, then the question marks appears. Use the number keypad on the control panel to enter the password. Once the password is entered, press

OK

. (Factory setting:1111)

6

Press the

Setup

tab >

Network Setup

.

7

Select

TCP/IP Protocol

.

3

.2

<Getting Started>

8

Press

IP Setting

.

9

Select

Static

and then enter

IP Address

,

Subnet Mask

and

Gateway

address fields. Touch the input area then, enter addresses by number keypad on the control panel.

Note

Contact the network administrator, if you are not sure how to configure.

10

Press

OK

.

Note

You can also set up the network settings through the network administration programs.

SyncThru™ Web Admin Service

: Web-based printer management solution for network administrators.

SyncThru™

Web Admin Service

provides you with an efficient way of managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot network machines from any site with corporate internet access. Download this program from http:// solution.samsungprinter.com

.

SyncThru™ Web Service

: Web server embedded on your network print server, which allows you to:

- Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to various network environments.

- Customize email settings and set up address book for scanning to email.

- Customize server settings and set up address book for scanning to the FTP or SMB servers.

- Customize printer, copy, and fax settings.

SetIP

: Utility program allowing you to select a network interface and manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol. You can only use IPv4 setting for Set IP .

See

page 3.4 for "Using the SetIP program".

Installing the software

You have to install the machine software for printing and scanning. The software includes drivers, applications, and other user friendly programs.

Note

• The following procedure is for when the machine is being used as a network machine. If you want to connect a machine with a USB cable, refer to

Software section

.

• The following procedure is based on the Windows XP operating system. The procedure and popup window which appears during the installation may differ depending on the operating system, the printer feature, or the interface in use.

(See

Software section

.)

1

Make sure that the network setup for your machine is completed.

(Page 3.2) All applications should be closed on your computer

before beginning installation.

2

Insert the Printer Software CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

3

The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window appears. Click

Next

.

• If the installation window does not appear, click

Start

>

Run

. Type

X:\

Setup.exe

, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive and click

OK

.

• If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server

R2, click

Start

>

All Programs

>

Accessories

>

Run

.

Type X:\

Setup.exe

replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive and click

OK

.

• If the

AutoPlay

window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 and

Windows 2008 Server R2, click

Run Setup.exe

in

Install or run program

field, and click

Continue

in the

User Account Control

windows.

4

Click

Next

.

• Select a language from the drop-down list, if necessary.

3

.3

<Getting Started>

5

Select

Typical installation for a network printer

, and then click

Next

.

6

The list of printers available on the network appears. Select the printer you want to install from the list and then click

Next

.

7

After the installation is finished, a window appears asking you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung printers in order to receive information from Samsung. If you so desire, select the corresponding checkbox(es) and click

Finish

.

Note

• If your printer does not work properly after the installation, try to reinstall the printer driver. See

Software section

.

• During the printer driver installation process, the driver installer detects the location information for your operating system and sets the default paper size for your machine. If you use a different Windows location, you must change the paper size to match the paper you usually use. Go to printer properties to change the paper size after installation is complete.

Using the SetIP program

This program is for the network IP setting using the MAC address which is the hardware serial number of the network printer card or interface.

Especially, it is for the network administrator to set several network IPs at the same time. The following procedure is based on windows XP.

Note

• You can only use

SetIP

program when your machine is connected to a network.

• You can only use IPv4 setting for Set IP.

• If you are in a non-static IP address environment and need to setup a DHCP network protocol, go to the http:// developer.apple.com/networking/bonjour/download/ , select the program Bonjour for Windows due to your computer operating system, and install the program. This program will allow you to fix the network parameter automatically. Follow the instruction in the installation window. This Bonjour program does not support Linux

• If you click the

Advanced

button, you can search a printer with the

SNMP Community Name

. Default name is ‘public’.

• If you do not see your printer on the list, click

Update

to refresh the list, or select

Add TCP/IP Port

to add your printer to the network.

To add the printer to the network, enter the port name and the IP address for the printer.

To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address, print a

Network Configuration page. (See page 13.1 for "Printing a machine report")

• To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select

Shared

Printer [UNC]

and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the

Browse

button.

Note

• If you are not sure of IP address, contact your network

administrator or print network information. (See

page 13.1 for "Printing a machine report")

• If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn off the firewall and click

Update

.

Installing the program

1

Insert the driver CD provided along with your machine. When the driver CD runs automatically, close the window.

2

Start

Windows Explorer

and open the X drive. (X represents your

CD-ROM drive.)

3

Double click

Application

>

SetIP

.

4

Double click

Setup.exe

to install this program.

5

Select the language.

6

Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation.

Starting the program

7

From the Windows

Start

menu, select

Programs

>

Samsung

Printers

>

SetIP

>

SetIP

.

3

.4

<Getting Started>

8

Select the name of your printer and click .

Note

If you cannot find your printer name, click to refresh the list.

9

Enter the network interface's MAC address, IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and then click

Apply

.

Note

If you do not know the network interface's MAC address,

print the machine's network information report. (See

page 13.1 for "Printing a machine report")

10

Click

OK

to confirm the settings.

11

Click

Exit

to close the

SetIP

program.

Altitude adjustment

The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined by the height of the machine above sea level. The following information will guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality of print.

Before you set the altitude value, find the altitude where you are using the machine.

Value

High 3

High 2

High 1

Normal

0

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

.

3

When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad and press

OK

. (Page 3.5)

4

Press the

General

tab.

5

Press

Altitude Adjustment

.

6

Select appropriate option, and then click

OK

.

Note

Log in to the

SyncThru™ Web Service

as an administrator.

(see page 13.9.)

Click

Settings

>

Machine Settings

>

System

>

Setup

>

Altitude Adj

.

Machine's basic settings

After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine's default settings. Check the next explanation if you would like to set or change values.

Setting the authentication password

To set your machine up or change the settings, you have to login. To change password, follow the next steps.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

.

3

When the login message appears, enter password. Touch the password input area, then the question marks appears, use the number keypad on the control panel to enter the password. Then, press

OK

. (Factory setting:1111)

4

Press the

Setup

tab >

Security

5

Press

Change Admin. Password

.

6

Enter old and new password, and then confirm the new password.

7

Press

OK

.

Setting the date and time

When you set the time and date, they are used in Delay fax and Delay

Print, also they are printed on reports. If, however, they are not correct, you need to change it for correct time being.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

.

3

.5

<Getting Started>

3

When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad and press

OK

. (Page 3.5)

4

Press the

General

tab >

Date & Time

>

Date&Time

.

5

Select date and time using left/right arrows. Or touch the insert area and use the numeric keypad on the control panel.

6

Press

OK

.

Note

To change the format of date and time, press

Date Format

and

Time Format

.

Changing the display language

To change the language that appears on the display, refer to the following steps.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

.

3

When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad and press

OK

. (Page 3.5)

4

Press the

General

tab.

5

Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press

Language

.

6

Select the desired language.

7

Press

OK

.

Setting job timeout

When there is no input for a certain period of time, the machine exits the current location. You can set the amount of time the machine will wait.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

.

3

When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad and press

OK

. (Page 3.5)

4

Press the

General

tab.

5

Press

Timers

.

6

Select

System Timeout

.

7

Select

On

.

8

Select a duration using left/right arrows.

9

Press

OK

.

Using power saving feature

The machine provides power saving features.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

.

3

When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad and press

OK

. (Page 3.5)

4

Press the

General

tab.

5

Press down arrow to switch the screen, press

Power Saver

.

6

Select appropriate option and time.

Low Power Save

: Keeps the temperature of the fuser unit under

100 °C, and turns off the fans within the machine except a core fan for the fuser unit.

Power Save

: Turns off all the fans even for the fuser unit after certain time.

Auto Wake

: The machine automatically wakes up from the power save mode on the time you have set.

7

Press

OK

.

Setting the default tray and paper

You can select the tray and paper you would like to keep using for printing

job. (Page 12.2)

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

.

3

When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad and press

OK

. (Page 3.5)

4

Press the

General

tab.

5

Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press

Tray

Management

.

6

Select tray and its options such as paper size and type.

7

Press

OK

.

3

.6

<Getting Started>

Note

If the optional tray is not installed, the tray options on the screen is grayed out.

Changing the default settings

You can set the default values for copy, fax, email, scan and paper all at once.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

.

3

When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad and press

OK

. (Page 3.5)

4

Press the

General

tab >

Default Settings

>

Default Option

.

5

Press the function you want to change, and change its settings.

6

Click

PCL

.

7

Select your preferred font in the

Symbol set

list.

8

Click

Apply

.

Note

Following information shows the proper font list for corresponding languages.

• Russian: CP866, ISO 8859/5 Latin Cyrillic

• Hebrew: Hebrew 15Q, Hebrew-8, Hebrew-7 (Israel only)

• Greek: ISO 8859/7 Latin Greek, PC-8 Latin/Greek

• Arabic & Farsi: HP Arabic-8, Windows Arabic, Code Page 864,

Farsi, ISO 8859/6 Latin Arabic

• OCR : OCR-A, OCR-B

Understanding the keyboard

You can enter alphabet characters, numbers, or special symbols using the keyboard on the touch screen. This keyboard is specially arranged like a normal keyboard for better usability for the user.

Touch the input area where you need to enter characters and the keyboard pops up on the screen. The keyboard below is the default showing the lowercase letters.

For example, if you want to change the default setting of the brightness & darkness for a copy job, press

Copy

>

Darkness

and adjust the brightness & darkness.

6

Press

OK

.

Changing the font setting

Your machine has preset the font for your region or country.

If you want to change the font or set the font for special condition such as the DOS environment, you can change the font setting as follows:

1

Ensure that you have installed the printer driver from the provided software CD.

2

Double-click the

Smart Panel

icon on the Windows task bar (or

Notification Area in Linux). You can also click

Smart Panel

on the status bar in Mac OS X.

3

Click

Printer Setting

.

If your machine is connected to a network,

SyncThru™ Web

Service

screen appears automatically.

4

Log in to the

SyncThru™ Web Service

as an administrator. (See

"Managing your machine from the website" on page 9.)

5

Click

Settings

>

Machine Settings

>

Printer

.

3

.7

<Getting Started>

1

: Moves the cursor between characters in the input area.

2

Backspace

: Deletes the character on the left side of the cursor.

3

Delete

: Deletes the character on the right side of the cursor.

4

Clear

: Deletes all characters in the input area.

5

Input area

: Enters letters within this line.

6

7

Shift

: Toggles between lowercase keys and uppercase keys or vice versa.

Symbols

: Switches from the alphanumeric keyboard to the symbol keyboard.

Space

: Enters a blank between characters.

8

9

OK

: Saves and closes input result.

10 Cancel

: Cancels and closes input result.

4

Loading originals and print media

This chapter introduces you how to load originals and print media into your machine.

This chapter includes:

Loading originals

Selecting print media

Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray

Loading paper

Setting the paper size and type

Loading originals

You can use the scanner glass or DADF to load an original for copying, scanning, and sending a fax.

On the scanner glass

Make sure that no originals are in the DADF. If an original is detected in the DADF, the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass. To get the best scan quality, especially for colored or gray-scaled images, use the scanner glass.

1

Lift and open the scanner lid.

2

Place the original

face down

on the scanner glass and align it with the registration guide at the top left corner of the glass.

3

Close the scanner lid.

Note

• Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality and toner consumption.

• Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the

printout. Always keep it clean. (Page 13.2)

• If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the scanner lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with the lid open.

In the DADF

Using the DADF, you can load up to 100 sheets of 75 g/m

2 paper for one job.

(20 lb bond)

When you use the DADF:

• Do not load paper smaller than 69(W) x 145(L) mm (2.7 x 5.7 inches) or larger than 216(W) x 356(L) mm (8.5 x 14 inches).

• Do not attempt to load the following types of paper:

- carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper

- coated paper

- onion skin or thin paper

- wrinkled or creased paper

- curled or rolled paper

- torn paper

• Remove all staples and paper clips before loading.

• Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry before loading.

• Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper.

• Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents having other unusual characteristics.

4

.1

<Loading originals and print media>

To load an original into the DADF:

1

Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading originals.

2

Load the originals

face up

into the DADF. Make sure that the bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on the document input tray.

3

Adjust the document width guides to the paper size.

Selecting print media

You can print on a variety of print media, such as plain paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies. Always use print media that meet the guidelines for use with your machine. Print media that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this user’s guide may cause the following problems:

• Poor print quality

• Increased paper jams

• Premature wear on the machine.

Properties, such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content, are important factors that affect the machine’s performance and the output quality. When you choose print materials, consider the following:

• The type, size and weight of the print media for your machine are described later in this section.

• Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate for your project.

• Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce sharper, more vibrant images.

• Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how crisp the printing looks on the paper.

Note

• Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and still not produce satisfactory results. This may be the result of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity levels, or other variables over which Samsung has no control.

• Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that it meets the requirements specified in this user’s guide.

Caution

Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause problems, requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by Samsung’s warranty or service agreements.

Caution

Dust on the DADF glass may cause black streaks on the printout. Always keep it clean.

4

.2

<Loading originals and print media>

Specification on print media

Type

Plain paper

Envelope

Size

Letter

Legal

US Folio

A4

Oficio

JIS B5

ISO B5

Executive

A5

Statement

A6

Envelope Monarch

Envelope No. 10

Envelope No. 9

Envelope DL

Envelope C5

Envelope C6

Letter, A4, Oficio

Dimensions

216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)

216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)

216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)

210 x 297 mm (8.26 x 11.69 inches)

216 x 343 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches)

182 x 257 mm (7.16 x 10.11 inches)

176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)

184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches)

148 x 210 mm (5.82 x 8.26 inches)

140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 inches)

105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.82 inches)

98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.5 inches)

105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 inches)

98 x 225 mm (3.87 x 8.87 inches)

110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)

162 x 229 mm (6.37 x 9.01 inches)

114 x 162 mm (4.48 x 6.38 inches)

Refer to the Plain paper section

75 to 90 g/m

Weight

• 60 to 90 g/m for the tray1.

• 60 to 90 g/m

2

2

(16 to 24 lb bond)

2

(16 to 24 lb bond) for the multi-purpose tray

• 60 to 90 g/m

2

(16 to 24 lb bond) for the high capacity feeder

(20 to 24 lb bond)

Capacity a

• 500 sheets of 80 g/m

[20 lb(75 g/m

2

2

) bond 520 sheets] paper in the tray1

• 100 sheets of 80 g/m

2

(20 lb bond) in the multi-purpose tray

• 1,950 sheets of 80 g/m

2

[20 lb(75 g/m

2

) bond 2,100 sheets] in the high capacity feeder b

• 50 sheets of 80 g/m paper in the tray1

• 10 sheets of 80 g/m

2

2

(20 lb)

(20 lb) in the multi-purpose tray

Transparency

Labels

Card stock c

Thick paper

Letter, Legal, US Folio,

A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,

Executive, A5, Statement

Letter, Legal, US Folio,

A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,

Executive, A5, Statement,

Post Card 4x6

Letter, Legal, US Folio,

A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,

Executive, A5, Statement,

Post Card 4x6

Minimum size (custom)

Maximum size (custom)

Refer to the Plain paper section

Refer to the Plain paper section

Refer to the Plain paper section

98 x 148 mm (3.86 x 5.83 inches)

216 x 1200 mm (8.5 x 47.24 inches) a. Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.

b. High capacity feeder does not support A6.

c. We recommend using Card stock that is less than 0.23mm thick.

138 to 146 g/m

2

(36 to 39 lb bond)

• 100 sheets of 80 g/m

2

(20 lb) paper in the tray1

120 to 150 g/m bond)

2

(32 to 40 lb

• 20 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb) in the multi-purpose tray

• 100 sheets of 80 g/m

2

(20 lb) paper in the tray1

• 35 sheets of 80 g/m

2

(20 lb) in the multi-purpose tray

• 100 sheets of paper in the tray1

• 120 to 163 g/m

2

(24 to 43 lb bond) for the tray1

• 120 to 220 g/m

2

(24 to 58 lb bond) for the multi-purpose tray

• 90 to 120 g/m

2

(24 to 32 lb bond) for the tray1

• 10 sheets of paper in the multi-purpose tray

• 250 sheets of paper in the tray1

• 90 to 120 g/m

2

(24 to 32 lb bond) for the multi-purpose tray

• 90~105 g/m

2

(24 to 28 lb bond) for high capacity feeder

60 to 220 g/m

2

(16 to 58 lb bond)

• 50 sheets of paper in the multi-purpose tray

• 1250 sheets of paper in the high capacity feeder b

4

.3

<Loading originals and print media>

Media sizes supported in each mode

Mode

Copy mode

Single side printing

Duplex printing

Fax mode b a

Size

Letter, A4, Legal, Folio,

Oficio, Executive, ISO

B5, A5

All sizes supported by the machine

Letter, A4, Legal, Folio,

Oficio, JIS B5, ISO B5,

Executive, A5,

Statement

Letter, A4, Legal

Source

• Tray 1

• Optional tray

Multi-purpose tray

• High capacity feeder

• Tray 1

• Optional tray

• Multi-purpose tray

• High capacity feeder

• Tray 1

• Optional tray

• Multi-purpose tray

• High capacity feeder

• Ttray 1

• Optional tray

• High capacity feeder

a. 60 to 120 g/m 2 (16 to 32 lb bond) only b. Only the optional fax kit is installed.

Guidelines for selecting and storing print media

When selecting or loading paper, envelopes, or other print materials, keep these guidelines in mind:

• Always use print media that conform with the specifications listed on

page 4.3.

• Attempting to print on damp, curled, wrinkled, or torn paper can cause paper jams and poor print quality.

• For the best print quality, use only high quality copier grade paper specifically recommended for use in laser printers.

• Avoid using the following media types:

- Paper with embossed lettering, perforations, or a texture that is too smooth or too rough

- Erasable bond paper

- Multi-paged paper

- Synthetic paper and thermally reactive paper

- Carbonless paper and Tracing paper.

Use of these types of paper could result in paper jams, chemical smells, and damage to your machine.

• Store print media in its ream wrapper until you are ready to use it.

Place cartons on pallets or shelves, not on the floor. Do not place heavy objects on top of the paper, whether it is packaged or unpackaged. Keep it away from moisture or other conditions that can cause it to wrinkle or curl.

• Store unused print media at temperatures between 15 °C and 30 °C.

The relative humidity should be between 10% and 70%.

• Store unused print media in a moisture-proof wrap, such as a plastic container or bag, to prevent dust and moisture from contaminating your paper.

• Load special media types one sheet at a time through the multipurpose tray to avoid paper jams.

• To prevent print media, such as transparencies and label sheets, from sticking together, remove them as they print out.

Guidelines for special print media

Media type Guidelines

Envelopes • Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes. When selecting envelopes, consider the following factors:

- Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 90 g/m

2

(20 to 24 lb bond) or jamming may occur.

- Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl, and should not contain air.

- Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged.

- Temperature: You should use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and pressure of the machine during operation.

• Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp and well creased folds.

• Do not use stamped envelopes.

• Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated lining, self-adhesive seals, or other synthetic materials.

• Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.

• Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the corner of the envelope.

Unacceptable

• Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the printer’s fusing temperature for 0.1 second. Check your machine’s specification to view the fusing

temperature, see page 17.1. The extra flaps and

strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams, and may even damage the fuser.

• For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm from the edges of the envelope.

• Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s seams meet.

4

.4

<Loading originals and print media>

Acceptable

Media type Guidelines

Transparencies • To avoid damaging the machine, use only transparencies designed for use in laser printers.

• Transparencies used in the printer must be able to withstand the machine’s fusing temperature.

Check your machine’s specification to view the

fusing temperature, see page 17.1.

• Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine.

• Do not leave them in the paper tray for long periods of time. Dust and dirt may accumulate on them, resulting in spotty printing.

• To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle them carefully.

• To avoid fading, do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged sunlight.

• Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled, curled, or have any torn edges.

• When you use the color printed transparency on a beam projector, due to toner’s characteristics, it won’t be reflected in colors.

Caution

• Recommended media: Transparency for a Color Laser Printers produced by HP,

Xerox and 3M.

• It is not recommended to use paperbacked transparencies such as

Xerox 3R91334, which can cause a jam or be scratched.

Media type

Labels

Card stock or custom-sized materials

Preprinted paper

Guidelines

• To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels designed for use in laser printers.

• When selecting labels, consider the following factors:

- Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at your machine’s fusing temperature.

Check your machine’s specification to view the

fusing temperature, see page 17.1.

- Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them. Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels, causing serious jams.

- Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm ( 5 inches) of curl in any direction.

- Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other indications of separation.

• Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels. Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can cause paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine components.

• Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once. The adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine.

• Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise damaged.

Do not print on media smaller than 98 mm (3.86 inches) wide or 148 mm (5.83 inches) long.

• In the software application, set margins at least

6.4 mm (0.25 inches) away from the edges of the material.

• Letterhead must be printed with heat-resistant ink that will not melt, vaporize, or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the printer’s fusing temperature for 0.1 second.

Check your machine’s specification to view the

fusing temperature, see page 17.1.

• Letterhead ink must be non-flammable and should not adversely affect printer rollers.

• Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes during storage.

• Before you load preprinted paper, such as forms and letterhead, verify that the ink on the paper is dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off preprinted paper, reducing print quality.

Note

Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause problems, requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by

Samsung’s warranty or service agreements.

4

.5

<Loading originals and print media>

Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray

To load longer sizes of paper, such as Legal-sized paper, you need to adjust the paper guides to extend the paper tray.

2

After inserting paper into the tray, while pinching the paper width guide as shown, move it toward the stack of paper until it lightly touches the side of the stack. Do not press the guide too tightly to the edge of the paper; the guide may bend the paper.

1

1

2 paper length guide paper width guide

2

Note

If you have installed an optional high capacity feeder, refer to

Quick Install Sheet to adjust paper size.

1

Adjust the paper length guide to the desired paper length. It is preset to Letter or A4 size depending on the country. To load another size, hold the lever and move the length guide to the corresponding position.

Note

• Do not push the paper width guides far enough to cause the materials to warp.

• If you do not adjust the paper width guides, it may cause paper jams.

4

.6

<Loading originals and print media>

Loading paper

Loading paper in tray 1, optional tray or optional high capacity feeder

Load the print media you use for the majority of your print jobs in the tray 1. The tray 1 can hold a maximum of 520 sheets of 80 g/m

2

(20 lb bond) plain paper.

You can purchase an optional tray and attach it below the standard tray

to load an additional 520 sheets of paper. (Page 15.1)

1

To load paper, pull and open the paper tray and place paper with the side you want to print facing up.

Envelope

Preprinted paper

Transparency

Punched paper Card stock Letterhead paper

Label

2

After inserting paper into the tray, while pinching the paper width guide as shown, move it toward the stack of paper until it lightly touches the side of the stack. Do not press the guide too tightly to the edge of the paper; the guide may bend the paper.

Note

• When using a transparency, avoid using transparency without stripe band or with stripe band on the longer side of the paper.

It might cause a paper feeding jam.

• Place the side to be printed facing up.

Note

• Do not push the paper width guides far enough to cause the materials to warp.

• If you do not adjust the paper width guides, it may cause paper jams.

4

.7

<Loading originals and print media>

3

After loading paper, set the paper type and size for the tray. See

page 4.9 for copying and faxing or

Software section

for PCprinting.

Note

If you experience problems with paper feed, place one sheet at a time in the multi-purpose tray.

In the multi-purpose tray

The multi-purpose tray can hold special sizes and types of print material, such as transparencies, postcards, note cards, and envelopes. It is useful for single page printing on letterhead or colored paper.

Tips on using the multi-purpose tray

• Load only one size of print media at a time in the multi-purpose tray.

• To prevent paper jams, do not add paper when there is still paper in the multi-purpose tray. This also applies to other types of print media.

• Print media should be loaded face down with the top edge going into the multi-purpose tray first and be placed in the center of the tray.

• Always load only the specified print media to avoid paper jams and

print quality problems. (Page 4.2)

• Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading them into the multi-purpose tray.

To load paper in the multi-purpose tray:

1

Open the multi-purpose tray and unfold the multi-purpose tray extension, as shown.

3

Load the paper with the side to be printed on facing down.

Note

• When using a transparency, avoid using transparency without stripe band or with stripe band on the longer side of the paper.

It might cause a paper feeding jam.

• Place the side to be printed facing down.

Envelope

Preprinted paper

Transparency

Punched paper Card stock Letterhead paper

Label

Banner paper

2

If you are using paper, flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading.

For transparencies, hold them by the edges and avoid touching the print side. Oils from your fingers can cause print quality problems.

4

.8

<Loading originals and print media>

Make sure you load one sheet at a time, and hold the paper with two hands for the paper not to fall since the paper length is longer than the multi-tray length.

4

Squeeze the multi-purpose tray paper width guides and adjust them to the width of the paper. Do not force too much, or the paper will be bent, which will result in a paper jam or skew.

5

After loading paper, set the paper type and size for the multi-

purpose tray. See page 4.9 for copying and faxing or the

Software section

for PC-printing.

Note

The settings made from the printer driver override the settings on the control panel.

6

After printing, fold the multi-purpose tray extension and close the multi-purpose tray.

Setting the paper size and type

After loading paper in the paper tray, you need to set the paper size and type. These settings will apply to

Copy

and

Fax

modes.

For PC-printing, you need to select the paper size and type in the application program you use on your PC. (See

Software section

.)

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

.

3

When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad and press

OK

. (Page 3.5)

4

Press the

General

tab.

5

Press the down arrow to switch the screen, press

Tray

Management

.

6

Select tray and its options such as paper size and type.

7

Press

OK

.

Note

If you want to use special sized paper such as a billing paper, select

Custom

in the

Paper

tab in the printer propeties. See

Software section

.

4

.9

<Loading originals and print media>

5

Copying

This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a copy machine.

This chapter includes:

Understanding the Copy screen

Copying originals

Changing the settings for each copy

Using special copy features

Understanding the Copy screen

When you press

Copy

on the

Main

screen, the

Ready To Copy

screen appears which has several tabs and lots of copying options. All the options are grouped by features so that you can configure your selections easily.

If the screen displays an other menu, press ( screen.

) to go to the

Main

Basic tab

Note

When

Auto

mode is used, there maybe some orginals for which the mode is not correctly switched between

appropriate to the original.

in color and black/ white

. In this case,

select

Color

or

B/W

manually as

Light

,

Dark

: Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is easier to read, when the original contains faint markings and dark

images. (Page 5.5)

Paper Supply

: Selects the paper supply tray.

Saving to box

: Sets the machine to save the originals to the document box for later use.

Note

For details about how to use the

Document Box

, refer to the

Document Box

chapter. (Page 10.1.)

Advanced tab

Original Size

: Selects the size of the originals. (Page 5.3)

Reduce/Enlarge

: Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image.

(Page 5.3)

Duplex

: Sets the machine to print copies on both sides of the

paper. (Page 5.3)

Output

: Selects

Collated

or

Uncollated

copy options. If you install the optional stacker & stapler, then the staple related option

appears. (Page 5.4)

Text

,

Text/Photo

,

Photo

,

Magazine

: Improves the copy quality by

selecting the document type for the current copy job. (Page 5.5)

Color

,

B/W

,

Auto

: You can switch this mode among color, black/ white and automatic mode. Select whether the user print copies in mono or color. If you select the

Auto

mode, the machine detects the original document and decide the output is colored or not. In this case, the copying speed will be reduced.

Job Build

: Allows you to copy several pages or different types of

originals into a single copy. (Page 5.5.).

ID Copy

: Prints 2-sided originals on one sheet of paper. This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item, such as a

business card. (Page 5.6)

N-Up

: Prints 2 or 4 original images, reduced to fit onto one sheet of

paper. (Page 5.6)

Poster Copy

: Prints a large image into divided 9 pages.

(Page 5.7)

Clone Copy

: Prints multiple image copies from the original

document on a single page. (Page 5.8)

Book Copy

: Allows you to copy an entire book. (Page 5.8)

Booklet

: Creates booklets from a sequential set of either 1-sided

or 2-sided originals. (Page 5.8)

Covers

: Automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock

taken from a different tray. (Page 5.9)

Transparencies

: Adds a blank or printed divider between

transparencies within a set. (Page 5.9)

WaterMark

: Prints an image with the added watermark. (Page 5.9)

Overlay

: Prints an image with the image previously stored in your

machine. (Page 5.9)

5

.1

<Copying>

Auto Crop

: Prints only the image of an original after cropping the

blank parts like the margin. (Page 5.9)

Multi-Bin

: Allows you to select the output mode. (Page 5.10)

Image tab

Copying originals

This is the normal and usual procedure for copying your originals.

1

Press

Copy

from the

Main

screen.

2

Place originals, face up, in the DADF, or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down.

Erase Edge

: Allows you to erase punch holes, staple marks, and

fold creases along any of the four documents edges. (Page 5.10)

Erase Background

: Prints an image with no background.

(Page 5.11)

Margin Shift

: Creates a binding edge for the document.

(Page 5.11)

Scan Enhance

: Use this feature for the better quality of copy-

output. (Page 5.11)

Adjust Backside Image

: Allows you to copy and image and

remove the back-side image shown through. (Page 5.11)

3

Adjust the settings for each copy such as

Original Size

,

Reduce/

Enlarge

,

Duplex

and more. (Page 5.3, Page 5.3)

4

Select the tray by pressing the appropriate tray on screen.

5

Enter the number of copies using the number keypad, if necessary.

6

Press

Start

on the control panel to begin copying.

5

.2

<Copying>

Note

To cancel the current copy job, press

Stop

on the control panel.

Or you can delete the current and pending job using

Job Status

on the control panel. Select the job you want to cancel and press

Delete

.

Changing the settings for each copy

On the

Basic

tab of the

Copy

screen, you can select copy features before starting to copy.

Note

The

Basic

tab setting is only for each copy. That means that the setting does not apply to the next copy job. After finishing the current copy job, the machine automatically restores the default settings after certain time. Or the machine resume to default setting when you press the

Clear All

button on the control panel or when you press other menu such as fax or else except the

Job Status

screen.

The default copy setting can be changed in

Admin Setting

.

(Page 12.2)

Changing the size of originals

Press the

Basic

tab >

Original Size

, then use left/right arrows to set the original size.

Press

more

to see the detail values.

Reducing or enlarging copies

Press the

Basic

tab >

Reduce/Enlarge

, then use left/right arrows to reduce or enlarge an image on the paper.

Press

more

to see the values.

Original(100%)

: Prints texts or images the same size as originals.

Auto Fit

: Reduces or enlarges the original based on the size of the output paper.

• Other preset values: Allows you to easily select commonly used values.

Note

The

Custom

option is different depending on where the originals is placed. In the DADF, 25~200% adjustment is possible. And in the scanner glass, 25~400% adjustment is possible.

Copying on both sides of originals (Duplex)

Press the

Basic

tab >

Duplex

, then use left/right arrows to select

Duplex

value.

Note

If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy both sides of original, the message

Another Page?

appears after the first page copied. At this time, load the original’s the other side facing down and press

Yes

, then the machine starts scanning the second page of your original.

Press

more

to see the detail values.

1 -> 1 Sided

: Scans one side of an original and prints on one side of the paper, this function produces exactly the same print out from originals.

Custom

: Selects the scanning area of the original. Press the cardinal point arrows to set the size.

Auto

(DADF only): Automatically detects the size of originals, but this option supports only when originals are Legal, Letter, or A5 sized. If the originals is mixed-sized, then the machine detects the largest original size and select the largest-sized paper in the tray.

Mixed Size (Letter & Legal)

(DADF only): Allows for the use of both of Letter and Legal sized papers together, and the machine uses the proper-sized paper from several trays. For example, if the originals are total 3 pages, 1st page is the letter-sized paper, 2nd page is the legal-sized paper, and 3rd page is the letter-sized paper, then the machine prints the output first letter, legal, and letter in order from several trays.

• Other preset values: Allows user to easily select commonly used values.

1 -> 2 Sided

: Scans one side of originals and prints them on both sides of the paper.

5

.3

<Copying>

1 -> 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2

: Scans one side of the originals and prints on both sides of the paper, but the information on the back side of the print out is rotated 180°.

Reverse 2 -> 2 Sided

: Scans the both sides of originals and prints them on both sides of a paper. But the machine reverses the print out order of the originals. The machine prints the back sides of originals first, which means the front sides of originals is printed on the back side of a paper.

2 -> 1 Sided

: Scans both sides of the originals and prints each of one on a separate sheet.

2 -> 2 Sided

: Scans both sides of the original and prints on both sides of the paper. This function produces exactly the same print out from the originals.

2 -> 1 Sided, Rotate Side 2

: Scans both sides of the original and prints each one on a separate sheet, but the information on the back side of the printout is rotated 180 degree.

Deciding the form of copy output (Collated / Staple)

Press the

Basic

tab >

Output

, then use left/right arrows to select

Collated

or

Stapled

. This feature is supported only when the original is on the DADF.

Note

If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy both sides of original, the message

Another Page?

appears after the first page copied. At this time, load the original’s the other side facing down and press

Yes

, then the machine starts scanning the second page of your original.

Press

more

to see the values.

Collated

: Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals.

Uncollated

: Prints output sorted into stacks of individual pages.

Reverse 1 -> 2 Sided

: Scans originals and prints them on both sides of a paper. But the machine reverses the print out order of the originals. The machine prints the second original first, which means the firstly input original is printed on the back side of a paper. For instance, if you print 6 sheet of original papers, every even numbered pages of originals will be printed on the front side of a paper, and every odd numbered pages of originals will be printed on the back side of a paper.

Staple, Portrait

: Adds a single staple to all of your portraitoriented output.

Staple, Landscape

: Adds a single staple to all of your landscapeoriented output.

Reverse 1 -> 2 Sided, Rotate Sided2

: Scans originals and prints them on both sides of a paper. But the machine reverses the print out order of the originals. The machine prints the second original first, which means the firstly input original is printed on the back side of a paper. For instance, if you print 6 sheet of original papers, every even numbered pages of originals will be printed on the front side of a paper, and every odd numbered pages of originals will be printed on the back side of a paper. The information on the back side of the print out is rotated 180 degree.

Note

The Staple feature is available with an optional stacker &

stapler. (Page 15.1)

5

.4

<Copying>

Selecting the type of originals

Press the

Basic

tab and select an appropriate original type.

Note

When the machine enters power saver mode, the jobs in the segment list will be deleted to prevent accessing by the unexpected users.

1

Press

Copy

from the

Main

screen.

2

Select the tray in

Paper Supply

.

3

Press the

Advanced

tab >

Job Build

.

4

Press

On

to enable job build function.

Text

: Use for originals containing mostly text.

Text/Photo

: Use for originals with mixed text and photographs.

Photo

: Use when originals are photographs.

Magazine

: Use when originals are magazines.

Color Mode

Select the color mode you want to use.

Color

: Copys the originals in color.

B/W

: Copys the originals in black and white.

Auto

: The machine automatically senses the color of the originals and copys in color or b/w according to the originals.

Changing the darkness

This defines the degree of darkness. Use left/right arrows to change the level of light/dark in the printouts.

Using special copy features

On the

Advanced

tab or the

Image

tab of the

Copy

screen, you can select specific copy features.

Merging multiple jobs as a single copy

This feature allows you to merge multiple copy jobs into a single copy. For example, if you need to use the DADF and the scanner glass for a copy job, you can use this feature. In the picture below, each number means each segment order.

① Segment 1 from the DADF.

② Segment 2 from the scanner glass.

③ Segment 3 from the DADF.

Segment 4 from the scanner glass.

Segment 5 from the DADF.

5

.5

<Copying>

-

Off

: Disables

Job Build

feature.

-

On

: Enables

Job Build

feature.

-

Display Between Segments

: After executing a segment, the job is paused with this screen. is displayed Then the user can select to keep copying or stop.

-

Print

: Prints the sample page(s) of a segment to confirm the contents.

-

Delete

: Deletes a segment.

-

Delete All

: Deletes all segments.

-

Print All

: Prints all segments.

-

Add Segment

: Adds a new segment.

-

Cancel

: Removes all segments in the list, and cancels the job.

5

Press

Add Segment

.

6

Place originals, face up, in the DADF, or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down.

7

Press

Start

on the control panel.

Then the machine starts scanning.

8

Repeat step 5 to step 7.

Note

As long as the hard drive capacity of your device remains, you can add segments without any restriction.

9

After adding segments, press

Print All

.

ID card copying

The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original. This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item, such as a business card.

Note

The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature.

1

Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown, and close the scanner lid.

Copying ID with the manual ID copy option

If you want to copy several ID cards on a paper, or adjust the copying position of the page, follow the next steps.

Next steps are the procedure when you copy two people's driver's license cards (100mm X 80mm) in one page.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Select

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, then enter password and press

OK

.

3

Press the

Setup tab

>

Copy Setup

>

Mamual ID Copy Setup

.

4

Press the number from the template list table.

5

Press

Edit Template

.

6

Selec the

appropriate

option values and press

OK

.

Template Name

: Enter the template name.

Scan Position

: Select the position for scanning. You should select the largest scanning position out of the originals.

LEFT, TOP : X-000mm/Y-000mm, RIGHT, BOTTOM: X-110mm/Y-

090mm

2

Press

Copy

from the

Main

screen.

3

Press the

Advanced

tab >

ID Copy

.

4

Press

Start

on the control panel.

Then the machine starts scanning the front side.

5

Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass, where arrows indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.

6

Press

Start

on the control panel to begin copying.

Note

If this option is grayed out, select the

Duplex

option to

1 -> 1

Sided

.

Number of Images

: Select how many images are on a page.

(select number 4.)

Image Position

: Select the position of a page which images are on. If you choose to copy four images, you have to select four positions here.

First Image Position

: LEFT, TOP : X-000mm/Y-020mm, RIGHT,

BOTTOM: X-100mm/Y-100mm

Second Image Position

: LEFT, TOP : X-105mm/Y-020mm,

RIGHT, BOTTOM: X-205mm/Y-100mm

Third Image Position

: LEFT, TOP : X-000mm/Y-150mm, RIGHT,

BOTTOM: X-100mm/Y-230mm

5

.6

<Copying>

Forth Image Position

: LEFT, TOP : X-105mm/Y-150mm, RIGHT,

BOTTOM: X-205mm/Y-230mm

Poster copying

Your original will be divided into 9 portions. You can paste the printed pages together to make one poster-sized document. This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass. Each portion is scanned and printed on by one in the following order.

7

Press

OK

, the template you have saved will be shown in the template list table.

8

Press and select

Copy

.

9

Press the

Advanced tab

>

ID Copy

>

Mamual ID Copy Setup

.

10

Press the template you have saved from the template list.

11

Press the

Start

button on the control panel. now follow the instruction on display to finish the ID copy for four images.

2-up or 4-up copying (N-up)

The machine reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4 pages onto one sheet of paper.

2-up copying 4-up copying

1

Load the originals, face up, in the DADF. (Page 4.1)

2

Press

Copy

from the

Main

screen.

3

Select the tray in

Paper Supply

.

4

Press the

Advanced

tab >

N-Up

.

5

Select

Off

,

2Up

, or

4Up

.

Off

: Copies an original onto one sheet of paper.

2Up

: Copies two separate originals onto one page.

4Up

: Copies four separate originals onto one page.

6

Press

Start

on the control panel.

Note

You cannot adjust the copy size using the

Reduce/Enlarge

for the

N-Up

feature.

1

Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)

Note

The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature.

2

Press

Copy

from the

Main

screen.

3

Select the tray in

Paper Supply

.

4

Press the

Advanced

tab >

Poster Copy

.

Note

If this option is grayed out, select following options in the

Basic tab to activate it;

-

Duplex

to

1 -> 1 Sided

-

Reduce/Enlarge

to

Original(100%)

-

Paper Supply

to

Tray

.

5

Press

On

to activate this feature.

6

Press

OK

.

7

Press

Start

on the control panel to begin copying.

Note

Your original is divided into 9 portions. Each portion is scanned and printed one by one in the following order:

5

.7

<Copying>

Clone copying

The machine prints multiple original images on a single page. The number of images is automatically determined by the original image and the paper size.

1

Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)

Note

The original must be placed on the scanner glass in order to use this feature.

2

Press

Copy

from the

Main

screen.

3

Select the tray in

Paper Supply

.

4

Press the

Advanced

tab >

Clone Copy

.

Note

If this option is grayed out, select following options in the

Basic tab to activate it;

-

Duplex

to

1 -> 1 Sided

-

Reduce/Enlarge

to

Original(100%)

-

Paper Supply

to

Tray

.

5

Press

On

to activate this feature.

6

Press

OK

.

7

Press

Start

on the control panel to begin copying.

Book copying

Use this feature to copy a book.

If the book or magazine is thicker than

30 mm (1.18 inches), start copying with the scanner lid open.

Note

To remove shadows of a book edge, press the

Image

tab >

Erase Edge

>

Book Center and Edge Erase

.

4

Select the binding option.

Off

: Disables this feature.

Left Page

: Prints left page of the book.

Right Page

: Prints right page of the book.

Both Page

: Prints both facing pages of the book.

5

Press

OK

.

6

Press

Start

on the control panel to begin copying.

Booklet copying

The machine automatically prints on one or both sides of the paper, which are then folded to produce a booklet with all of the pages in the correct sequence.

The machine will also reduce and correctly adjust the position of each image to fit on the selected paper.

1

Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original

face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)

2

Press

Copy

from the

Main

screen.

3

Select the tray in

Paper Supply

.

4

Press the

Advanced

tab >

Booklet

.

5

Press

On

to activate this feature, and select detailed settings for each option.

1 Sided Original

: Copys on one side of the paper.

2 Sided Original

: Copys on both sides of the paper.

6

Press

OK

.

7

Press

Start

on the control panel to begin copying.

Note

This feature is possible only with A4, Letter, Legal, Folio, Oficio,

JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5 and Statement sized paper.

1

Place the originals face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)

Note

The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature.

2

Press

Copy

from the

Main

screen.

3

Press the

Advanced

tab >

Book Copy

.

5

.8

<Copying>

Cover copying

The machine automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock taken from a different tray. Covers must be the same size and orientation as the main body of the job.

1

Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original

face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)

2

Press

Copy

from the

Main

screen.

3

Select the tray in

Paper Supply

.

4

Press the

Advanced

tab >

Covers

.

Note

Once you have set the

Paper Supply

option to

Auto

, you cannot use this feature.

5

Press

On

to use this feature, and select detailed settings for each option.

Position

: Selects whether the cover will be placed at the front, back, or both.

Cover Sheet

: Selects whether the cover will be 1 sided, 2 sided, or blank paper.

Paper Source

: Select the paper tray, where the cover sheet is loaded.

6

Press

OK

.

7

Press

Start

on the control panel to begin copying.

Transparency copying

When you prepare transparencies for presentations, use this feature to copy the information.

Note

Before you start this special copy job, set the tray's Paper Types

and Paper Size to Transparency.(Page 4.9)

1

Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original

face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)

2

Load the right-sized transparencies into the tray you have set.

3

Set the paper type to

Transparency

.

4

Press

Copy

from the

Main

screen.

5

Press the

Advanced

tab >

Transparencies

.

6

Select

Transparencies

option.

No Separator

: Does not place separator sheets between transparencies.

Black Sheet

: Places a blank sheet between transparencies.

Printed Sheet

: Places the same image on the divider sheets as printed on the transparency.

7

Select media sources, in case you selected either

Black Sheet

or

Printed Sheet

.

8

Press

OK

.

9

Press

Start

on the control panel to begin copying.

Watermark copying

You can copy the original with a watermark. For example, you can use it when you want to have large gray letters such as

Top Secret

or

Confidential

printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of the copy.

1

Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original

face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)

2

Press

Copy

from the

Main

screen.

3

Select the tray in

Paper Supply

.

4

Press the

Advanced

tab >

WaterMark

.

5

Select

WaterMark

option.

Off

: Disables this feature.

Top Secret

: Prints the original with

Top Secret

text.

Confidential

: Prints the original with

Confidential

text.

Urgent

: Prints the original with

Urgent

text.

Draft

: Prints the original with

Draft

text.

Custom

: The machine prints the original with the customized text.

6

Select

1st Page only

,

Size

,

Position

,

Darkness

of options.

7

Press

OK

.

8

Press

Start

on the control panel to begin copying.

5

.9

<Copying>

Overlay copying

If you scan and store the data such as format, you can copy the original with the previously stored data.

1

Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original

face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)

2

Press

Copy

from the

Main

screen.

3

Select the tray in

Paper Supply

.

4

Press the

Advanced

tab >

Overlay

.

5

Press

List

.

6

Select a file name.

7

Select a overlay option.

New

: Makes the new overlay. Select options for a new overlay and enter the file name.

Detail

: Shows information of the selected overlay.

Edit

: Modifies the name of the selected overlay.

Delete

: Deletes the selected overlay.

Apply

: Prints the originals with the selected overlay.

Print

: Prints the selected overlay.

Cancel

: Cancels overlay options you have selected.

8

Press

Start

on the control panel to begin copying.

If you have selected option

New

in step 7, the machine starts storing the new overlay by pressing the

Start

button.

Auto crop copying

The machine prints only the image of an original after cropping the blank parts like the margin.

3

Select the tray in

Paper Supply

.

4

Press the

Advanced

tab >

Auto Crop

.

5

Press

On

to activate this feature.

6

Press

OK

.

7

Press

Start

on the control panel to begin copying.

Multi-Bin

You can choose the output mode for printouts.

Note

You can only use this feature if you have installed optional 2-Bin

Finisher or 4-Bin Mailbox.

1

Press

Copy

from the

Main

screen.

2

Press the

Advanced

tab >

Multi-Bin

.

3

Select the appropriate option.

Mailbox

: Printouts are stacked in the bin you have set. If you set the mailbox to Bin3, printouts will be stacked in Bin3.

Job Separator

: Printouts are stacked in the sequence of job order in each bin. However, if there is a vacant bin left, the vacant bin has priority, which means prinouts will be stacked there first.

Collator

: Printouts are stacked in sets to match the sequence of originals in each bin.

Stacker

: Printouts are stacked in bins one-by-one. When Bin1 is full, printouts will be stacked in Bin2.

4

Press

OK

.

Erasing edges

You can copy the original without any edges or margins.

1

Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original

face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)

2

Press

Copy

from the

Main

screen.

1

Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. Or load the

originals face up in the DADF. (Page 4.1)

2

Press

Copy

from the

Main

screen.

3

Press the

Image

tab >

Erase Edge

.

4

Select the appropriate option.

Off

: Disables this feature.

Border Erase

: Erases equal amounts on all edges of the copies.

5

.10

<Copying>

Small Original Erase

: Erases 0.25" (6mm) from the edge of the copies. The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature.

Hole Punch Erase

: Erases hole punch marks from the left edge of the copies.

Book Center and Edge Erase

: Erases shadows of a binding or book edge from the center and side edges of the copies. This

feature only applies when you do copying a book. (Page 5.8)

Note

If you have set the

Book Copy

option to

Off

, you cannot use

Book Center and Edge Erase

.

5

Press

OK

.

6

Press

Start

on the control panel to begin copying.

Erasing background images

This feature is helpful when copying originals containing color in the background, as in newspapers or catalogs.

1

Load the originals, face up, in the DADF. Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass.

2

Press

Copy

from the

Main

screen.

3

Press the

Image

tab >

Erase Background

.

Off

: Disables this feature.

Auto

: Optimizes the background.

Enhance

: The higher the number is, the more vivid the background is.

Erase

: The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.

4

Press

OK

.

5

Press

Start

on the control panel to begin copying.

Shifting margins

You can secure a room for binding by shifting the margin of a page.

4

Select

Margin Shift

option.

Off

: Disables this feature.

Auto Center

: Automatically centers of the paper copy. The original must be loaded on the scanner glass to use this feature. This option supports only the original is loaded on the scanner glass.

Custom Margin

: Adjusts the margin of the left and right, top and bottom as you want using arrows. This option supports both on the scanner glass or in DADF.

5

Press

OK

.

6

Press

Start

on the control panel to begin copying.

Gray enhance copying

When you copy the original in gray scale, use this feature for the better quality of copy-output. This feature is only for the copy in gray scale.

1

Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. Or load the

originals face up in the DADF. (Page 4.1)

2

Press

Copy

from the

Main

screen.

3

Press the

Image

tab >

Scan Enhance

.

4

Press

On

to activate this feature

.

5

Press

OK

.

6

Press

Start

on the control panel to begin copying

Adjusting backside images

When the original is thin and the back-side imgaes are shown though, you can use this feature to remove the back-side image.

1

Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. Or load the

originals face up in the DADF. (Page 4.1)

2

Press

Copy

from the

Main

screen.

3

Press the

Image

tab >

Adjust Backside Image

.

4

Press

On

to activate this feature .

5

Choose the level from 1 to 5. The higher the number, the more the back-side images are removed.

6

Press

OK

.

7

Press

Start

on the control panel to begin copying.

1

Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. Or load the

originals face up in the DADF. (Page 4.1)

2

Press

Copy

from the

Main

screen.

3

Press the

Image

tab >

Margin Shift

5

.11

<Copying>

6

Faxing (Optional)

This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a fax machine.

This chapter includes:

Preparing to fax

Understanding the Fax screen

Sending a fax

Receiving a fax

Adjusting the document settings

Setting up a fax phonebook

Using the polling option

Using Mailbox

Printing a report after sending a fax

Sending a fax in toll save time

Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job

Forwarding a received fax to other destination

Setting up the end fax tone

Setting up receiving faxes in color

Sending a fax from a computer

Note

• You cannot use this machine as a fax via the Internet phone.

For more information, ask the Internet service provider.

• We recommend you to use traditional analog phone services

(PSTN: public switched telephone network) when connecting telephone lines to use Fax. If you use other Internet services

(DSL, ISDN, VolP), you can improve the connection quality by using the Micro-filter. The Micro-filter eliminates unnecessary noise signals and improves connection quality or Internet quality. Since the DSL Micro-filter is not provided with the machine, contact your Internet Service provider for use on DSL

Micro-filter.

1

2

3

Line port

Micro filter

DSL modem /

Telephone line

• To use advanced features of the fax, press

Machine Setup

on the control panel and

Admin Setting

>

Setup

>

Fax Setup

.

(Page 12.5)

Preparing to fax

Before you send or receive a fax, you need to connect the supplied line cord to the wall jack. Refer to the Quick Install Guide how to make a connection. The method of making a telephone connection is varies from one country to another.

Note

If you want to add fax feature to the machine, check the option

lists (Page 15.1) and contact the purchasing point to order.

When you purchase a fax kit, install the kit by following the steps described in the Fax Kit Setup Guide which is enclosed in the kit. After installing the fax kit, set the machine to use this feature.

(Page 16.3)

Sending a fax from a computer

You can send a fax from your computer without going to the machine. To send a fax from your computer, the

Samsung Network PC Fax

program must be installed. This program will be installed when you installed the printer driver. (See

Software section

.)

Sending a fax from your Computer

1

Open the document to be sent.

2

Select

Print

from the

File

menu.

3

The

Print

window will be displayed. It may look slightly different depending on your application.

4

Select

Samsung Network PC Fax

from the

Print

window.

5

Click

Print

or

OK

.

6

Enter the recipients’ numbers and select the option.

If you want to use a cover page, check

Use cover page.

6

.1

<Faxing (Optional)>

Check

Notify me on delivery

, when the fax delivered to the recipients successfully.

7

Click

Send

.

Note

For more information about

Samsung Network PC Fax

, click

Help

.

Checking a sent fax list

You can check a sent fax list on your computer.

From the

Start

menu, click

Programs

or

All Programs

>

Samsung

Printers

>

Network PC Fax

>

Fax Journal

. Then, the

Fax Journal

appears with the fax list you have sent.

Understanding the Fax screen

To use the fax feature, press

Fax

on the

Main

screen. If the screen displays an other menu, press ( ) to go to the

Main

screen.

• : Deletes the last digit entered.

• : Removes all digits of the selected entry.

Remove

: Removes the selected fax number entry.

Remove All

: Removes all the fax numbers in the input area.

Address Book

: Picks up the frequently used fax numbers directly from your machine or from

SyncThru™ Web Service

. (Page 6.9)

Duplex

: Selects whether the machine send faxes one side of the original, both sides of the original.

Resolution

: Adjusts the resolution options.

Saving to box

: Sets the machine to save the originals to the document box for later use.

Note

For details about how to use the

Document Box

, refer to the

Document Box

chapter. (Page 10.1.)

Advanced tab

Note

If the optional fax feature is not installed the fax icon will not appear on the

Main

screen.

Basic tab

Job Build

: Allows you to send several fax jobs in a single fax transmission.

(Page 6.5.).

Original Size

: Selects the size of the original document. Press

OK

to update current setting.

Delay Send

: Sets the machine to send a fax at a later time without

your intervention. (Page 6.5)

Priority Send

: Sends an urgent fax before reserved operations.

(Page 6.5)

Polling

: Used when the receiver requests the document to be faxed remotely at sender's absence or vice versa. In order to use the polling function, the originals must be previously stored in the

machine. (Page 6.9)

Mailbox

: Used to store a received fax or originals in the machine memory which are ready to be polled. You can use a mailbox on the same machine you are using, or the one on a remote machine.

Each mailbox has a corresponding mailbox number, name and

password. (Page 6.11)

Back

: Returns to the

Basic

tab.

Fax number input area

: Shows the recipient's fax number using the number keypad on the control panel. If you configured the phone book, press

Individual

or

Group

. (Page 6.8)

Add No

: Lets you add more destinations.

6

.2

<Faxing (Optional)>

Image tab

Original Type

: Enhances the fax quality based on the type of the

original document being scanned. (Page 6.8)

Darkness

: Adjusts the level of lightness or darkness of the fax.

(Page 6.8)

Erase Background

: Reduces dark backgrounds or paper patterns

as in newspaper originals. (Page 6.8)

Color Mode

: Selects whether the user sends the fax in mono or

color. (Page 6.8)

Back

: Returns to the

Basic

tab.

Sending a fax

This part explains how to send a fax, and the special methods of transmission.

Note

When you place the originals, you can use either the DADF or

the scanner glass. (Page 4.1) If the originals are placed on both

the DADF and the scanner glass, the machine will read the originals on the DADF first, which has higher priority in scanning.

Setting the fax header

In some countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number on any fax you send.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, enter password and press

OK

. (Page 3.5)

3

Press the

Setup

tab >

Fax Setup

>

Machine ID & Fax No

.

4

Touch the input area to enter the machine name and your fax number.

5

Press

OK

.

Sending a fax

1

Press

Fax

from the

Main

screen.

2

Place the originals face up in the DADF.

3

Adjust the document settings in the

Image

tab.

4

Select

Duplex

and

Resolution

options in the

Basic

tab.

Note

If the originals are printed on both sides of the paper, select

2 Sided

with left/right arrows in the

Duplex

feature.

6

.3

<Faxing (Optional)>

5

When the cursor is blinking in the input line, enter the fax number using the number keypad on the control panel. Or use

Address

Book

on the right side of the screen, if you have stored frequently used fax numbers.

6

To add a number, press

Add No

.

7

Press

Start

on the control panel. The machine starts to scan and send a fax to destinations.

Note

• When you want to cancel a fax job, press

Stop

before the machine start transmission. Or press the

Job Status

button, and select the job you want to delete, press

Delete

.

• If you used the scanner glass, the machine shows the message asking to place another page.

• While the machine is sending a fax, you can not send an email

at the same time. (Page 7.4)

Sending a fax manually (On Hook Dial)

1

Press

Fax

from the

Main

screen.

2

Place the originals face up into the DADF.

6

Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel.

If the number is which you have dialed recently, press the

Redial/

Pause

button on the control panel to show ten recent fax numbers and select a fax number.

7

Press

Start

when you hear a high-pitched fax signal from the remote fax machine.

Automatic resending

When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer, the machine automatically redials the number.

To change the time interval between redials and/or the number of redial attempts, refer to the next following steps.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Select

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, then enter password and press

OK

. (Page 3.5)

3

Press the

Setup

tab >

Fax Setup

.

4

Press

Redial

.

5

Select

Redial Term

and

Redial Times

.

3

Adjust the document settings in the

Image

tab.

4

Select

Duplex

and

Resolution

options in the

Basic

tab.

5

Press

On Hook Dial

on the control panel.

6

Press

OK

.

Redialing the last number

1

Press

Fax

from the

Main

screen.

2

Adjust the document settings in the

Image

tab.

3

Place the originals face up into the DADF.

4

Press the

Redial/Pause

button on the control panel to show ten recent fax numbers.

5

Select a fax number in the list and press

OK

.

The machine automatically begins to send.

6

.4

<Faxing (Optional)>

Delaying a fax transmission

You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be present.

1

Press

Fax

from the

Main

screen.

2

Place the originals face up in the DADF.

3

Adjust the document settings in the

Image

tab and the

Basic

tab.

4

Press the

Advanced

tab >

Delay Send

.

5

Press

On

.

6

Enter

Job Name

using the keyboard on the display, select

Start

Time

with left/right arrows.

4

Press the

Advanced

tab >

Priority Send

.

5

Press

On

.

6

Press

OK

.

7

Press

Start

to start the urgent fax job.

Sending multiple faxes in a single transmission

You can send multiple fax jobs in a single transmission.

Note

When the machine enters power saver mode, the jobs in the segment list will be deleted to prevent accessing by the unexpected users.

1

Press

Fax

from the

Main

screen.

2

Adjust the document settings in the

Image

tab and the

Basic

tab.

3

Press the

Advanced

tab >

Job Build

.

4

Press

On

to enable the job build function.

• If you do not enter

Job Name

, the machine assigns the job name as 'Fax Send Job xxx'. 'xxx' number are set in order.

Note

Start Time

is the specific time you want the fax to be sent. You can set

Start Time

on a 24 hour basis and 15 minutes later than the current time. For example, if it is 1:00, then you can set the time starting from 1:15. If the set time is incorrect, the warning message will appear and the machine resets it to the current time.

7

Press

OK

to start storing the scanned original data into memory.

Note

To cancel delaying a fax, press

Off

before sending is activated.

Sending a priority fax

This function is used when a high priority fax need to be sent ahead of reserved operations. The original is scanned into memory and immediately transmitted when the current operation is finished. In addition, priority transmission will interrupt a sending to multiple destinations between stations (example, when the transmission to station

A ends, before transmission to station B begins) or between redial attempts.

1

Press

Fax

from the

Main

screen.

2

Place the originals face up in the DADF.

3

Adjust the document settings in the

Image

tab and the

Basic

tab.

-

Off

: Disables

Job Build

feature.

-

On

: Enables

Job Build

feature.

-

Display Between Segments

: After executing a segment, the job is paused with this screen is displayed. Then user can select to keep sending fax or stop .

-

Delete

: Deletes a segment.

-

Delete All

: Deletes all segments.

-

Send All

: Prints all segments.

-

Add Segment

: Adds a new segment.

-

Cancel

: Remove all segments in the list, and cancel the job.

5

Press

Add Segment

.

6

Place the originals face up in the DADF.

7

Press

Start

to start scanning a segment for fax job.

8

Repeat step 5 to step 7.

Note

As long as space remains on your device's hard drive, you can add segments without any restriction.

9

After adding segments, press

Send All

6

.5

<Faxing (Optional)>

Receiving a fax

This section explains how to receive a fax, and the special receiving methods available.

Changing the receive modes

Your machine is preset to

Fax

mode at the factory. When you receive a fax, the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and automatically receives the fax. But if you want to change the

Fax

mode to another mode, refer to next steps.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Select

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, then enter password and press

OK

. (Page 3.5)

3

Press the

Setup

tab >

Fax Setup

>

Fax Initial Setup

>

Receive

Mode

.

4

Select the option.

Telephone

: Receives a fax by pressing

On Hook Dial

and then

Start

.

Fax

: Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the fax reception mode.

Answering Machine/Fax

: Is for when an answering machine attached to your machine. Your machine answers an incoming call, and the caller can leave a message on the answering machine. If the fax machine senses a fax tone on the line, the machine automatically switches to

Fax

mode to receive the fax.

5

Press

OK

.

Note

When the memory is full, the machine can no longer receive any incoming fax. Secure free memory to resume by removing data stored in the memory.

Receiving manually in Telephone mode

You can receive a fax call by pressing

On Hook Dial

and then pressing

Start

when you hear a fax tone from the remote machine. The machine begins receiving a fax.

Receiving automatically in Answering Machine/

Fax mode

To use this mode, you must attache an answering machine to the EXT

socket on the back of your machine. (Page 1.4)

If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the message as it would normally. If your machine detects a fax tone on the line, it automatically starts to receive the fax.

Note

• If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering machine is switched off, or no answering machine is connected to EXT socket, your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after a predefined number of rings.

• If your answering machine has a user-selectable ring counter, set the machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring.

• If you are in Telephone mode when the answering machine is connected to your machine, you must switch off the answering machine, or the outgoing message from the answering machine will interrupt your phone conversation.

• While the machine is receiving a fax, you can not do the copy job.

Receiving faxes manually using an extension telephone

This feature works best when you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine. You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone, without going to the fax machine.

When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones, press the keys

9

on the extension phone. The machine receives the fax.

Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the remote machine, try pressing

9

once again.

To change the

9

to, for example,

3

, follow the next steps.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Select

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, then enter password and press

OK

. (Page 3.5)

3

Press the

Setup

tab >

Fax Setup

>

Receive Start Code

.

4

Select

On

.

5

Press left/right arrows to display number 3.

6

Press

OK

.

Receiving in secure receiving mode

You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people. You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended. In secure receiving mode, all incoming faxes go into memory.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

6

.6

<Faxing (Optional)>

2

Select

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, then enter password and press

OK

. (Page 3.5)

3

Press the

Setup

tab >

Fax Setup

>

Secure Receive

.

4

Select

On

.

5

Enter

Passcode

with 4 digit number using the number keypad on the control panel.

Note

To deactivate the

Secure Receive

feature, press

Off

. In this case, the received fax will be printed out.

Printing received faxes on both sides of the paper

Set this duplex feature to save paper. When the machine prints the received fax data, it prints them on both sides of the paper.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Select

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, then enter password and press

OK

. (Page 3.5)

3

Press the

Setup

tab >

Fax Setup

>

Received Fax Printing

>

Duplex

.

4

Select appropriate option.

Off

: Prints only one side of the paper.

Long Edge

: Prints both sides of the paper, however the binding will be the long edge.

Short Edge

: Prints both sides of the paper, however the binding will be the short edge.

5

Press

OK

.

Receiving faxes in memory

Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you are making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying or printing, your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory.

Then, as soon as you finish copying or printing, the machine automatically prints the fax.

Adjusting the document settings

Before sending a fax, you can adjust the document settings, such as resolution, darkness, color, duplex and so forth. Refer to explanation of this section.

Note

The document setting herein is for only current job. If you want to change the default setting on document settings, refer to

Admin Setting

>

General

tab >

Default Settings

. (Page 12.2)

Duplex

This function is especially intended for two-sided originals. You can select whether the machine sends the fax on one side or both sides of the paper.

Load the originals onto the DADF to use this function.

Press

Fax

> the

Basic

tab >

Duplex

. Use left/right arrows to toggle the value.

1 Sided

: Is for the originals that are printed on one side only.

2 Sided

: Is for the originals that are printed on both sides.

Resolution

Changing the resolution setting affects the appearance of the received document.

Press

Fax

> the

Basic

tab >

Resolution

. Use left/right arrows to toggle the values.

Standard

: Usually recommended for originals with text. This option will reduce the transmission time.

Fine

: Recommended for the originals containing with small characters, thin lines, or text that was printed using a dot-matrix printer.

Super Fine

: Recommended for originals containing with extremely fine detail, this option is enabled only if the receiving machine also supports a

Super Fine

resolution.

Note

For memory transmission,

Super Fine

mode is not available.

The resolution setting is automatically changed to

Fine

.

6

.7

<Faxing (Optional)>

Original Type

You can set the original document type to enhance the quality of a document being scanned.

Press

Fax

> the

Image

tab >

Original Type

. Select the appropriate option on the screen and press

OK

.

Text

: For originals with text or line art.

Text/Photo

: For originals with both text and photographs together.

Photo

: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.

Darkness

You can select the degree of darkness of the original document.

Press

Fax

> the

Image

tab >

Darkness

. Press the right arrow to enhance the darkness degree and press

OK

.

Setting up a fax phonebook

Use this feature to store destination names, fax numbers and transmission settings in your machine. There are two options,

Individual

and

Group

.

Individual

: Stores up to 500 fax numbers. And the fax numbers which are stored in Individual work as

Speed No.

.

Group

: Makes groups when you frequently send the same document to several destinations. You can store up to 100 group dial numbers.

Entries stored here will be available for selection within the sending list on the

Basic

tab of

Fax

. Dialing

Group

can be also setup comprising of many Individual entries.

The fax numbers, which are stored in

Individual

, work as

Speed No.

.

Storing individual phone numbers (Speed No.)

1

Press

Fax

> the

Basic

tab >

Individual

.

Erase Background

You can lighten, reduce or delete the dark backgrounds from scanned colored paper or newspaper originals.

Press

Fax

> the

Image

tab >

Erase Background

. Press

On

to activate this function and press

OK

.

Note

Erase Background

is disabled if the

Original Type

is set to

Photo

.

Color Mode

Press

Fax

> the

Image

tab >

Color Mode

. Select option and

OK

.

Mono

: Transmits a fax in black and white.

Color

: Transmits a fax in color.

Edit

: Changes the

User Name

,

Speed No.

,

Phone No.

and

Email

.

New

: Creates the new

Speed No.

and phone no..

Delete

: Deletes the selected

Speed No.

.

Search

: Searches the fax number which currently stored in

Individual phonebook. When the keyboard pops up, enter

User

Name

.

Detail

: Shows

User Name

,

Phone No.

,

Email

and Included group

information if it is grouped. (Page 6.8)

Apply

: Inputs the selected fax number to the sending fax number list in the

Basic

tab.

Cancel

: Cancels the current job and goes to the previous screen.

2

Press

New

.

6

.8

<Faxing (Optional)>

3

Enter the name of the fax number in the

User Name

field with the pop up keyboard, and the fax number in the

Phone No.

area using the number keypad on the control panel.

User Name

: Enter the name.

Speed No.

: Is automatically filled with the first free number. If you want to assign to a different number, use left/right arrows.

Phone No.

: Enter a fax numbers, only the numbers, with the area code if necessary.

Email

: Enter an email address.

4

Press

OK

.

Storing Group fax numbers (Group No.)

1

Press

Fax

> the

Basic

tab >

Group

.

2

Press

New

.

3

Press the input area in

Group Name

, then the keyboard pops up, enter the name.

4

Select

Speed No.

with left/right arrows.

Group Name

: Enters the group name.

Speed No.

: Is automatically filled with the first free number. If you want to assign to a different number, use left/right arrows.

5

Press

OK

.

6

Select an entry from

Individual List

, and press

Add

. Repeat this step until you added entries you need.

7

Press

OK

to save the numbers.

Setting up a fax phonebook using SyncThru™

Web Service

You can store fax numbers conveniently from the networked computer using

SyncThru™ Web Service

.

Individual

1

Open the web browser in your computer.

2

Enter IP address of your machine, then

SyncThru™ Web Service

shows.

(Example. http://123.123.123.123)

3

Press

Address Book

>

Individual

.

4

Press

Add

.

5

Enter

Name

,

Speed No.

, and

Fax Number

.

6

Press

Apply

.

Note

Speed Dial

numbers can be imported from an *.csv file.

Group

1

Open the web browser in your computer.

2

Enter IP address of your machine, then

SyncThru™ Web Service

shows.

(Example. http://123.123.123.123)

3

Press

Address Book

>

Group

.

4

Press

Add Group

.

5

Enter

Group Name

and

Speed No.

.

6

Add individual ddresses to the fax group.

7

Press

Apply

.

Make sure the selected

Individual List

is copied to the left pane,

Group list.

Using the polling option

Polling is used when one fax machine requests another to send a document. This is useful when the person with the original document is not in the office. The person who wants to receive the document, calls the machine holding where the original is stored and requests that the document be sent. In other words, it "polls" the machine holding that has the original.

Note

To use this feature, both the sender and receiver must have the polling feature.

6

.9

<Faxing (Optional)>

The polling process is as follows:

1

Sender stores the originals in the machine. (Page 6.10)

2

Sender gives the

Passcode

to the receiver.

3

Receiver dials the fax number and enters the

Passcode

when

requested. (Page 6.11)

4

Receiver presses

Start

to receive the stored fax.

Storing the originals for polling

1

Press

Fax

from the

Main

screen.

2

Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document, face down.

3

Adjust the document settings in the

Image

tab and the

Basic

tab.

4

Press the

Advanced

tab >

Polling

>

Store

.

5

Press the input area then the pop up keyboard, enter

Passcode

(The four-digit number which you have to inform the receiver). If you do not want to set

Passcode

, enter number 0000 here. Then you can store, delete, print and receive a fax for polling without any passcode.

Note

If you want to use the

Mailbox

, refer to Storing the originals in the

Mailbox

. (Page 6.12)

6

Select the

Delete On Poll

option. If you select

Off

, the sent fax data will be remained in the machine’s memory even after it’s printing. If you select

On

, the fax data will be deleted at the printing point.

7

Press

OK

to start to store the originals into memory for polling.

8

Give the passcode to the receiver.

Printing (Deleting) the polling document

1

Press

Fax

from the

Main

screen.

2

Press the

Advanced

tab >

Polling

>

Print

(or

Delete

).

3

Enter

Passcode

4

Press

OK

.

6

.10

<Faxing (Optional)>

Polling a remote fax

This option allows you to retrieve (poll) a fax which is stored in the remote machine.

1

Press

Fax

from the

Main

screen.

2

Press the

Advanced

tab >

Polling

>

Poll from Remote

.

3

Enter

Remote Fax No

,

Mailbox No.

, and

Passcode

. All these field are filled with information from the sender.

Note

Your can use

Delay Poll From Remote

to poll the fax at a specific time within 24 hours.

3

Enter

Passcode

and destination fax number using the number keypad on the control panel. You have to be informed

Passcode

from sender with the remote fax machine.

4

Press

OK

.

Polling from a remote Mailbox

This option allows you to retrieve (poll) a fax which is stored in the

Mailbox

of on the remote machine. Before you start polling, you must be informed of

Mailbox No.

and

Passcode

from the sender. (Page 6.11)

1

Press

Fax

from the

Main

screen.

2

Press the

Advanced

tab >

Mailbox

>

Poll from Remote

.

Note

You can use

Delay Poll From Remote

to poll a fax from the remote machine's Mailbox at certain time within 24 hours.

4

Press

OK

.

Using Mailbox

You can store the original data in

Mailbox

, since you are absent and the receiver need to be retrieve a fax from you. This feature allows you to program up to 15 individual Mailbox. Before you store the originals, the

Mailbox must be created.

Creating Mailbox

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Select

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, then enter the password and press

OK

.

3

Press the

Setup

tab >

Fax Setup

.

4

Press the down arrow to scroll down, if necessary.

5

Press

Mailbox Setup

.

6

Press

Mailbox Configuration

. Then the screen displays

Mailbox

List

.

7

Select a

Mailbox

on the

Mailbox List

.

6

.11

<Faxing (Optional)>

8

Press

Edit Mailbox

.

5

Enter

Mailbox No.

and

Passcode

which are set from Creating

Mailbox in page 6.11.

9

Press

Mailbox ID

and enter ID with number keypad on the control panel. Up to 20 numbers you can enter.

10

Enter

Mailbox Name

with the pop up keyboard. It can be either alphabet or number up to 20 digits.

11

Enter

Mailbox Passcode

with the numeric keypad on the control panel.

Note

If you set

Mailbox Passcode

to number 0000, then the machine does not ask passcode for using

Mailbox

, such as storing, deleting, printing, receiving.

12

Set

Notification

option to

On

, if you want to be notified when a fax is received into Mailbox.

13

Press

OK

.

Storing originals in Mailbox

Since you created the mailbox, you can store originals in it.

1

Press

Fax

from the

Main

screen.

2

Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document faced down.

3

Adjust the document settings in the

Image

tab and the

Basic

tab.

4

Press the

Advanced

tab >

Mailbox

>

Store

.

6

Press

OK

.

Note

Deleting the data in a specific Mailbox

Press

Fax

> the

Advanced

tab >

Mailbox

>

Delete

, enter

Mailbox No.

and

Passcode

, and then press

OK

. When the confirmation window appears, press

Yes

to complete the job.

Printing a Mailbox

Press

Fax

> the

Advanced

tab >

Mailbox

>

Print

, enter

Mailbox No.

and

Passcode

, and press

OK

.

Faxing to a remote Mailbox

To fax and store the originals in a recipient's

Mailbox

in this machine, you can use the

Send to Remote

feature.

1

Press

Fax

from the

Main

screen.

2

Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down.

3

Adjust the document settings in the

Image

tab and the

Basic

tab.

4

Press the

Advanced

tab >

Mailbox

>

Send to Remote

.

5

Enter

Remote Fax No

,

Mailbox No.

, and

Passcode

. All these field are filled with information from the receiver.

6

Press

OK

.

6

.12

<Faxing (Optional)>

Printing a report after sending a fax

You can set the machine to print a report whether a fax transmission is successfully completed or not.

Note

The detailed information is available in advanced setup

part. (Page 12.15)

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, enter password and press

OK

. (Page 3.5)

3

Press the

Print/Report

tab >

Report

>

Fax Report

>

Fax Send

Report

.

4

Press

On

.

Sending a fax in toll save time

You can set the machine to send a fax in toll save time to save a telephone fee. If you send a fax after setting this feature, fax data will be stored in machine's memory and the machine will start to send fax in toll save time.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, enter password and press

OK

. (Page 3.5)

3

Press the

Setup

tab >

Fax Setup

.

4

Press down arrow on the right side.

5

Press

Toll Save

.

6

Press

On

.

5

Press

OK

.

7

Press

Start Time

and set the start date and time with left/right arrows.

8

Press

OK

.

9

Press

End Time

and set the end date and time with left/right arrows.

10

Press

OK

.

Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job

You can add additional documents to the delayed fax job which is saved in memory.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, enter password and press

OK

. (Page 3.5)

3

Press the

Setup

tab >

Fax Setup

.

4

Press down arrow on the right side.

5

Press

Send Batch

.

6

Press

On

.

7

Press

OK

.

When you send a fax, if a fax number is same as the number in delay fax, the machine asks whether you want to add more documents to reserved delay fax.

6

.13

<Faxing (Optional)>

Forwarding a received fax to other destination

You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other destination by a fax or an email. If you are out of office but have to receive the fax, this feature may be useful.

Note

• When you forward a fax by an email, you firstly set the mail server and IP address in

SyncThru™ Web Service

.

• If this

Fax Forward Settings

feature to

On

, you cannot use a fax with the

On Hook Dial

button on the control panel.

Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a fax

You can set the machine to forward every fax you sent to other destination by faxing.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, enter password and press

OK

. (Page 3.5)

3

Press the

Setup

tab >

Fax Setup

.

4

Press down arrow on the right side.

5

Press

Fax Forward Settings

>

Forward to Fax Setting

>

Send

Forward

.

6

Press

On

and enter a fax number using the keypad on the control panel.

7

Press

OK

.

Forwarding a received fax to other destination by a fax

With this feature, you can forward every fax you received to other destination by faxing. When the machine receives a fax, a fax is stored in the memory then, the machine sends it to the destination you have set.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, enter password and press

OK

. (Page 3.5)

3

Press the

Setup

tab >

Fax Setup

.

4

Press down arrow on the right side.

5

Press

Fax Forward Settings

>

Forward to Fax Setting

>

Receive

Forward

.

6

Press

Forward

and enter a fax number using the keypad on the control panel.

• If you want to set the start time and end time, select

Start Time

and

End Time

.

• If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax, set the

Forward & Print

.

7

Press

OK

.

6

.14

<Faxing (Optional)>

Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by an email

Note

If

Forward to Server Setting

is on, this option will be grayed out.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, enter password and press

OK

. (Page 3.5)

3

Press the

Setup

tab >

Fax Setup

.

4

Press down arrow on the right side.

5

Press

Fax Forward Settings

>

Forward to Email Setting

>

Send

Forward

.

6

Press

On

.

7

Enter the

From

and

Destination Email

option using the keyboard on the display.

8

Press

OK

.

Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an email

Note

If

Forward to Server Setting

is on, this option will be grayed out.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, enter password and press

OK

. (Page 3.5)

3

Press the

Setup

tab >

Fax Setup

.

4

Press down arrow on the right side.

5

Press

Fax Forward Settings

>

Forward to Email Setting

>

Receive Forward

.

6

Press

Forward

and enter the

From

and

Destination Email

option using the keyboard on the display.

If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax, set the

Forward & Print

.

7

Press

OK

.

Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by server

Note

If

Forward to Email Setting

is on, this option will be grayed out.

The server setting must be done in

SyncThru™ Web Service

prior to this option on.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, enter password and press

OK

. (Page 3.5)

3

Press the

Setup

tab >

Fax Setup

.

4

Press down arrow on the right side.

5

Press

Fax Forward Settings

>

Forward to Server Setting

>

Send

Forward

.

6

Press

On

.

7

Press

OK

.

Forwarding a received fax to other destination by server

Note

If

Forward to Email Setting

is on, this option will be grayed out.

The server setting must be done in

SyncThru™ Web Service

prior to this option on.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, enter password and press

OK

. (Page 3.5)

3

Press the

Setup

tab >

Fax Setup

.

4

Press down arrow on the right side.

5

Press

Fax Forward Settings

>

Forward to Server Setting

>

Receive Forward

.

6

Press

Forward

.

7

Press

OK

.

Setting up the end fax tone

The end fax tone that sounds to indicate that the fax has been received can be turned on or off.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, enter password and press

OK

. (Page 3.5)

3

Press the

Setup

tab >

Fax Setup

.

4

Press down arrow on the right side.

5

Press

Fax Ending Sound

.

6

Press

On

.

7

Press

OK

.

Setting up receiving faxes in color

This function allows you to recieve faxes in color.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, enter password and press

OK

. (Page 3.5)

3

Press the

Setup

tab >

Fax Setup

.

4

Press down arrow on the right side.

5

Press

Rx Color Printing

.

6

Press

On

.

7

Press

OK

.

6

.15

<Faxing (Optional)>

7

Scanning

Scanning with your machine lets you turn hard copy originals into digital files.

There are two ways to scan originals, one is using the USB cable to directly connect the machine with your computer, and the other is using the network scan feature which scans and sends to a specific destination via the network.

If you want to use the USB cable to scan originals, refer to the Scanning part of

Software section

. Your machine offers the following ways to scan an image using a local connection.

• Via one of the preset imaging applications. Scanning an image launches the selected application, enabling you to control the scanning process.

• Via the SmarThru program supplied with your machine.

• Via the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver.

If you want to use the network scan feature, press

Scan

on the display to open three options of

Scan to Email

,

NetScan

and

Scan to Server

.

This chapter gives you information about the scanning method and the different ways to send the scanned file to the destination.

This chapter includes:

Understanding the Scan screen

Scanning originals and sending through email (Scan to Email)

Using Samsung Scan Manager

Scanning originals and sending via SMB/ FTP (Scan to Server)

Changing the scan feature settings

Understanding the Scan screen

To use the scanning feature, press

Scan to Email

,

Scan to Server

or

Scan to PC

on the

Main

screen. If the screen displays an other menu, press ( ) to go to the

Main

screen.

Note

If the message asking

Auth. ID

and

Password

, it means the network administrator has set the authentication in

SyncThru™

Web Service

.(Page 13.9)

Press

Scan to Email

,

Scan to Server

or

Scan to PC

.

Scan to Email

: Scans and sends the scanned output to the

destination by email. (Page 7.4)

Scan to Server

: Scans and sends the scanned output to the destination with

SMB

and

FTP

. (Page 7.7)

Scan to PC

: Scans and sends the scanned output to the destination with the

Samsung Network Scan Manager

program.

(Page 7.6)

Basic screen

This section explains the Basic screen of

Scan to Email

,

Scan to Server

and

Scan to PC

.

Scan to Email

From

: Sender's email address.

To

/

Cc

/

Bcc

: Recipients' addresses.

Cc

is for copies to an additional recipient and

Bcc

is same as

Cc

but without their name being displayed in the email.

7

.1

<Scanning>

Address Book

: Inputs the recipient's address just by pressing stored addresses. If you press

Search

, you can search the recipient’s address. If you press

Detail

, you can see the detailed information of selected recipient. If you want to edit or delete a recipient, press

Edit

or

Delete

. Select recipient’s address and click

Apply

. Press to return to the previous screen. You can store frequently used email addresses from your computer using the

SyncThru™ Web Service

. (Page 7.4)

Subject

/

Message

: Subject and message of the email.

Previous

: Returns to the previous screen.

Saving to box

: Sets the machine to save the originals to the document box for later use.

Note

For details about how to use the

Document Box

, refer to the

Document Box

chapter. (Page 10.1.)

Scan to PC

If the authentication for network appears, you have to enter user name and password to enter the

Scan to PC

screen.

Note

For details about how to use the

Document Box

, refer to the

Document Box

chapter. (Page 10.1.)

Back

: Returns to the previous screen. If network authentication is enabled, the log off confirmation message pops-up and closes

NetScan

.

Scan to Server

PC Application Name

: Shows the available application programs from your computer.

Start

: Moves to the application program you have selected.

SMB

: Sends the scanned file to SMB. Press

SMB

for that option.

FTP

: Sends the scanned file to FTP. Press

FTP

for that option.

No.

: Index number which you entered in

SyncThru™ Web

Service

. (Page 7.7)

Server

: Alias name which you entered in

SyncThru™ Web

Service

. (Page 7.7)

Previous

: Returns to the previous screen.

Saving to box

: Sets the machine to save the originals to the document box for later use.

Note

For details about how to use the

Document Box

, refer to the

Document Box

chapter. (Page 10.1.)

Duplex

: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the paper (1-Sided), both sides of the paper (2-Sided), or both sides of paper but the back side is rotated 180 degrees (2-Sided, Rotate

Side 2).

Resolution

: Selects the scanning resolution value.

7

.2

<Scanning>

Advanced tab Output tab

Job Build

: Allows you to scan several originals, and then send them in a single email or send them to a server(s) at once.

Original Size

: Sets the originals to a specific fixed size. (See

page 7.9.)

Back

: Returns to the previous screen.

Image tab

Quality

: Adjusts the display quality of the scan output. (See

page 7.10.)

File Format

: Selects the file format of the scan output. (See

page 7.10.)

Scan Preset

: Automatically changes some scan options such as file format, resolution, and more. You can adjust options to fit each

specific purpose. (See page 7.10.)

Back

: Returns to the previous screen.

Original Type

: Selects whether the original is text or photo. (See

page 7.9.)

Color Mode

: Adjusts the color options of the scan output. If the original is color and you want to scan in color, press

Color Mode

.

(See page 7.9.)

Darkness

: Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output. Use

left/right arrow to adjust the values. (See page 7.9.)

Erase Background

: Erases backgrounds like paper patterns. (See

page 7.9.)

Scan to Edge

: Scans originals from edge-to-edge. (See page 7.10.)

Back

: Returns to the previous screen.

7

.3

<Scanning>

Scanning originals and sending through email

(Scan to Email)

You can scan the originals and email the scanned image to several destinations from the machine by email.

Sending a scanned image to several destinations as an email attachment

1

Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner glass for one sheet of paper.

2

Press

Scan to Email

.

Note

If the authentication message shows, enter User Name and

Password. This message shows only when the network administrator has set the authentication in

SyncThru™

Web Service

. (Page 13.9)

3

Set the scan features in the screen. (See page 7.3.)

4

Press the

Basic

screen to enter the email address.

9

If neccessary, press the

Options

tab and set options for scanning.

10

Press the

Start

button to scan and send the file.

Note

While the machine is sending an email, you cannot do the copy job either sending a fax.

Setting up an email account

To scan and send an image as an email attachment, you need to set up network parameters using

SyncThru™ Web Service

.

1

Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.

2

Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.

3

Click

Go

to access the

SyncThru™ Web Service

.

4

Log in to the

SyncThru™ Web Service

as an administrator. ( See

page 13.9.)

5

Click

Settings

>

Network Settings

>

Outgoing Mail

Server(SMTP)

.

6

Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.

7

Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.

The default port number is 25.

8

Check the box next to

SMTP Requires Authentication

to require authentication.

9

Enter the SMTP server login name and password.

10

Click

Apply

.

Note

If the authentication method of SMTP server is

POP3beforeSMTP, check the box next to

SMTP Requires

POP3 Before SMTP Authentication

a. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.

b. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535. The default port number is 25.

Note

If SMTP server requires SSL/TLS connection, enable Secure Email Connection with SSL/TLS

5

Press the

From

tab and enter the sender’s email address.

6

Press the

To

/

Cc

/

Bcc

tab and enter the Recipient's email address.

7

Press the

Subject

tab and enter the subject of the email.

8

Press the

Message

tab and enter the contents of the email.

7

.4

<Scanning>

Storing email addresses

There are two kinds of email addresses -

Local

on your machine's memory and

Global

on the LDAP server - which differ depending on where they are stored.

Local

is that email addresses are stored in the machine's memory, and

Global

is that email addresses are stored in the certain (LDAP) server.

Through the

SyncThru™ Web Service

, you can easily enter and store email addresses from your computer.

Individual

1

Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.

2

Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.

3

Click

Go

to access the

SyncThru™ Web Service

.

4

Click

Address Book

.

5

Click

Add

.

6

When the

Add E-Mail

screen appears, select the

Speed No.

from 1 to 500, enter

User Name

and

E-mail Address

.

7

Click

Apply

.

8

Check if the emails are correctly stored and listed on your machine by pressing

Local

> the

Individual

tab.

Group

1

Access to the

SyncThru™ Web Service

from your computer.

2

Make sure you have configured

Individual Address Book

.

3

Click

Address Book

>

E-mail Groups

.

4

Click

Add Group

.

5

Enter

Group Name

and

Speed No.

.

6

Add Individual addresses to the e-mail group.

7

Click

Apply

.

8

Check if the email addresses are correctly stored and listed on your machine by pressing

Group

.

Global

Email addresses which are stored in processed by the LDAP server.

Global

in your machine are

1

Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.

2

Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.

3

Click

Go

to access the

SyncThru™ Web Service

.

4

Log in to the web site as an administrator. (see page 13.9.)

5

Click

Security

>

Network Security

>

External Authentication

Server

>

LDAP Server

.

6

Enter

LDAP server

and

Port

.

7

Enter optional information.

8

Click

Apply

.

Note

The LDAP server administrator must store the email address data. The method of storing is varies depending on the server and the operating systems.

Entering email addresses by the address book

Once you have stored the frequently used addresses into the address book, you can simply enter email addresses.

1

Press

Address Book

from

To

,

Cc

,

Bcc

tab of

Scan to Email

.

2

Press

Search

to specify the search criteria.

The search window shows.

7

.5

<Scanning>

3

When the search is completed, the screen displays the search results.

4

Select the address you want

5

Press

Apply

. Keep selecting addresses as many as you want.

6

Press to return to

Scan to Email

.

Entering email addresses by the keyboard

When you press the input field in the

From

,

To

,

Cc

, or subject and message input field, the keyboard shows on the display screen.

The following explanation is the example that you are entering

"[email protected]".

1

Press

From

tab from the

Scan to Email

.

Using Samsung Scan Manager

If you have installed the printer driver, Samsung Scan Manager program has installed too. Start Samsung Scan Manager program to find out about this program information and the installed scan driver's condition.

Through this program, you can change scan settings and add or delete the folders where scanned documents are saved in your computer.

Note

Tne

Samsung Scan Manager

program can only be used in the

Window and Macintosh system.

Note

The scan data can be encrypted to protect the contents from unauthorized access. You can enable the secured scan feature from the

SyncThru™ Web Service

. Log in to the

SyncThru™

Web Service

as an administrator. (

see page 13.9.

) And click

Setting

>

Machine Settings

>

Scan

>

Scan Security

>

PC

Scan Security

.

1. From the

Start

menu, click

Control Panel

>

Samsung Scan

Manager

.

Note

You can open

Samsung Scan Manager

by right clicking the

Smart Panel

icon in the Windows task bar and seleting

Scan

Manager

.

2. Select the appropriate machine from the

Samsung Scan Manager

window.

3. Press

Properties

.

4.

The

Set Scan Button

tab allows you to change the saving destination and scan settings, add or delete application program, and format files.

You can change the scanning machine by using the

Change Port

tab. (Local or Network)

5. When setting is done, press

OK

.

Set Scan Button tab

2

Press the input field.

3

Press

a

,

b

,

c

,

d

,

e

,

f

,

g

.

4

Press

@

.

5

Press

a

,

b

,

c

.

6

Press

.

and press

c

,

o

,

m

.

7

Press

OK

after finishing all the contents.

7

.6

<Scanning>

Scan Destination

Available Destination List

: Shows the list of applications currently linked to scanned images in the PC’s registry. Select the program you want to use and click the right arrow and add to

Front Panel Destination List

.

Front Panel Destination List

: Shows the list of applications to open scanned image.

Add Application

: Allows you to add application you want to use to

Available Destination List

.

Remove Application

: Allows you to remove an item added by the user in the

Available Destination List

.

File Format

: Allows you to select the form of scanned data to be saved. You can choose among

BMP

,

JPEG

,

PDF

, and

TIFF

.

Scan Property

Computer ID

: Shows the ID of your computer.

Save Location

: Allows you to choose the location of the default saving folder.

Resolution

: Allows you to choose the scan resolution.

Scan Color

: Allows you to choose the scan color.

Scan Size

: Allows you to choose the scan size.

ADF Duplex

: Automatically scans both sides. If your model does not support this option, it will be grayed out.

Show Preview

: Checking this box allows you to preview applied scan options. You can modify the options before scanning.

Default

: Allows you to go back to default options.

Change Port tab

Scanning originals and sending via SMB/ FTP

(Scan to Server)

You can scan an image and send it to a server via the SMB or FTP.

Preparation for scanning to SMB/FTP

Select the folder and share it with the machine in order to receive the scanned file.

Note

The next steps are for SMB server setting using

SyncThru™

Web Service

, and the setting for FTP server is the same as

SMB. Apply the same steps for setting up the FTP server.

1

Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.

2

Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.

3

Click

Go

to access the

SyncThru™ Web Service

.

4

Click

Address Book

.

5

Click

Add

.

6

Enter a name and speed number.

7

Check

Add SMB

.

8

Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.

9

Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535. The default port number is 139.

10

If you want to allow the unauthorized person’s access to SMB server, check

Anonymous

. By default, this is unchecked.

11

Enter the login name and password.

12

Enter the domain name of the SMB server.

13

Enter the path of shared folder in the SMB server for storing the scanned images.

14

Configure

Scan folder creating policy

,

Filing Policy

and

File

Name

.

15

Click

Apply

.

Local Scanner

Select when your machine is connected via USB or LPT port.

Network Scanner

Select when your machine is connected via network port.

Auto detection on the network

: Automatically detects your machine.

IP address

: Enter in your machine’s IP address to detect your machine.

7

.7

<Scanning>

Scanning and sending to SMB/FTP server

1

Press

Scan to Server

.

Note

If the authentication message shows, enter User Name and Password. This message shows only when the network administrator has set the authentication in

SyncThru™

Web Service

. (Page 13.9)

2

Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner glass for one sheet of paper.

3

Adjust the document settings in the

Options

tab.

4

Select

Duplex

and

Resolution

in the

Options

tab.

5

Press

Scan to Server

to show the SMB server list you entered in the

SyncThru™ Web Service

. .

6

Select the destination SMB server.

Note

You can select up to five destinations using both of SMB or

FTP servers.

7

Press

Start

on the control panel.

The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to the specified server.

Changing the scan feature settings

This part explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job, such as resolution, duplex, original size, type, color mode, darkness, and more. The options you change will be maintained for a certain time, but after that period, the options will be reset to default values.

Duplex

This feature especially applies when the original documents to be scanned are two-sided. You can select whether the machine scans only one side of the paper or both sides of the paper.

Press

Scan to Server

> the

Basic

tab >

Duplex

.

Or, Press

Scan to Email

> the

Options

tab >

Duplex

. Use left/right arrows to toggle the values.

1 Sided

: For originals that are printed on one side only.

2 Sided

: For originals that are printed on both sides.

2 Sided, Rotate Side 2

: For originals that are printed on both sides. But the back is rotated 180 degrees.

Note

To use

2 Sided

and

2 Sided, Rotate Side 2

, you have to load the originals on the DADF. Because, if the machine can not detect the original on DADF, automatically changes the option to

1 Sided

.

Resolution

You can adjust document resolution.

Press

Scan to Server

> the

Basic

tab >

Resolution

.

Or, Press

Scan to Email

> the

Options

tab >

Resolution

.

Use left/right arrows to toggle the values. The higher value you select the clear result you get. But the scanning time may take longer.

Commonly, 100 dpi , 200 dpi and 300 dpi resolution are available only when

Color Mode

is set to

Color

or

Gray

. The following table shows detailed information feature, resolution and file format options.

Feature

Scan to Email

Scan to PC

Resolution (dpi)

100, 200, 300, 600(B/W)

100,200,300

(Gray,Color)

75, 150, 200, 300, 600,

File Format

PDF, Single-Page

TIFF, Multi-Page TIFF,

JPEG

PDF, Single-Page

TIFF, Multi-Page TIFF,

JPEG

7

.8

<Scanning>

Feature Resolution (dpi)

Scan to Server

100, 200, 300, 600(B/W)

100,200,300

(Gray,Color)

File Format

PDF, Single-Page

TIFF, Multi-Page TIFF,

JPEG

Original Size

You can specify the scanning area on the originals by selecting the predefined size, or putting in the margin value or

Auto

. If you set this option to

Auto

, the machine senses and determines the size of the original.

Press

Scan to Server

> the

Advanced

tab >

Original Size

.

Or, Press

Scan to Email

> the

Options

tab >

Original Size

. Use up/ down arrows to go to the next screen. Select the appropriate option and press

OK

.

Color Mode

Use this option to scan the original in

Mono

,

Gray

or

Color

mode.

Press

Scan to Server

> the

Image

tab >

Color Mode

.

Or, Press

Scan to Email

> the

Options

tab >

Color Mode

.

Or . Press

Scan to PC

> the

Image

tab >

Color Mode

.

Select the appropriate option and press

OK

.

Color

: Uses color to display an image. 24 bits per pixel, 8 bits for each RGB, is used for 1 pixel.

Gray

: Uses the black gradation to display an image. 8 bits per pixel.

Mono

: Displays an image in black and white. 1 bit per pixel.

Original Type

You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of a document being scanned.

Press

Scan to Server

> the

Image

tab >

Original Type

.

Or, Press

Scan to Email

> the

Options

tab >

Original Type

.

Select the appropriate option and press

OK

.

Darkness

You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output. If your original document is light or faded, press the right arrow to make the output darker.

Press

Scan to Server

> the

Image

tab >

Darkness

.

Or, Press

Scan to Email

> the

Options

tab >

Darkness

.

Press right arrow to enhance the darkness degree then, press

OK

.

Text

: For originals that have text or line art.

Text/Photo

: For originals that have both text and photographs together.

Photo

: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.

Erase Background

You can lighten, reduce or deletes the dark background from scanning colored paper or newspaper originals.

Press

Scan to Server

> the

Image

tab >

Erase Background

.

Or, Press

Scan to Email

> the

Options

tab >

Erase Background

.

Select

On

and press

OK

.

7

.9

<Scanning>

Scan to Edge

You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is. Usually, the machine scans a page except edges, which means the margin, especially when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray.

But if you scan and sent it right away via the network, as the file, the machine does not need to exclude the edges from the originals.

Press

Scan to Server

> the

Image

tab >

Scan to Edge

.

Or, Press

Scan to Email

> the

Options

tab >

Scan to Edge

.

Select

On

and press

OK

.

Quality

You can use this option to produce a high quality document. Higher quality you select a larger file size you get.

Press

Scan to Server

> the

Output

tab >

Quality

.

Or, Press

Scan to Email

> the

Options

tab >

Quality

.

Note

When you set

Color Mode

to

Gray

, the

Quality

option is grayed out.

Scan Preset

This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan job.

Press

Scan to Server

> the

Output

tab >

Scan Preset

.

Or, Press

Scan to Email

> the

Options

tab >

Scan Preset

.

File Format

You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job.

Press

Scan to Email

(Or

Scan to Server

) > the

Options

tab >

File

Format

. .

Sharing and Printing

: Produces a small-sized file for normal quality documents.

High Quality Printing

: Set this option for high quality output with the largest file size.

Archival Record

: For the electronic file which is of the smallest file size of the output.

OCR

: Produces scanned output for OCR software. You can expect the highest quality images.

Simple Scan

: Used for a simple document with text only. The file size of output is small.

Custom

: Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen.

7

.10

<Scanning>

PDF

: Scans originals in PDF format.

You can add a

Digital Signature

to the PDF with the certification. To add the

Digital Signature

, you have to create the certification from the

SyncThru™ Web Service

. Log in to the

SyncThru™ Web

Service

as an administrator. (See page 13.9.) And click

Setting

>

Machine Settings

>

Scan

>

Scan Security

>

Digital Signature in

PDF

.The

Digital Signature

can be used in the

Scan to Server

feature.

You also can create a

PDF Encryption

that is encrypted to protect the contents from unauthorized access. You can set the encryption level, password, and access permission such as reading, printing, or modifying, etc. The

PDF Encryption

can be used in the

Scan to

Server

feature. (See page 7.10.)

Single-Page TIFF

: Scans the originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File

Format), and several originals are scanned as an each individual

TIFF file.

Multi-Page TIFF

: Scans originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File

Format), but several originals are scanned as one file.

JPEG

: Scans original in JPEG format.

Note

The file format JPEG cannot be selected if

Mono

has been selected for

Color Mode

.

PDF Encryption

To encrypt your PDF files, you need to set up parameters for the encryption level, password, and access permission, etc.

Note

The

PDF Encryption

can be used in the

Scan to Server

feature.

1

Press

Scan to Server

> the

Options

tab >

File Format

>

PDF

.

2

Press

PDF Encryption

.

3

Press

On

.

4

Select an encryption level.

-

Low (RC4, 40 bits)

: Recommended for Acrobat 3.0 or later version.

-

High (RC4, 128 bits)

: Recommended for Acrobat 5.0 or later version.

-

High (AES, 128 bits)

: Recommended for Acrobat 7.0 or later version.

5

Enter the

Owner Password

to get a whole right about the PDF.

6

Enter the

User Password

to get an

Access Permission

set by the

Access Permission

menu below.

7

Set the

Access Permission

in printing or modifying. This configuration will affect the users accessed with the

User

Password

.

8

Check

Extract text and graphics

to give users permission to extract text or graphics.

9

Press

OK

.

7

.11

<Scanning>

8

Basic printing

This chapter explains common printing tasks.

Printing a document

Your machine allows you to print from various Windows, Macintosh, or

Linux applications. The exact steps for printing a document may vary depending on the application you use.

For details about printing, see

Software section

.

Canceling a print job

If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, such as the printer group in Windows, delete the job as follows:

1

Click the Windows

Start

menu.

2

For Windows 2000, select

Settings

and then

Printers

.

For Windows XP/2003, select

Printers and Faxes

.

For Windows 2008/Vista, select

Control Panel

>

Hardware and

Sound

>

Printers

.

For Windows 7, select

Control Panel

>

Hardware and Sound

>

Device and Printers

.

For Windows Server 2008 R2, select

Control Panel

>

Hardware

>

Device and Printers

.

3

For Windows 2000, XP, 2003 ,Vista and 2008, double-click your machine.

For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, right click your printer icon > context menus >

See what’s printing

.

Note

If

See what’s printing

item has

X

mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer.

4

From the

Document

menu, select

Cancel

.

Note

You can also access this window by simply double-clicking the printer icon at the bottom right corner of the Windows desktop.

You can also cancel the current job by pressing

Stop

on the control panel.

8

.1

<Basic printing>

9

Using USB flash memory

This chapter explains how to use an USB memory device with your machine.

This chapter includes:

About USB memory

Understanding the USB screen

Plugging in an USB memory device

Scanning to an USB memory device

Scan to USB

Changing the scan feature settings

Printing from a USB memory device

About USB memory

USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to give you more room for storing documents, presentations, downloaded music and videos, high resolution photographs, or whatever other files you want to store or move.

You can do the following on your machine using an USB memory device:

• Scan documents and save them on an USB memory device.

• Print data stored on an USB memory device.

• Format the USB memory device.

Understanding the USB screen

To use the USB memory device, press

USB

or

Scan to USB

on the

Main

screen. If the screen displays an other menu, press ( ) to go to the

Main

screen.

USB Print

: You can directly print files stored on an USB memory device. You can print TIFF, BMP, JPEG, PDF, and PRN files.

(Page 9.6)

Scan to USB

: You can specify image size, file format, or color

mode for each scanning to USB job. (Page 9.2)

Plugging in an USB memory device

The USB memory port on the side of your machine is designed for

USB V1.1 and USB V2.0 memory devices.

You must use an authorized USB memory device with an A plug type connector.

Use only a metal/shielded

USB memory device.

Note

There are two USB plug types.

Insert an USB memory device into the USB memory port on the side of your machine.

Note

When an USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on your machine, USB icon shows on the display screen.

USB Format

: You can delete image files stored on an USB memory device one by one or all at once by reformatting the device.

9

.1

<Using USB flash memory>

Cautions

• Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in operation, or writing to or reading from USB memory. This may damage your machine.

• If your USB memory device has certain features (example, security key, security partition, booting disk, password settings and so forth), do not use the USB memory device with your machine. The files stored in the USB memory device may be corrupted, or the machine may not automatically detect it. For details about these features, see device’s User’s Guide.

Scanning to an USB memory device

You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB memory device. When you scan a document, the machine uses the default settings such as the resolution. You can also customize your own

scan setting. (Page 9.3)

If your USB memory device has certain features (example, security key, security partition, booting disk, password settings and so forth), do not use the USB memory device with your machine. The files stored in the

USB memory device may be corrupted, or the machine may not automatically detect it. For details about these features, see device’s

User’s Guide.

Scanning

1

Insert an USB memory device into the USB memory port on the rear side of your machine.

2

Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original

face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)

3

Press

Scan to USB

from the

Main

screen.

Or, press

USB

>

Scan to USB

4

Select the appropriate option. (Page 9.3)

5

Press

OK

.

6

Press

Start

on the control panel to begin scanning.

7

After scanning is complete, you can remove the USB memory device from the machine.

Basic tab

Scan to USB

Name

: The folder names on the USB memory device.

Date

: Tha date which folders are made.

Select

: Selects the folder which has been chosen from the Name.

New Folder

: Makes a new folder on the USB memory device.

Detail

: Views the details of currently selected folder or file.

Rename

: Renames the folder or file name.

Delete

: Deletes the folder on the USB memory device.

Duplex

: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the paper (

1 Sided

), both sides of the paper (

2 Sided

), or both sides of paper but back is rotated 180 degrees (

2 Sided, Rotate Side 2

).

Resolution

: Selects the scanning resolution value.

File Name

: Names a file before you scan a document by just clicking this field.

Back

: Returns to the previous screen.

Advanced tab

Original Size

: Sets the originals to a specific fixed size. (Page 9.4)

Back

: Returns to the previous screen.

9

.2

<Using USB flash memory>

Image tab

Original Type

: Selects whether the original is text, text/photo or

photo. (Page 9.4)

Color Mode

: Selects the color options of the scan output. If the original is color and you want to scan in color, press

Color Mode

.

(Page 9.4)

Darkness

: Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output. Use

left/right arrow to adjust the values. (Page 9.4)

Erase Background

: Erases backgrounds like paper patterns.

(Page 9.5)

Scan to Edge

: Scans originals from edge-to-edge. (Page 9.5)

Back

: Returns to the previous screen.

Output tab

Changing the scan feature settings

This part explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job, such as resolution, duplex, original size, type, color mode, darkness, and more. The options you change will be maintained for a certain time, but after that period, the options will be reset to default values.

Duplex

This feature especially applies when the original documents to be scanned are two-sided. You can select whether the machine scans only one side of the paper or both sides of the paper.

Press

Scan to USB

> the

Basic

tab >

Duplex

.

Or, press

USB

>

Scan to USB

> the

Basic

tab >

Duplex

.

Use left/right arrows to toggle the values.

1 Sided

: For originals that are printed on one side only.

2 Sided

: For originals that are printed on both sides.

2 Sided, Rotate Side 2

: For originals that are printed on both sides. But the back is rotated 180 degrees.

Note

To use

2 Sided

and

2 Sided, Rotate Side 2

, you have to load the originals on the DADF. Because, if the machine can not detect the original on DADF, automatically changes the option to

1 Sided

.

Resolution

You can adjust document resolution.

Press

Scan to USB

> the

Basic

tab >

Resolution

.

Or, press

USB

>

Scan to USB

> the

Basic

tab >

Resolution

.

Use left/right arrows to toggle the values. The higher value you select the clear result you get. But the scanning time may take longer.

Quality

: Adjusts the scan quality of the scan output. (Page 9.5)

Scan Preset

: Automatically changes some scan options such as file format, resolution, and more. You can adjust options to fit each

specific purpose. (Page 9.5)

File Format

: Selects the file format of the scan output. (Page 9.5)

File Policy

: You can choose the policy for generating file name

before you proceed with the scan job through USB. (Page 9.6)

Back

: Returns to the previous screen.

9

.3

<Using USB flash memory>

Original Size

The machine senses and determines the size of the original.

Press

Scan to USB

> the

Advanced

tab >

Original Size

.

Or, press

USB

>

Scan to USB

> the

Advanced

tab >

Original Size

.

Use up/down arrows to go to the next screen. Select the appropriate option and press

OK

.

Color Mode

Use this option to scan the original in

Mono

,

Gray

or

Color

mode.

Press

Scan to USB

> the

Image

tab >

Color Mode

.

Or, press

USB

>

Scan to USB

> the

Image

tab >

Color Mode

.

Select the appropriate option and press

OK

.

Original Type

You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of a document being scanned.

Press

Scan to USB

> the

Image

tab >

Original Type

.

Or, press

USB

>

Scan to USB

> the

Image

tab >

Original Type

.

Select the appropriate option and press

OK

.

Color

: Uses color to display an image. 24 bits per pixel, 8 bits for each RGB, is used for 1 pixel.

Gray

: Uses the black gradation to display an image. 8 bits per pixel.

Mono

: Displays an image in black and white. 1 bit per pixel.

Text

: For originals that have text or line art.

Text/Photo

: For originals that have both text and photographs together.

Photo

: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.

Darkness

You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output. If your original document is light or faded, press the right arrow to make the output darker.

Press

Scan to USB

> the

Image

tab >

Darkness

.

Or, press

USB

>

Scan to USB

> the

Image

tab >

Darkness

.

Press right arrow to enhance the darkness degree then, press

OK

.

9

.4

<Using USB flash memory>

Erase Background

You can lighten, reduce or deletes the dark background from scanning colored paper or newspaper originals.

Press

Scan to USB

> the

Image

tab >

Erase Background

.

Or, press

USB

>

Scan to USB

> the

Image

tab >

Erase Background

.

Select the appropriate option and press

OK

.

Off

: Disables this feature.

Auto

: Optimizes the background.

Enhance

: The higher the number is, the more vivid the background is.

Erase

: The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.

Scan to Edge

You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is. Usually, the machine scans a page except edges, which means the margin, especially when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray.

But if you scan and sent it right away via the network, as the file, the machine does not need to exclude the edges from the originals.

Press

Scan to USB

> the

Image

tab >

Scan to Edge

.

Or, press

USB

>

Scan to USB

> the

Image

tab >

Scan to Edge

.

Select

On

and press

OK

.

Quality

You can use this option to produce a high quality document. Higher quality you select a larger file size you get.

Press

Scan to USB

> the

Output

tab >

Quality

.

Or, press

USB

>

Scan to USB

> the

Output

tab >

Quality

.

Scan Preset

This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan job.

Press

Scan to USB

> the

Output

tab >

Scan Preset

.

Or, press

USB

>

Scan to USB

> the

Output

tab >

Scan Preset

.

Sharing and Printing

: Produces a small-sized file for normal quality documents.

High Quality Printing

: Set this option for high quality output with the largest file size.

Archival Record

: For the electronic file which is of the smallest file size of the output.

OCR

: Produces scanned output for OCR software. You can expect the highest quality images.

Simple Scan

: Used for a simple document with text only. The file size of output is small.

Custom

: Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen.

File Format

You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job.

Press

Scan to USB

> the

Output

tab >

File Format

.

Or, press

USB

>

Scan to USB

> the

Output

tab >

File Format

.

Note

The

Quality

cannot be selected if

Mono

has been selected for

Color Mode

.

PDF

: Scans originals in PDF format.

Single-Page TIFF

: Scans the originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File

Format), and several originals are scanned as an each individual

TIFF file.

Multi-Page TIFF

: Scans originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File

Format), but several originals are scanned as one file.

JPEG

: Scans original in JPEG format.

BMP

: Scans original in BMP format.

Note

The file format JPEG cannot be selected if

Mono

has been selected for

Color Mode

.

9

.5

<Using USB flash memory>

File Policy

You can choose the policy for generating file name before you proceed with the scan job through USB. If the USB memory already has the same name when you entered a new file name, you can rename or overwrite it.

Press

Scan to USB

> the

Output

tab >

File Policy

.

Or, press

USB

>

Scan to USB

> the

Output

tab >

File Policy

.

Rename

: If the USB memory already has the same file name when you entered a new file name, the file will be saved as a different file name that is automatically programmed.

Overwrite

:If the USB memory already has the same file name when you entered a new file name, the previous file will be recorded over with the new file.

Printing from a USB memory device

You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device. You can print

TIFF, BMP, JPEG, PDF and PRN files.

Direct Print option supported file types:

• PRN: Only files created by provided driver with your machine are compatible.

• PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check box when you print a document. The document will be saved as a PRN file, rather than printed on paper. Only PRN files created in this fashion can be printed directly from USB memory. See

Software section

to learn how to create a PRN file.

• BMP: BMP Uncompressed

• TIFF: TIFF 6.0 Baseline

• JPEG: JPEG Baseline

• PDF: PDF 1.4 and below

If your USB memory device has certain features (example, security key, security partition, booting disk, password settings and so forth), do not use the USB memory device with your machine. The files stored in the

USB memory device may be corrupted, or the machine may not automatically detect it. For details about these features, see device’s

User’s Guide.

To print a document from a USB memory device:

1

Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory porton the rear side of your machine.

Your machine automatically detects the device and reads data stored on it.

2

Press

USB

from the

Main

screen.

3

Use up/down arrows until the file you want appears. Select the file name.

If there is a folder, select folder name and press

Select

.

4

Press

USB Print

.

5

Press

Start

on the control panel to begin printing

9

.6

<Using USB flash memory>

10

Using Document Box

This chapter explains how to use Document Box with your machine.

This chapter includes:

About Document Box

Understanding the Document Box screen

Storing documents to Document box

About Document Box

The Document Box feature makes it possible to store scanned data to the hard drive. Users can send the stored data to various destinations such as print, fax, e-mail, or an FTP/SMB server. The

Document Box

provides three types of boxes: public ( ) , secured ( ) , and common

( ) . The public box can be created by all users and all users can store data to public boxes. The secured box can be created with password by all users. This means that the only users who know the password can access to the box and store their data. A common box is provided by default. Users cannot create, edit, and delete the common box. When a user needs to store a job that is not assigned to a box (i.e., fax receiving or PC printing in store mode), the data will be stored in the common box by default.

You can also see the

System Box

tab from the

Document Box

screen.

The

System Box

is used for temporary data backup such as printing in delayed mode, printing proof page.

Understanding the Document Box screen

To use the

Document Box

feature, press

Document Box

on the

Main

screen. If the screen displays an other menu, press (

Main

screen.

) to go to the

Document Box Screen

s

-

User Box

tab: Create the box where you can save documents such as the file you have printed, sent by email, or scanned. When you create a box, you can set the password to secure your box. The box with a password is called

Secured Box

, and without it, it is called public box.

-

System Box

tab: The machine provided default boxes, which you cannot modify them.

-

Type

: Shows the box is secured or not.

-

Box Name

: Shows the box name.

-

Owner

: Shows the user name of a box.

-

Date

: Shows the date of a box created.

-

File

: Shows the number of total files in the box.

-

Add

: Lets you add more boxes.

-

Delete

: Deletes the selected box.

-

Edit

: Lets you modify a box name and an owner name.

-

Detail

: Shows box information.

-

Report

: Prints the information about the documents inside the selected box.

-

Search

: Searches a box with a box name or an owner name.

-

Enter

: Prints or sends the stored file in the box.

10

.1

<Using Document Box>

Box Adding Screen

You can create a new box to store your scanned data. To add a new

Document Box

, press

Add

on the

Document Box

screen.

Note

The following are some constraints about the document box.

• You can create maximum 100 document boxes.

• A document box can contain up to 200 stored-documents.

• The length of a box name is limited to 20 characters.

• Common ( ) box is already created by default.

Document List Screen

You can enter a document box by clicking

Enter

from the

Document Box

screen, you can use the stored documents again.

-

Box Name

: Enter a box name.

-

Owner

: Enter the user name of the box's owner.

-

Secured Box

: Check to make a secured-type box.

-

New Password

: Enter a new password to access the box.

-

Confirm Password

: Enter the password again.

Edit a Box Screen

You can modify a box name or an owner name. To modify a

Document

Box

, select a box from the

Document Box

list and press

Edit

.

-

Document Name

: Shows the document’s name.

-

Owner

: Shows the user name of a document.

-

Date

: Shows the date of a document stored.

-

Page

: Shows the number of total pages in the document.

-

Add From Scan

: Lets you add a new document from scanning.

-

Detail

: Shows a document’s information.

-

Search

: Searches a file with a document name or an owner name.

-

Edit

: Lets you to modify a document name and an owner name.

-

Delete

: Deletes the selected document.

-

Copy

: Copies a selected document to another document box.

-

Move

: Moves a selected document to another document box.

-

Combine

: Merge documents located in two or more boxes.

-

Send To

: Sends the selected document(s) to a destination such as e-mail, fax, server, or USB.

-

Print

: Prints the selected document(s) out.

-

Back

: Returns to the previous screen.

-

Box Name

: Enter a new box name.

-

Owner

: Enter a user name of a box.

10

.2

<Using Document Box>

Storing documents to Document box

This machine allows you to store the scanned data on the hard drive.

Storing documents from document box

You can scan orignals directly from

Document Box

menu.

1

Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document, face down.

2

Press

Document Box

from the

Main

screen.

3

Press a document box with which you need to store a document.

4

Press

Enter

.

Storing documents during copy, scan, fax function

During copying, scanning, or faxing, you can save the scanned originals to

Document Box

in your machine.

1

Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document, face down.

2

Press

Copy

> the

Basic

tab >

Saving to box

.

or press

Scan to Email

(

Scan to Server

) >

Saving to box

.

or press

Fax

> the

Basic

tab >

Saving to box

.

3

Enter the file name in the

File Name

field with the pop up keyboard.

Then press

OK

.

5

Press

Add From Scan

.

4

Select a destination box and press

OK

.

5

Press

Start

from the control panel to begin a job.

6

Set the scan settings.

7

Press

Start

to begin scanning.

10

.3

<Using Document Box>

11

Using Standard Workflow

This chapter explains how to use standard workflow with your machine.

This chapter includes:

About Standard Workflow

Understanding the Standard Workflow Screen

Various Operations with Workform

About Standard Workflow

Standard Workflow

is a feature for users to conveniently operate jobs with pre-arranged task sets called workform.

Standard Workflow

makes it possible to execute multiple jobs in a single session by defined the job workform. Once you create a workform, you can reuse the same workflow only with one-touch operation.

Input

• Scan

• Document Box

• Fax

Transmit

• Email

• FTP/SMB server

• Document Box

• Print

• Fax

Understanding the Standard Workflow Screen

To use the

Standard Workflow

feature, press

Standard Workflow

on the

Main

screen.

Note

To switch to the other display screen, press the left or right arrow on the display screen.

Workflow Screen

Favorite Tab

Favorite workform is a shortcut of public or private workform. You can select a frequently-used public or private workform, and then the workform appears on the favorite workform tab.

Note

Fax input workform is automatically executed when receiving fax. Therefore fax input workforms cannot be registered to a favorite workform.

-

Execute

: Start the job defined in the workform.

My Workform and Public Workform Tab

-

Type

: Shows the workform is locked by the creator or not.

-

Name

: Shows the workform name.

-

Input

: Shows the workform’s input module name.

11

.1

<Using Standard Workflow>

-

Transmit

: Shows the workform’s transmit module name. If two or more modules are added in transmit workform, this column displays

Multi

without any icon.

-

Properties

: Shows the workform’s perperties.

-

Create

: Creates a new private workform.

-

Delete

: Deletes the selected workform.

-

Edit

: Lets you to modify a workform.

-

Detail

: Shows detailed workform information.

-

Search

: Searches a workform with a workform name.

-

Task

: Imports a workform from USB, export a workform to USB, copy or move a workform to public workform. It also makes a shortcut in favorite workform tab by clicking

Set to Favorite WF

or removes the shortcut by clicking

Set to Normal WF

.

-

Execute

: Start the job defined in the workform.

Workform Creating Screen

You can create a new workform. To add a new workform, press

Create

on the

My Workform

or

Public Workform

tab.

Note

You can create maximum 100 workforms.

Input Tab

Transmit Tab

-

Transmit

: Shows the workform’s transmit module name.

-

Status

: shows the setting status. To create a workform, you have to set every mandatory items of every assigned transmit modules.

Note

After you do fill out all mandatory items, the

Save & Execute

and

Save

button are enabled.

-

Add Module

: Add transmit module(s).

Note

Before you add module, make sure that the parameters are correctly configured for each module.

• Fax: See page 6.1.

• Email, Server: See page 7.7.

-

Delete

: Deletes the selected module.

-

Settings

: Configures the setting values for the module.

-

Previous

: Goes to the next tab.

-

Next

: Goes to the next tab.

Properties Tab

-

Input

: Shows the workform’s input module name.

-

Status

: shows the setting status. To create a workform, you have to set every mandatory items of the assigned input module.

Note

After you do fill out all mandatory items, the

Save & Execute

and

Save

button are enabled.

-

Settings

: Configures the setting values for the module.

-

Next

: Goes to the next tab.

-

Workform Name

: Sets the workform name.

-

Delay Start

: Schedule the start date and time to start.

-

Expired

: Sets the expire date.

-

Secured

: Locks the workform with password protection.

-

Previous

: Goes to the next tab.

11

.2

<Using Standard Workflow>

Various Operations with Workform

User can operate various jobs with workforms. The following items show some example cases.

Scan to multi-destination

You can scan a document once and send it to multiple destinations such as email, SMB/FTP server, document box, and print.

Note

Before you add module, make sure that the parameters are correctly configured for each module.

• Fax: See page 6.1.

• Email, Server: See page 7.7.

Fax forwarding

You can forward the received fax to another destinations. To forward a fax, your machine checks caller’s ID that the fax service provides. When the caller is also Samsung’s fax machine, your machine checks the fax number that the user defined for the machine information.

Note

Make sure that you enabled

Default Fax

in

Machine Setup

>

Admin Setting

>

Setup

tab >

Standard Workflow

Management

. (See page 12.14.)

When you need to forward different destination for each caller, you can create several workforms for each caller’s ID.

Auto redirection

If the fax transmission failed, the machine re-sends the fax image to the user’s email address.

Note

Make sure that you enabled

Default Fax

in

Machine Setup

>

Admin Setting

>

Setup

tab >

Standard Workflow

Management

. ( See page 12.14.

)

Delayed start feature

You can schedule the job’s execution time by setting

Delay Start

in

Properties

tab when you creating a workform.

Notification feature

You can notify the job processing result to an email.

Note

Make sure that you enabled

Complete Notification

in

Machine

Setup

>

Admin Setting

>

Setup

tab >

Standard Workflow

Management

. ( See page 12.14.

)

Approval feature

Before executing the transmit module, you can get approval from an administrator.

Note

Make sure that you enabled

Approve

in

Machine Setup

>

Admin Setting

>

Setup

tab >

Standard Workflow

Management

. (

See page 12.14.

)

11

.3

<Using Standard Workflow>

12

Machine status and advanced setup

This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine, and the method of setting for the advanced machine setup. Please read this chapter carefully in order to use your machine's diverse features.

This chapter includes:

Machine Setup

Browsing the machine’s status

General settings

Copy Setup

Fax Setup

Network Setup

Security

Optional Service

Adjusting the color contrast

Document Box Management

Printing a report

Machine Setup

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Select the appropriate item for your occasion.

Machine Status screen

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel and press

Machine Status

.

Supplies Life

tab: Displays the remainders or the usage count of the machine supplies. Use up/down arrows to switch screens.

Machine Info.

tab: Displays the detailed information about the machine, and some options allows for validating your machine.

(Page 12.2)

Back

: Returns to the previous screen.

Admin Setting screen

Gives you access to detailed machine settings.

Note

When you press

Admin Setting

, a login message appears. If the administrator set the password, you have to enter the password every time you want to use

Admin Setting

.

(Page 3.5)

Machine Status

: Shows the current machine status.

Admin Setting

: Allows administrator to set up the machine. When you press

Admin Setting

, login message pops up. Enter password and press

OK

. (Factory setting is 1111.)

Tray Management

: Shows the currently installed tray and their status. You can also change the paper settings for each tray.

Usage Page Report

: You can print the report on the amount of printouts depending on the paper size and type.

General

tab: Sets the basic parameters of the machine such as

location, date, time, and more. (Page 12.2)

Setup

tab: Sets the values for fax, network, login, and an option to service for enabling the feature listed on the screen.

Print/Report

tab: Prints configuration or font list and displays a

report of machine features. (Page 12.15)

Back

: Returns to the previous screen.

12

.1

<Machine status and advanced set-

Browsing the machine’s status

You can browse the machine information and validate some features of the machine.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Machine Status

> the

Machine Info.

tab.

General settings

Before you get ready to using the machine, it is recommended to set up the machine parameters.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, then enter password and press

OK

. (Factory setting is 1111.)

3

Press the

General

tab.

Option

Machine Details

Print/Report

Tray Status

Usage Counters

Description

This option shows the customer support information on the email address and the phone number you stored from

Admin

Setting

. Also, you can check the machine's serial number, or the hardware and software information specification.

You can print various helpful and informative reports such as

System Report

,

Fax Report

and

Scan Report

. (Page 13.1)

The screen shows the trays installed on your machine, and their current configurations. Select the tray and Edit to change the settings for paper type and size.

You can view the amount of each category that your machine has printed so far. To

print this report, see page 12.15.

Option

Device Info

Date & Time

Default Settings

Measurements

Description

The sub-options available are

Service Center

Registration

and

Contact Info

. You may enter information on service center and purchasing point.

You can set the date and time. (Page 3.5)

Default Window

: Set the first window that will appear on the display screen after turning on the machine or waking up from the

Power

Save

. For example, if you select

Fax

as a default window, the first window will be the

Basic

tab of the

Fax

feature. In case you want to show

ID Copy

as a default window, you need to enable this feature in

Default

Option

previously.

Default Option

: Changes all the default values for copying, faxing, emailing, scanning

and paper at once. (Page page 3.7)

Home

: Allows user to arrange each function in the display screen.

Note:

Depending on the optional kit you installed or the category you selected, the selectable options on the display screen may differ.

This option lets you change the measurement unit to use (mm or inch), and set the numeric separation (comma or period).

12

.2

<Machine status and advanced set-

Option

Timers

Language

Power Saver

Tray

Management

Altitude

Adjustment

Description

The machine cancels a printing job if data does not be received in specific time.

System Timeout

: The machine returns to the default value after certain time the machine waits. You can set a time for maximum 10 minutes.

Held Job Timeout

: The machine holds a job for a specific time period. You can set a time period for at least an hour.

It allows you to change the language that appears on the touch screen.

You can reduce energy consumption by setting these features.

Power Saver

has two options, first

Low Power Save

turns off the scanner lamp under the glass.

Power Save

turns off the fans within the machine except a core fan for

the fuser unit. (Page 3.6)

This feature allows you to select the tray and paper you use for a printing job. Paper size, paper type, and paper color options are adjusted here.

Tray Confirmation Message

is to activate the window asking whether you set the paper size and type for the just opened tray.

Auto Tray Switch

: If tray1 and tray2 are filled with letter size paper, when tray1 is empty and this option is

On

, then the machine continues printing with paper in tray2.

Auto Continue

: When the paper is mismatched, meaning that tray1has filled with the letter size paper, but the printing job needs A4 size paper, the machine will wait for

30 seconds to paper in tray1 with proper sized paper. After 30 seconds, the machine automatically starts printing with Letter sized paper.

Paper Substitution

: When the paper is mismatched, this option sets the machine print A4 size paper in the Letter size paper or vice versa.

Wide A4

: It is useful when printing in DOS mode. This option prints 80 charactors in a line, which printing 78 charactors in a line is usual in DOS mode.

Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which atmospheric pressure is determined by the height of the machine above sea level. This feature lets you adjust the altitude in a height district. Higher altitude location need to set this feature to

High 3

, which affects print quality.

12

.3

<Machine status and advanced set-

Option

Output Options

Contention

Management

Sound

Supplies

Management

Machine Test

Manual Image

Overwrite

HDD Spoolling

Description

Output Options

is for, when the staples run out, you to let the machine stop processing and wait to refill the staples or continue the job. If you set

Within Job Offsetting

to

On

, the output paper is placed and sorted by job unit.

You can also select stapling position for landscape printing with

Landscape Stapling

Postion

.

This feature lets you to select the priority between copy jobs and print jobs.

Priority

: Set the priority by numbering the job. The machine starts from the least to the highest number in order.

First In, First Out

: The machine does an asked job in order.

You can adjust the loudness of the machine sound. Press

Fault

to adjust the machine's error sound. Select

Conflict

if you pressed the wrong option. Press

Selection

to sound whenever you press the selection from your touch screen.

The machine gives you the notification of the drum and toner to reorder, and resets the used fuser counter, bias transfer roller, feed roller and document feeder friction pad counter.

The machine prints the test image patterns using

Image Quality Test Patterns

.

You can set the machine to delete previous job information on HDD as you store new job information. To activate this feature, go to

Admin Setting

> the

Setup

tab >

Optional

Service

and set the

Manual Image Overwrite

option to

Enable

. After activating this feature you can overwrite a HDD by pressing

Start

in the display.

To spool documents in HDD for the network printing, select

On

.

Option

Stored Job File

Policy

Country

Home Window

Background

Multi-Bin

Description

You can choose the file policy for generating file name before you proceed with the job through

HDD. If the HDD memory already has the same name when you entered a new file name, you can rename or overwrite it.

Rename

: If the HDD already has the same file name when you entered a new file name, the file will be saved as a different file name that is automatically programmed.

Overwrite

: If the HDD already has the same file name when you entered a new file name, the previous file will be recorded over with the new file.

You can change the country, then some of the values for fax and paper size will be changed automatically for your country. After installing the fax kit, you must change the country.

To change the background image of the machine's LCD UI to suit user’s preference, press

Custom

, select a customized background image file on the list, and then press

Load

.

Users can register their own background image from

SyncThru™ Web Service

. Click

Settings

>

Machine Settings

>

System

>

Home

Window Customization

, and add your images on the list.

You can set the default mode for multi-output bin from the following options:

Mailbox

: Stacks the printouts in a bin that the user selects from the output options in the printer driver. You can modify each bin’s name from

Rename

. You also can merge two or more bins from

Link Setup

. By using

Default

Setup

, you can assign each job’s default bin such as bin 2 for copy job, bin 4 for fax job, etc.

Job Seperator

: Stacks the printouts in each seperated bin in sequence by job.

Collator

: Stacks the printouts in the same order as the originals.

Stacker

: Stacks the printouts in bins one-byone. When bin 1 is full, printouts will be stacked in bin 2.

You can only use this feature if you have installed optional 2-Bin Finisher or 4-Bin

Mailbox.

Stamp

Option

Autocomplete

Description

You can print optional information such as

ID

,

Machine Information

,

Date & Time

,

Comment

, and

Page Number

, on the output paper for tracking.

Items

: Select item(s) to print on each paper.

Position

: Decide the position to stamp either

Top

or

Bottom

of paper.

Appearance

: Decide the appearance of the text either

Opaque

or

Transparent

. When you select

Opaque

, the text background color is filled with opaque white.

You can activate (or deactivate) the autocompletion feature that provides a list of possibilities completing your text for you.

Activation

: Select

On

to activate the autocomplete feature. When you type more than two letters into the textbox to enter a new email address or a new accounting ID, autocomplete texts will be provided. You can press the drop-down button and select text from the extended list.

The text closest to your entryis displayed in gray completing your entry but is not entered into the textbox. To actually enter the text, you have to select text from the drop-down list.

Sort

: Sorts the autocomplete list order by

Most frequently used

,

Recently entered

, or

Alphabetical order

.

Clear DB

: Clears the autocomplete database.

12

.4

<Machine status and advanced set-

Copy Setup

For copy output, you can set up several options in advance.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, enter password and press

OK

.

3

Press the

Setup

tab >

Copy Setup

.

Fax Setup

This machine offers you with various options to you for setting up the fax system. You can change the default settings for your preferences and needs.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, enter password and press

OK

.

3

Press the

Setup

tab >

Fax Setup

.

Option

Page Number

Description

If you select this option

On

, each copy will include the page number on the bottom of each page.

Option

Machine ID &

Fax No

Receive Start

Code

Note

The fax options are different from country to country depending on the international communication regulatory. If the display screen does not show or gray out some of the fax options explained herein, it means that the grayed out function does not supported in your communication environment.

Error Correction

Mode

Description

Enter the machine ID name and fax number which will be printed at the top of each page.

This feature works best when you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine. You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone, without going to the

fax machine. (Page 6.6)

It helps with poor line quality and makes sure any faxes you send are properly transmitted to any other ECM-equipped fax machines.

Sending a fax using ECM may take more time.

12

.5

<Machine status and advanced set-

Option Description

Fax Initial Setup

Ring to Answer

Receive Header

You can set

Receive Mode

for

Telephone

,

Fax

or

Answering Machine/Fax

, and

Dial Mode

at either

Tone

or

Pulse

.

When you select

Answering Machine/Fax

, you can receive a fax while the line is being

used by the answering machine. (Page 6.6)

Contact your local telephone company for

Dial

Mode

setting information.

You can specify the number of times the machine rings before answering an incoming call.

Use this option to automatically print the page number, date and time of fax reception at the bottom of each page.

Secure Receive

Received Fax

Printing

Redial

You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people.

This feature restricts printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended. If you select this option to

On

, all incoming faxes go into memory.

A four-digit

Passcode

is used when you want to print out received faxes in memory.

(Page 6.6)

• When receiving a fax containing pages longer than the paper loaded in the tray, the machine can reduce the size of the original to fit the size of the paper loaded in the machine. If this feature is set to

Off

, the machine cannot reduce the original to fit onto one page. The original will be divided and printed in actual size on two or more pages. If you set this option to

On

and set the discard size to 10 mm and the received data is longer then the currently set paper in the tray, the machine minuses the specified segment set as the discard size.

• You can set the machine to print out the fax on

both sides of the paper, or stapled. (Page 6.7)

The machine can automatically redial a remote fax machine, if it was busy. You can set the number of redial attempts and an interval between attempts. Selecting 0 for

Redial

Times

means that the machine will not use this feature.

Speaker Volume

This controls the sound when a fax actually starts to transfer data. If this option is

On

, the machine sounds from a fax starts until a fax finishes. With

Comm.

the machine sounds only until the communication is succeeded. No sound with

Off

option.

Option

Prefix Dial

Junk Fax Setup

Ring Volume

Dial Tone

Volume

Mailbox Setup

Output Tray

Toll Save

Send Batch

Fax Forward

Settings

Fax Ending

Sound

Rx Color

Printing

Caller ID

Description

This feature allows you to set a prefix of up to five digits. This number will be dialed before any automatic number is dialed. User may set this to access a PABX(example

9

) or area code number (example 02).

The machine does not accept faxes sent from remote stations if their numbers are stored in the memory as junk fax numbers. You can enter a maximum of 10 junk fax numbers. Press

Junk Fax Setup

and

Edit

, then, enter the fax numer. If you have set

Caller ID

enabled, you can browse the last received fax numbers and select a fax number from the list.

This feature adjusts the ring volume. When you select

Off

, the machine does not ring.

When you press

On Hook Dial

to send a fax, you can hear a specific tone. To adjust the tone volume, you can use this feature.

Document Policy

: You can set the document stored in

Mailbox

to delete or retain documents after. Select

On

of each option to delete,

Off

to remain the data.

Mail Configuration

: You can create, edit, or delete

Mailbox

. Enter

Mailbox ID

,

Mailbox

Name

,

Mailbox Passcode

by pressing

options. (Page 6.11)

Note:

If you set the

Notification

option to

On

, you are notified when a fax is received in

Mailbox

. (Page 6.11)

This feature lets you select the paper tray to use for receiving a fax.

Set the machine to send a fax in the toll save

time for saving. (Page 6.13)

The machine asks you whether you want to add the documents to the reserved delay fax, if the fax number you have dialed is same as the

delay fax number. (Page 6.13)

You can forward a sent or received fax to other

destination by a fax or an email. (Page 6.14)

This setting selects whether the end fax tone is

on or off. (Page 6.15)

This function allows you to recieve faxes in color.

(Page 6.15)

If you have set this option, the machine remembers the last twenty fax numbers.

12

.6

<Machine status and advanced set-

Network Setup

You may set up the network with the machine's touch screen. Before doing that, you must have the information concerning the type of network protocols and computer system you use. If you are not sure which setting to use, contact your network administrator to configure this machine network.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, enter password and press

OK

.

3

Press the

Setup

tab >

Network Setup

.

Option

TCP/IP Protocol

Ethernet Speed

Clear Setting

802.1x

Description

Select appropriate protocol and configure parameters to use the network environment.

Note:

There are lots of parameters to be set, therefore, if you are not sure, leave as it is, or consult the network administrator.

You can select the communication speed for

Ethernet connections.

Reverts the network settings to the default values.

You can select the user authentication for network communication.

For details information consult the network administrator.

IPv6

Option Description

Machine supports IPv6 addresses for network printing and managements.

IPv6 Activate

: When you select

On

, the

Host

Name

and

Link-Local Address

will automatically be entered into the address field.

DHCPv6 Configuration

: If you have a

DHCPv6 server on your network, you can set one of the option for default dynamic host configuration.

Routers

: Use DHCPv6 only when requested by a router.

DHCPv6 Addresses

: Always use

DHCPv6 regardless of router request.

DHCPv6 Off

: Never use DHCPv6 regardless of router request.

Security

This feature lets you control and lock all outgoing data, or change the password.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, then enter password and press

OK

.

3

Press the

Setup

tab >

Security

.

12

.7

<Machine status and advanced set-

Access Control

Note

• Using

SyncThru™ Web Service

, administrators can classify users into several groups according to each user’s role. Each user’s authorization, authentication and accounting will be controlled by the group’s role definition.

For example, if a group A only has authorization to use the copy function, users in group A can only copy with the machine: they cannot fax or scan. You can set this feature from

SyncThru™ Web Service

. Click

Security

>

User

Access Control

>

Authority

.

• When the Single Sign-On (SSO) feature is enabled, users just need to log in to the service only one time. Then the system automatically checks the user’s authority based on the user ID and password. The SSO feature is related to all of the security functions such as authentication, authorization and accounting. The SSO feature can be configured from

SyncThru™ Web Service

. Log in to the

SyncThru™ Web Service

as an administrator. (See

page 13.9.) And click

Security

>

User Access Control

>

Authentication

>

Options

.

Option Option

Authentication

Method

No

Authentication

Local

Authentication

Network

Authentication

Description

It disables

Authentication

Method

.

It enables the local authentication mode. The user ID and password is stored in an internal storage of the device. The administrator can see the user information from the

SyncThru™ Web Service

>

Security

>

User Access Control

>

User Profile

menu.

It enables the network authentication mode. When the users already belong to a serverbased networks, the

Network

Authentication

system can be simply configured with the existing server. Then the user can access with the ID and password stored in the remote authentication server.

To use any features in

Network

Authentication

mode, the users have to get a certificate from

SMB, FTP, LDAP, or Keberos server defined in

SyncThru™

Web Service

.

Option Option

Authentication

Mode

(continue)

Foreign Device

Interface

Description

When you install the optional FDI kit, select

On

to activate it.

Job Timer

: If there is not enough credit, you can set the machine to cancel a job right away or wait a designated amount of time for a deposit.

Print Job Control

: When it is enabled, the both computer printing and copying are possible since the credit remains. With

Disable

, copy printing needs the credit. However, when printing a report or a fax, the credit is not needed.

Inhibit Services

: When no credit is left, the machine disables the copy job only with

Copy Only

. With

All

Service

, scanning service and copy job are disabled.

Internal Credits

: It is used when you cancel the job or when the job is cancelled by the device due to insufficient credits (coin) or is canceled by user’s request. If you select

Enable

, the machine deposits a credit equal to the number of sheets that did not print out correctly, then it prints next job for free (for the amount deposited).

With

Disable

, even if you cancel the printing job, the machine includes jammed paper in the count and the cost of printing shall be recovered for the pages already billed.

Image Counter

: Depends on whether the machine counts blank white pages.

12

.8

<Machine status and advanced set-

Option

Accounting

Method

(continue)

Option Description

No Accounting

It disables accounting features.

Network

Accounting

You can set the network account for users by using

SyncThru™

Web Admin Service

’s job accounting plug-in. When the users performs their copy, fax, print, or scan service job with the machine, the account module records it. You can see the report from the

SyncThru™ Web

Admin Service

.

Standard

Accounting

You can set the local account for maximum 500 users. When the users perform their copy, fax, print, or scan service job with the machine, the account module records it. You can see the report from

Standard Acct. Usage

Report

in

Machine Setup

>

Admin Setting

>

Print/Report

tab >

Accounting Reports

.

As the device itself can manage user’s ID and usage without any remote server, this feature is highly suitable for small and medium businesses.

The accounting system regards storing a file to a single server as a single count.

Accounting ID List

: It shows the accounting ID list. You can add, edit, or delete the ID.

Login Setting

: You can configure for user to login either with ID and password (

ID & password Login

) or with ID only (

ID only Login

).

Accounting ID List

: It shows the accounting ID list. You can add, edit, or delete the ID.

Login Setting

: You can configure for user to login either with ID and password (

ID & password Login

) or with ID only (

ID only Login

).

User Authentication Method

If you are an administrator, you can enable authentication service before using the machine to improve security for the device. If user authentication service has been activated, only authorized users can use the device. With authentication service, you also can give permission to each user and set the maximum number of job executions for a user.

The authentication service and accounting service can be enabled independently. The services refer to the user information differently case by case.

• Using

Local Authentication

only,

Using

Local Authentication

and

Standard Accounting

,

Using

Local Authentication

and

Network Accounting

: Refers to

User Profile

from

Security

>

User Access Control

menu.

• Using

Network Authentication

only,

Using

Network Authentication

and

Standard Accounting

,

Using

Network Authentication

and

Network Accounting

: Refers to the user information in the network authentication server. Disables the user in

User Profile

to access the device

Standard Accounting

only: Refers to the

Standard Account List

from

SyncThru™ Web Service

>

Security

>

User Access Control

>

Accounting

. (See page 13.9.)

Network Accounting

only: Refers to the user information in network authentication server.

Registering local authorized users

1

Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click

Go

to access the

SyncThru™ Web Service

for your machine.

2

Log in to the

SyncThru™ Web Service

as an administrator. (See

page 13.9.)

3

Select

Security

>

User Access Control

>

Authentication

>

Authentication Method

.

4

Select

Local Authentication

.

5

Click on the

Apply

button.

6

Click on

Authority

, and check a

Role Name

according to the current user’s role.

- You can create a new role group by clicking on the

Add

button.

7

Click on

User Profile

and check the users.

- You can add users by clicking the

Add

button.

- If you want add information to the

Address Book

, check the

Automatically add your information to Address Book

.

- Select the user’s accounting ID if the accounting service is activated.

- Select the user’s role from

Role

item.

8

Click on

Apply

.

Register authorized network users

1

Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click on

Go

to access the

SyncThru™ Web Service

of your machine.

2

Log in to the

SyncThru™ Web Service

as an administrator. (See

page 13.9.)

3

Select

Security

>

User Access Control

>

Authentication

>

Authentication Method

.

4

Select

Kerberos

,

SMB

, or

LDAP

.

12

.9

<Machine status and advanced set-

Note

Before configuring network authentication, you need to configure

External Authentication Server

from

Security

>

Network Security

5

Click on the

Apply

button.

6

Click on

Authority

, and check the

Role Name

according to the current user’s role.

- Users can create a new role group by clicking on the

Add

button.

7

Click on

User Profile

and check the users.

- You can create a new role group by clicking on the

Add

button.

- If you want add the information to

Address Book

, check the

Automatically add your information to Address Book

option.

- Select the user’s accounting ID if the accounting service is activated.

- Select the user’s role from

Role

.

8

Click

Apply

.

Enabling network authentication by Kerberos

1

Log in to the

SyncThru™ Web Service

as an administrator. (See

page 13.9.)

2

Select

Security

>

Network Security

>

External Authentication

Server

>

Kerberos Server

.

- Click on the

Add

button if you want to add more servers.

3

Enter the realm used for

Kerberos

login.

4

Select the

IP Address

or

Host Name

.

5

Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.

6

Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.

7

The default port number is 88.

8

You can add a backup domain as a previous step.

9

Click on

Apply

.

Enabling network authentication by SMB

1

Log in to the

SyncThru™ Web Service

as an administrator. (See

page 13.9.)

2

Select

Security

>

External Authentication Server

>

SMB Server

.

- Click on the

Add

button if you want to add more servers.

3

Enter the domain that is used for

SMB

login.

4

Select

IP Address

or

Host Name

.

5

Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.

6

Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.

7

The default port number is 139.

8

Users can add a backup domain as in the previous step.

9

Click on

Apply

.

Note

Users can add up to 6 alternate domains.

Enabling network authentication by LDAP

1

Log in to the

SyncThru™ Web Service

as an administrator. (See

page 13.9.)

2

Select

Security

>

Network Security

>

External Authentication

Server

>

LDAP Server

.

- Click on the

Add

button if you want to add more servers.

3

Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click

Go

to access the

SyncThru™ Web Service

of your machine.

4

Log in to the

SyncThru™ Web Service

as an administrator. (See

page 13.9.)

5

Click

Security

>

Network Security

>

External Authentication

Server

>

LDAP Server

.

6

Select

IP Address

or

Host Name

.

7

Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.

8

Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.

The default port number is 389.

9

Enter

Search Root Directory

, the top search level of the LDAP directory tree.

10

Select

Authentication method

. There are two options for LDAP server login:

Anonymous

: This is used to bind with null password and login ID

(Password and login ID are grayed out in SWS).

Simple

: This is used to bind with the login ID and password in SWS.

11

Check the box next to

Append Root to Base DN

.

12

Select

Match User°Øs Login ID to the following LDAP attribute

(options are CN, UID, or UserPrincipalName).

13

Enter your login name, password, maximum number of search results, and search timeout.

Note

LDAP Referral

: LDAP client will search the referral server if the

LDAP server has no data to reply to the query and if the LDAP server has a referral server.

14

Select

Search Name Order

.

15

Check the box next to

"From:" Field Security Options

.

12

.10

<Machine status and advanced

Note

This option is only provided if you have selected the Network authentication option in the user authentication setting. You may check this option if you want to search for information in a default email address group.

16

Click on

Apply

.

User Accounting Method

Enabling Acccounting Method

1

Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click

Go

to access the

SyncThru™ Web Service

of your machine.

2

Log in to the

SyncThru™ Web Service

as an administrator. (See

page 13.9.)

3

Select

Security

>

User Access Control

>

Accounting

>

Accounting Method

.

4

Select

Standard Accounting

.

Note

If you want to allow users to login only with ID, then check

Authenticate with Login ID only

.

5

Click on the

Apply

button.

Standard acccounting List

1

Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click

Go

to access the

SyncThru™ Web Service

of your machine.

2

Log in to the

SyncThru™ Web Service

as an administrator. (See

page 13.9.)

3

Select

Security

>

User Access Control

>

Accounting

>

Standard

Accounting List

.

4

Select

Standard Accounting

.

Note

You can add users to the accounting list by clicking on the

Add

button. Enter a user’s ID, password and assign job limitation to the user.

5

Click on the

Apply

button.

Log

Option Description

Job Log

You can enable (or disable) job log to record job processing results. You can print the records in

Machine Setup

>

Admin Setting

>

Print/Report

tab >

Job Log Report

.

Operation Log

You can enable (or disable) operation log to record various operations such as formatting the system, creating document box, deleting file, etc. You can print the records in

Machine Setup

>

Admin

Setting

>

Print/Report

tab >

Operation Log

Report

.

Security Event

Log

You can enable or disable security event log to record history such as user authentication, software upgrading, access log, exporting or importing data, etc. You can print the records in

Machine Setup

>

Admin Setting

>

Print/Report

tab >

Security

Event Log Report

.

Change Admin. Password

You can change the password for the

Admin Setting

authentication.

Information Hiding

Option

Hiding

Level

Setting

Hiding

Method

Setting

Option Description

Show All

Information

Show Non-

Secure

Information

Only

All information in

Job Status

is displayed to all users.

Non-secured information in

Job

Status

is displayed to all users. The secured information, such as secured received fax list or secured print list, will be displayed only to the owner.

Show Own

Information

Only

Char Counts

Of Information

All information in

Job Status

displayed to the owner.

is

Instead of the job name and owner's name in

Job Status

, you can see a sequence of asterisks (*) characters.

Fixed Counts

Except First

Char

The job name and owner’s name in

Job Status

display as many as entered number of asterisks (*) except the first character.

Fixed Counts

The job name and owner’s name in

Job Status

display as many as entered number of asterisks (*).

12

.11

<Machine status and advanced

Optional Service

When you want to add the optional features for this machine, you have to install the optional kit and then set the machine to enable and activate those features. Follow the next steps to enable those features.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, then enter password and press

OK

.

3

Press the

Setup

tab >

Optional Service

.

Adjusting the color contrast

This menu allows you to adjust the color setting.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, then enter password and press

OK

.

3

Press the

Setup

tab >

Color

.

Copy

Option

Analog Fax

Scan to Email

Scan to PC

Scan to SMB

Scan to FTP

Manual Image

Overwrite

Automatic Image

Overwrite

Description

Enables or disables the

Copy

menu from the main screen.

After installing the fax kit, select this option

Enable

to use this machine as a fax machine.

Enables or disables the

Scan to Email

menu from the scan screen.

Set

Enable

to activate the scanning and sending it via network.

Enables or disables the

Scan to SMB

option from the scan screen.

Enables or disables the

Scan to FTP

option from the scan screen.

You can set the machine to delete previous job information on HDD as you store new job information. Set this option to

Enable

, go to the

General

tab >

Manual Image Overwrite

, press

Start

in the display to start the overwriting job.

If you select

Enable

, the machine renews the

HDD memory when you save new job on it.

Option Description

Toner Density

Calibration

This item allows you to calibrate toner density for the best possible color print quality.

Custom Color

This item allows you to adjust contrast, color by color.

CMYK: Allows you to adjust the contrast of the toner in each toner cartridge.

Default

: Optimizes colors automatically.

Manual Adjust

: Allows you to manually adjust the color contrast for each cartridge.

Note:

You should use the Default setting for best color quality.

12

.12

<Machine status and advanced

Option

Auto Color

Registration

Description

The machine virtually prints certain patterned image to calibrate the color printing position. This feature enhances the colored image sharper and clearer, which means the machine prints the colored image on the paper more like the one in the monitor. Select

On

to activate this feature. You can set the frequency of performing the function by pages, temperature of a machine or LSU.

Page Condition

: The machine performs this feature after certain number of page has been printed out.

Inner Temperature Condition

: The machine performs this feature if the machine temperature is different from the last this feature done. If you set this option to 3, the machine detects the inner temperature, and when the temperature difference is over or below three degree, the machine will perform this feature. You can set the temperature difference by clicking arrows.

LSU Temperature Condition

: The machine performs this feature if the temperature of

LSU(Laser Scanning Unit) is different from the last this feature done. If you set this option to 3, the machine detects the temperature of LSU, and when the temperature difference is over or below three degree, the machine will perform this feature. You can set the temperature difference by clicking arrows.

Execute Now

: The printer executes the auto color registration now.

Option

Auto Color

Tone

Adjustment

Manual Color

Tone

Adjustment

Description

This item allows you to automatically adjust color tone for the best possible color print quality.

Color Tone Adjustment Activation

: Activates color tone adjustment. Press

On

to activate this feature. If this option is

On

, the machine will regularly and automatically adjust color tone.

Setting Color Standard

: Sets the standard for adjusting color tone. You need to set this option at least once when you purchase the machine. This option will reduce the color difference between

machines by setting a color standard. (Page 3.2)

Color Tone Adjustment

: Adjusts the color tone.

This option uses the color standard you set in

Setting Color Standard

and applies to the machine.

Note:

You need to set

Setting Color Standard

option before using

Color Tone Adjustment

option.

Calibrating ID Sensor

: Automatically calculates the reduced or worn out supplies like toner or machine parts and uses this information to adjust the color tone. For example, if the yellow toner is running out, the machine calculates the amount of remaining yellow toner and adjusts color tone so the printouts are fine.

This item allows you to quickly adjust color tone. You can easily adjust the color tone and see the result right away but it’s not a permenant adjustment. Use this item to get a quick result.

Note

If

Color Tone Adjustment Activation

is set to

Off

, you need to use

Manual Color Tone Adjustment

everytime you need to adjust the color tone.

12

.13

<Machine status and advanced

Document Box Management

You can set a person performing deletion of the public boxes in

Public

.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, then enter password and press

OK

.

3

Press the

Setup

tab >

Document Box Management

.

Standard Workflow Management

You can set whether to use or not to use each features that standard workflow provides.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, then enter password and press

OK

.

3

Press the

Setup

tab >

Standard Workflow Management

.

Option

Public Box

Deletion

Description

If you set this option to

Administrators only

, only the administrator can delete the publicly stored boxes in

Public

, because the machine will asks the password of administrator.

Option

Auto

Redirection

Approve

Complete

Report

Complete

Notification

Default Fax

Description

To create and execute a workform including the auto redirection feature, enable this option.

To create and execute a workform including the approval feature, enable this option.

To add a completion report in your workform, enable this option.

To add a completion notification in your workform, enable this option.

To create and execute a workform including the fax feature, enable this option.

12

.14

<Machine status and advanced

Printing a report

You can print a report on the machine's configuration or font list, etcetera.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, then enter password and press

OK

.

3

Press the

Print/Report

tab.

Print

Option

Accounting

Reports

Supplies

Information

Description

You can print

Network

Configuration

,

PS3 Font List

,

PCL

Font List

and

Schedule Jobs

Report

.

Schedule Jobs Report

shows the job list in pending, in waiting, in delayed faxing or the

Mailbox list as well.

You can print the amount of each category that your machine has printed so far.

It displays user login IDs and emails.

Network Auth.

Log Report

Usage Page

Report

Accounting

Reports

Standard Acct.

Usage Report

Standard Acct.

Remain

Report

You can print the report on the amount of printouts depending on the paper size and type.

Prints the report of printing out count for each login user. This is used only when network authentication in enabled with

SyncThru™ Web

Service

. (Page 13.9)

Prints the used amount of

Standard

Accounting

Prints the remained amount of

Standard Accounting

Report

Report

(Continue)

Option

Configuration

Report

Fax Report

E-mail

Confirmation

Report

Scan to Server

Confirmation

Clean Fuser

Description

You can print a report on the machine's overall configuration.

You can set to print the information of a fax reports.

Multi Send Report

: When you fax to several destination, set this option to print a transmission report.

On

is to print every time you send a fax, the machine prints a confirmation report. With

On-Error

, only when the transmission error occurred, the report will be printed out.

Fax Send Report Appearance

:

You can select whether the image on the confirmation report shows or not.

Fax Sent/Received Report

: The machine stores the logs on each transmission and prints out every

50 logs with this option

On

. It you select

Off

, the machine stores the logs but does not print.

Fax Send Report

: The machine prints the confirmation report after each fax job, only when you send a fax to one destination.

The report shows the job of scanning and sending it via

Scan to Email

.

On

: The report is printed whether a job successfully completed or failed.

Off

: No report is printed after completing a job.

On-Error

: Only in case of error occurrence, the machine prints the report.

The report shows the job of scanning and sending it via SMB and FTP.

On

: The report is printed whether a job successfully completed or failed.

Off

: No report is printed after completing a job.

On-Error

: Only in case of error occurrence, the machine prints the report.

You can clean the inside of a fuser roller by printing a cleaning paper.

You can select among

On

,

Off

,

Print

Now

. Default setting is

On

.

12

.15

<Machine status and advanced

Note

You can also print machine's status information and browse status with

SyncThru™ Web Service

. Open the web browser on your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine. When

SyncThru™ Web Service

opens, click

Information

>

Print information

.

12

.16

<Machine status and advanced

13

Maintenance

This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine.

This chapter includes:

Printing a machine report

Monitoring the supplies life

Finding the serial number

Sending the imaging unit reorder notification

Sending the toner reorder notification

Checking Document Box

Cleaning your machine

Maintaining the toner cartridge

Redistributing toner

Replacing the toner cartridge

Replacing the imaging unit

Replacing the waste toner container

Maintenance Parts

Managing your machine from the website

See page 12.15.

Printing a machine report

Monitoring the supplies life

If you want to view the supply life indicators, follow the next step.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Machine Status

.

3

Scroll down to browse the entire supplies with list view the percentage remaining.

Finding the serial number

If you want to check your serial number from the screen, follow the next steps.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Machine Status

> the

Machine Info

tab >

Machine Details

.

Sending the imaging unit reorder notification

You can set the machine to alert you that the life of the imaging unit is almost over and needs to be reordered.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, then enter password and press

OK

.

3

Press the

General

tab >

Supplies Management

>

Imaging Unit

Reorder Notification

.

4

Press

Imaging Unit Low Alert

to enable this option on, and press

Imaging Unit Low Alert Level

to set the remained life level.

5

Press

OK

.

13

.1

<Maintenance>

Sending the toner reorder notification

You can set the machine to alert you that the toner cartridge needs to be reordered.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, then enter password and press

OK

.

3

Press the

General

tab >

Supplies Management

>

Toner Cartridge

Reorder Notification

.

4

Press

Toner Low Alert

to enable this option on , and press

Toner

Low Alert Level

to set the remained life level.

5

Press

OK

.

Checking Document Box

The machine shows the document box list of the print or fax job.

Press

Document Box

on the

Main

screen. If the screen displays an other menu, press ( ) to go to the

Main

screen.

Search

: Searches a box with a box name or an owner name.

Enter

: Prints or sends the stored file in the box.

Cleaning your machine

To maintain print and scan quality, follow the cleaning procedures below each time the toner cartridge is replaced or if print and scan quality problems occur.

Caution

• Cleaning the machine cabinet with cleaning materials that contain large amounts of alcohol, solvent, or other strong substances can discolor or damage the cabinet.

• If your machine or its surrounding is contaminated with toner, we recommend you to use cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blows in the air and might be harmful to you.

Cleaning the outside

Clean the machine cabinet with a soft lint-free cloth. You can dampen the cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine.

Cleaning the inside

Contact a service representative to clean the inside of the machine.

Cleaning the scan unit

Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the day, as needed.

1

Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.

2

Open the scanner lid.

3

Wipe the surface of the scanner glass and DADF glass until it is clean and dry.

User Box

tab: Create the box where you can save the document such as the file you have printed, sent by email or scanned. When you create a box, you can set the password to secure your box.

The box with a password is called

Secured Box

, and without it, it is called public box.

System Box

tab: The machine provided default boxes, which you cannot modify them.

Type

: Shows the box is secured or not.

Box Name

: Shows the box name.

Owner

: Shows the user name of a box.

Date

: Shows the date of a box created.

File

: Shows the number of total files in the box.

Add

: Lets you add more boxes.

Delete

: Deletes the selected box.

Edit

: Lets you to modify a box name and an owner name.

Detail

: Shows box information.

3

4

1

2

Scanner lid

Scanner glass

White sheet

DADF glass

4

Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is clean and dry.

5

Close the scanner lid.

13

.2

<Maintenance>

Maintaining the toner cartridge

Toner cartridge storage

Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light, temperature, and humidity. Samsung suggests users follow the recommendations to ensure the optimum performance, highest quality, and longest life from your new Samsung toner cartridge.

Store this cartridge in the same environment as the printer it will be used in; this should be in controlled office temperature and humidity conditions.

The toner cartridge should remain in its original, unopened package until installation If original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet.

Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful shelf and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner cartridge is removed from the printer, always store the cartridge:

• Inside the protective bag from the original package.

• Correct side up in a horizontal position (not standing on end).

• Do not store consumables in;

- Temperature greater than 40C (104F).

- Humidity range less than 20% nor greater than 80%.

- An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.

- Direct sunlight or room light.

- Dusty places.

- A car for a long period of time.

- An environment where corrosive gases are present.

- An environment with salty air.

Handling instructions

• Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum in the cartridge.

• Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock.

• Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction; this can cause internal damage and toner spillage.

Use of non-Samsung and refilled toner cartridge

Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non-

Samsung brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic, store brand, refilled, or remanufactured toner cartridges.

Note

Samsungs printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused by the use of a refilled, remanufactured, or non-Samsung brand toner cartridge.

Expected cartridge life

Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print-out number may vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on, operating environment, printing interval, media type, and/or media size.

For example, if you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of the toner is high and you may need to change the cartridge more often.

Redistributing toner

When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life.

• White streaks or light printing occurs.

• The message saying that the estimated toner cartridge life is closed may appear on the display.

If this happens, you can temporarily reestablish print quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge. In some cases, white streaks or light printing will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner.

1

Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool.

2

Open the side cover.

3

Open the front cover.

13

.3

<Maintenance>

Note

Toner particles can be released inside the machine but it does not mean the machine is damaged. Contact a service representative when print quality problems occur.

4

Pull the corresponding toner cartridge out from the machine

.

5

Thoroughly roll the toner cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge.

8

Make sure that the cover is securely latched and then turn the machine on.

Caution

If the cover is not completely closed, the machine will not operate.

Replacing the toner cartridge

The machine uses four colors and has a different toner cartridge for each one: yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K).

• The status LED and the toner-related message on the display indicates which each individual toner cartridge should be replaced.

• The machine stops printing. Incoming faxes are saved in memory.

At this stage, the toner cartridge needs to be replaced. Check the type of

the toner cartridge for your machine. (Page 15.1)

1

Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool.

2

Open the side cover.

Note

If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.

6

Hold the toner cartridge and align it with the corresponding slot inside the machine. Insert it back into its slot until it locks in place.

Note

Toner particles can be released inside the machine but it does not mean the machine is damaged. Contact a service representative when print quality problems occur.

7

Close the front cover, then the side cover.

13

.4

<Maintenance>

3

Open the front cover.

7

Hold the new toner cartridge by the handle and slide the new toner cartridge in until it locks in place.

4

Pull the corresponding toner cartridge out from the machine

.

8

Close the front cover, then the side cover.

9

Make sure that the cover is securely latched and then turn the machine on.

Caution

If the cover is not completely closed, the machine will not operate.

5

Remove the new toner cartridge from its bag.

6

Thoroughly roll the new cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge.

Note

If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.

13

.5

<Maintenance>

Replacing the imaging unit

Expected cartridge life

The useful life of the imaging unit is approximately 30,000 pages. The screen displays

Replace [xxx] Imaging Unit

when the imaging unit is near the end of life. Otherwise your printer stops printing.

Imaging unit yield may be affected by the operating environment, optional, printing interval, media type and media size.

For ordering information for imaging unit. (Page 15.1)

1

Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool.

2

Open the side cover.

4

Pull the waste toner container out of the machine using its handle.

5

Turn the imaging unit locking levers outwards to release and open the inner cover.

3

Open the front cover.

6

Pull the used imaging unit out of the machine using the handle on its bottom.

13

.6

<Maintenance>

7

Remove the new imaging unit from its bag.

Caution

Don’t use sharp objects, such as a knife or scissors, to open the imaging unit package. You could damage the surface of the imaging unit.

8

Remove the paper protecting the surface of the imaging unit.

9

Remove the cap, and carefully pull the seal tapes out of the imaging unit.

11

Labels inside the machine identify each imaging unit’s position.

Holding the handles on the new imaging unit, push the imaging unit until it locks in place.

10

Thoroughly shake the new imaging unit side to side five or six times.

12

Turn the imaging unit locking levers inwards until it locks in place and close the inner cover.

Note

If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.

Caution

• Be careful not to scratch the surface of the imaging unit.

• To prevent damage, do not expose the imaging unit to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper to protect it if necessary.

13

Insert the waste toner container into position and then push it to make sure that it is firmly seated in place.

14

Close the front cover, then the side cover.

15

Make sure that the cover is securely latched and then turn the machine on.

Caution

If the cover is not completely closed, the machine will not operate.

13

.7

<Maintenance>

Replacing the waste toner container

The life of the waste toner container unit is approximately 48,000 images printing. When the life span of the waste toner container has expired,

Waste tank is full. Replace it

appears on the screen display of the control panel, indicating the waste toner container needs to be replaced.

Otherwise your printer stops printing.

To replace the waste toner container:

1

Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool.

2

Open the side cover.

4

Push the lock lever up and pull the waste toner container out.

Note

When you pull out the waste toner container out of the machine, move the container carefully not to drop it from your hands.

Make sure that you lay the waste toner container on a flat surface so that the toner does not spill.

5

Remove the container’s cap from the container as shown below, and use it to close the waste toner container openings.

3

Open the front cover.

Caution

Do not tilt or turn over the container.

6

Take a new waste toner container out of its package.

7

Insert the new container into position and then push it to make sure that it is firmly seated in place.

8

Close the front cover, then the side cover.

9

Make sure that the cover is securely latched and then turn the machine on.

Caution

If the cover is not completely closed, the machine will not operate.

13

.8

<Maintenance>

Maintenance Parts

To avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts and to maintain your machine in top working condition the following items will need to be replaced after the specified number of pages or when the life span of each item has expired.

(T2)

Items

Transfer belt unit

Transfer roller

Fuser unit

DADF rubber pad

DADF feed roller

Multi-purpose tray rubber pad

Part Name

Cartridge-transfer

MEA unit-holder pad

Guide exit duplex MEA unit_exit duplex

Paper feed roller

MP Pickup roller

Side cover grill

MEA unit-TR(2)

ELA unit fuser

RMO-ADF rubber

MEA-ADF roller

MEA unit-roller PU

ELA HOU-MP pickup

DUPLEX-cover filter

Yield (Average)

Approx.

100,000 images

Approx. 100,000 pages

Approx. 100,000 pages

Approx. 50,000 pages

Approx. 200,000 pages

Approx. 50,000 pages

Approx. 100,000 pages

Approx. 100,000 pages

Approx. 200,000 pages

Approx. 100,000 pages

We highly recommend that this maintenance be performed by an authorized service provider, dealer or the retailer where you bought the machine. The warranty does not cover the replacement of the maintenance parts after their lifespan.

Managing your machine from the website

If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP network parameters correctly, you can manage the machine via

Samsung’s

SyncThru™ Web Service

, an embedded web server. Use

SyncThru™ Web Service

to:

• View the device information and check its current status.

• Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters.

• Change the printer properties.

• Set the machine to send email notifications and update you on the machine’s status.

• Get support for using the machine.

To access SyncThru™ Web Service:

1

Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.

2

Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the

Enter

key or click

Go

.

Your machine’s embedded website opens.

Note

SyncThru™ Web Service

allows administrator to set up the machine. If you want to access

Settings

or

Security

menu, login first. Press

Login

button, and enter user ID and password from the pop-up window. Then press

LOGIN

button.

The initial administrator’s setting is as follows:

• The default ID:

admin

• The default password:

sec00000

13

.9

<Maintenance>

14

Troubleshooting

This chapter gives helpful information on what to do if you encounter a problem.

This chapter includes:

Tips for avoiding paper jams

Clearing document jams

Clearing paper jams

Understanding display messages

Solving other problems

Tips for avoiding paper jams

By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided.

When a paper jam occurs, follow the steps outlined on page 14.3.

• Follow the procedure on page 4.7. Ensure that the adjustable guides

are positioned correctly.

• Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray.

• Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.

• Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.

• Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.

• Do not mix paper types in a tray.

• Use only recommended print media. (Page 4.9)

• Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing up in the tray, or facing down in the multi-purpose tray.

• If paper jams occur frequently when you print on A5/B5-sized paper:

Load the paper into the tray with the long edge facing the front of the tray. If load the paper this way, printing both sides of the paper (Duplex) is not supported.

Clearing document jams

When an original jams while passing through the DADF, the warming message appears on the display screen.

Caution

To avoid tearing the document, remove the jammed document gently and slowly.

Note

To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin, or mixed paper-type originals.

1

Remove any remaining pages from the DADF.

2

Open the DADF cover.

3

Gently remove the jammed paper from the DADF.

Note

If you see no paper in this area, refer to Roller misfeed.

(Page 14.2)

4

Close the DADF cover. Then reload the pages you removed, if any, in the DADF.

14

.1

<Troubleshooting>

Misfeed of exiting paper

1

Remove the remaining documents from the DADF.

2

Open the DADF cover.

Roller misfeed

1

Open the scanner lid.

2

Grasp the misfed paper, and remove the paper from the feed area by carefully pulling it to the right using both hands.

1

3

Open the document input tray upwards and pull the document gently out of the DADF.

1

scanner lid if you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to step 3.

3

Open the white document background.

4

Close the DADF cover and the document input tray. Then place the documents back in the DADF.

14

.2

<Troubleshooting>

4

Remove the paper from the feed area by carefully pulling.

5

Close the white document background and the scanner lid. Then load the removed pages back into the DADF.

Clearing paper jams

When a paper jam occurs, the warming message appears on the display screen. Refer to the table below to locate and clear the paper jam.

Message Location of jam Go to

Paper Jam in tray 1

Paper Jam in tray2

Paper Jam in tray 2(HCF)

Paper Jam in tray3

Paper Jam in MP tray

In the paper feed area

(tray 1, optional tray, or multi-purpose tray)

Paper Jam in exit area

In the fuser area

Paper Jam inside of machine

In the paper inside the machine

In the duplex unit

Paper Jam at the bottom of duplex path

Paper Jam at the top of duplex path

Paper Jam inside of duplex path

Paper jam in front of finisher

Paper jammed in the stacker.

Paper jam inside finisher

Paper jam inside finisher? duplex

Paper jam at exit of finisher

Paper jammed in the stacker.

Paper jammed in the stacker exit part.

Page

14.3

Page

14.5

Page

14.6

Page

14.7

Page 14.8

Page 14.7

Page 14.8

Page 14.9

Page 14.9

Page 14.10

Caution

To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out gently and slowly. Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the jam.

In the tray 1

1

Open the side cover.

14

.3

<Troubleshooting>

2

Open the guide in the direction shown.

5

Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.

3

Carefully remove the misfed paper in the direction shown.

Once you remove the jammed paper here, open the side cover and then close it to clear the error message on the display.

6

Close the side cover and insert the paper tray. Lower the rear part of the Tray to align the rear edge with the corresponding slot of the machine, then insert it completely.

If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see any paper in this area, stop and go to step 4.

4

Lift the front part of the tray up slightly to release the tray from the machine.

14

.4

<Troubleshooting>

In the optional tray

Note

This part explains the method of removing the jammed paper in the optional tray 2. Please refer to the next method for other optional trays, since the method is same as the tray 2

1

Open the outer cover in tray 2.

4

Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release the tray from the machine.

If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to step 3.

5

Remove the paper in the direction shown. To avoid tearing the paper, pull it out gently and slowly.

2

Open the inner cover of tray 2.

3

Pull the jammed paper out in the direction shown. To avoid tearing the paper, pull it out gently and slowly.

6

Insert the paper tray and close the two covers.

If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see any paper in this area, stop and go to step 4.

14

.5

<Troubleshooting>

In the optional high capacity feeder

1

Open the outer cover of the high capacity feeder.

If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see any paper in this area, stop and go to step 4.

4

Pull out the optional high capacity feeder.

5

Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release the tray from the machine.

2

Open the inner cover of the high capacity feeder.

6

Remove the paper in the direction shown. Pull it out gently and slowly in order to avoid tearing the paper.

3

Pull the jammed paper out, in the direction shown, pulling gently and slowly in order to avoid tearing the paper.

If the jammed paper is not visible, or if the paper is stuck, stop pulling and continue on to step 5.

14

.6

<Troubleshooting>

7

Insert the paper tray and close the two covers.

In the paper inside the machine

Note

The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine.

1

Open the side cover.

In the multi-purpose tray

1

If the paper is not feeding properly, pull the paper out of the machine.

2

Remove the jammed paper, in the direction shown.

2

Open and close the side cover. Printing automatically resumes.

If you do not see any paper in this area, go to step 3.

14

.7

<Troubleshooting>

3

Open the guide in the direction shown and pull the jammed paper gently out of the machine.

3

Close the side cover. Printing automatically resumes.

4

Open and close the front cover to resume printing.

In the fuser area

1

Open the side cover.

2

Remove the jammed paper, in the direction shown.

In the duplex unit area

If the duplex unit is not inserted correctly, paper jam may occur. Make sure that the duplex unit is inserted correctly.

1

Open the side cover.

2

Remove the jammed paper.

If the jammed paper is inside the fuser, remove the jammed paper in the direction show.

3

Close the side cover.

14

.8

<Troubleshooting>

In the stacker (finisher)

Paper jam in front of finisher

1

Open the stacker front cover.

5

Close the stacker front cover.

Paper jam inside finisher,

Paper jam inside finisher? duplex

1

Open the stacker front cover.

2

Press right of

1c

lever and then push stacker to left.

2

Pull the stacker lever

1a

down. If necessary, pull the stacker lever

1b

down as well.

3

Remove the jammed paper.

4

Slide in the stacker until you hear the sound ‘click’.

3

Remove the jammed paper.

14

.9

<Troubleshooting>

4

Pull up on the stacker lever and then close the stacker front cover.

Paper jam at exit of finisher

1

Gently pull the paper out through the exit area.

2

Close the side cover. Printing automatically resumes.

Understanding display messages

Messages appear on the Smart Panel program window or on the control panel display to indicate machine status or errors. Refer to the tables below to understand the messages meaning to correct the problem, if necessary. Messages and their explanations are listed in alphabetical order.

Note

• If the message is not in the table, cycle the power and try

the printing job again. If the problem persists, call for service.

•When you call for service, it is very convenient to provide the service representative with the contents of display message.

• Some messages may not appear in the display depending on options or models.

• [xxx] indicates the part of the each toner cartridge or each imaging unit.

• [yyy] indicates the part of the machine.

• [zzz] indicates the error code. When you contact the service center, this error code help to handle the problem.

• You may see an exclamation mark ( ) or a cross mark

( ) on the upper left of the display, in that case, press the question mark to browse detailed information on the supplies.

Message

[yyy] is worn.

Replace with new one

Meaning

The life of the part expires totally.

Suggested solutions

Replace the part with a new one. Call for service.

[xxx] imaging unit is not compatible.

Check userís guide

[xxx] imaging unit is not installed.

Install it

Replace with new

[xxx] imaging unit

The imaging unit you have installed is not for your machine.

The imaging unit is not installed, or the CRUM

(Consumer

Replaceable Unit

Monitor) in the cartridge is not connected.

The imaging unit is at the end of its life.

When the imaging unit replacement message appears on the screen and if you select

Continue

, this message displays.

Install a Samsunggenuine imaging unit, designed for your machine.

Install the imaging unit. If it is already installed, try to reinstall the imaging unit.

If the problem persists, please call for service.

Replace a imaging unit with a Samsunggenuine imaging unit.

(Page 13.6)

14

.10

<Troubleshooting>

Message

[xxx] toner cartridge is not compatible. Check userís guide

[xxx] toner cartridge is not installed. Install it

DC motor does not operate: [zzz].

Please turn off then on

Did not supply enough [xxx] toner. Remove seal tape & reinstall

Did not supply enough [xxx] toner. Please open/close door

Meaning

The toner cartridge you have installed is not for your machine.

Suggested solutions

Install a Samsunggenuine toner cartridge, designed for your machine.

Try to reinstall the toner cartridge.

The toner cartridge is not installed or the

CRUM (Consumer

Replaceable Unit

Monitor) in the cartridge is not properly connected.

There is a problem in the control of DC motor unit.

Not supplied toner to the imaging unit.

The machine received several papers with many images, and it cannot supply the toner properly.

The imaging unit has reached its life span.

Turn the machine off and turn it on again. If the problem persists, please call for service.

• Remove the sealing tape from the imaging unit

.

• Thoroughly roll the toner cartridge five or six times, and reinstall it.

• Turn the machine off and turn it on again.

Check the toner cartridge and redistribute the toner.

(Page 13.3) If the

problem still persists, please call for service.

Replace the imaging unit.

End of life,

Replace with new

[xxx] imaging unit

End of life,

Replace with new

[xxx] toner cartridge

A toner cartridge has reached its estimated cartridge life. The printer stops printing.

Fax memory is almost full. Print or remove received fax Job

Fax memory is full.

Print or remove received fax Job

There is no more available fax memory.

No more fax data can be received.

Available fax memory is now 1MB.

Replace the toner cartridge with a

Samsung-genuine toner cartridge.

(Page 13.4)

Delete the received fax data in the memory. Call for service to delete fax memory.

Delete the received fax data in the memory to secure memory. Call for service.

14

.11

<Troubleshooting>

Message

Finisher door is open. Close it

Finisher error:

[zzz]. Please turn off then on

Fuser error: [zzz].

Please turn off then on

Meaning

The finisher cover is not securely latched.

There is a problem in the finisher unit.

There is a problem in the fuser unit working.

Fuser unit is not installed correctly.

Install it

LSU error: [zzz].

Please turn off then on

The fuser unit is not installed or correctly.

There is a problem in the control of LSU unit.

Suggested solutions

Close the finisher until it locks into place.

Turn the machine off and reinstall the finisher again. Check that the finisher cable is connected properly. If the problem persists, please call for service.

Turn the machine off and turn it on again. If the problem persists, please call for service.

Install the fuser unit.

Call for service.

Motor does not operate: [zzz].

Please turn off then on

Original paper does not feed in scanner

Original paper is too long for scanner. Check size

There is a problem in the control of motor unit.

The lead edge of the document failed to actuate the scan sensor within the correct time after actuating the registration sensor.

Oversized document or double-feeding of originals.

Turn the machine off and turn it on again. If the problem persists, please call for service.

Turn the machine off and turn it on again. If the problem persists, please call for service.

Open the DADF cover and remove jammed original.

(Page 14.1)

Original paper jam in front of scanner

The originals are jammed in DADF.

Open the DADF cover and remove the jammed original.

(Page 14.1)

Check the document size whether it is supported.

(Page 17.1)

Open the DADF cover and remove the jammed original.

(Page 14.1)

Message

Original paper jam in front of scanner duplex path

Original paper jam inside of scanner

Original paper jam while reversing paper in scanner

Meaning

Paper has jammed during duplex printing in the DADF.

The lead edge of the document failed to actuate the gate sensor within the correct time after actuating the scan sensor.

When the machine is on, jammed paper is detected in the DADF.

The lead edge of the document failed to actuate the duplex sensor within the correct time when the document was fed the wrong way.

Paper jammed in the stacker exit part.

Paper has jammed during duplex printing.

Suggested solutions

Clear the jam.

(Page 14.2)

Open the DADF cover and remove the jammed original.

(Page 14.1)

Lift up the document input traz and remove the jammed original.

(Page 14.1)

Pull jammed paper from the stacker exit.

Clear the jam.

(Page 14.8)

Paper jam at exit of finisher

Paper Jam at the bottom of duplex path

Paper Jam at the top of duplex path

Paper Jam in exit area

Paper jam in front of finisher

Paper has jammed during duplex printing.

Paper has jammed in the fuser area.

Paper jammed in the stacker.

Paper Jam in MP tray

Paper misfed from multi-purpose tray

Paper Jam in tray 1

Paper has jammed in the feeding area of the tray.

Paper Jam in tray 2

Paper has jammed in the feeding area of the tray.

Paper Jam in tray

2(HCF)

Paper has jammed in the feeding area of the tray.

Paper Jam in tray 3

Paper has jammed in the feeding area of the tray.

Clear the jam.

(Page 14.8)

Clear the jam.

(Page 14.8)

Open the stacker door and remove jammed paper by lowering guide 1a or

1b.

Clear the jam.

(Page 14.7)

Clear the jam.

(Page 14.3 and

page 14.5)

Clear the jam.

(Page 14.3 and

page 14.5)

Clear the jam.

(Page 14.3 and

page 14.5)

Clear the jam.

(Page 14.3 and

page 14.5)

14

.12

<Troubleshooting>

Message

Paper jam inside finisher

Paper jam inside finisher? duplex

Paper Jam inside of duplex path

Paper Jam inside of machine

Prepare new [xxx] toner cartridge

Replace with new

[xxx] toner cartridge

Paper jammed in the stacker.

Paper jammed in the stacker.

Paper has jammed during duplex printing.

Paper has jammed in the registration area.

Small amount of toner is left in the cartridge. the estimated cartridge life of toner is close.

A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life.

Note

Meaning

• Samsung does not recommend using non-genuine

Samsung toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured.

Samsung cannot guarantee nongenuine Samsung toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of using nongenuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty.

Suggested solutions

Open the stacker door and remove jammed paper by lowering guide 1a or

1b.

Open the stacker door and remove jammed paper by lowering guide 1a or

1b.

Clear the jam.

(Page 14.8)

Clear the jam.

(Page 14.7)

Prepare a new cartridge for a replacement. You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the

toner. (Page 13.3)

You can choose

Stop

or

Continue

as shown on the control panel. If you select

Stop

, the printer stops printing and you cannot print any more without changing the cartridge.

If you select

Continue

, the printer keeps printing but the printing quality cannot be guaranteed.

Replace the toner cartridge for the best print quality when this message appears.

Using a cartridge beyond this stage can result in printing quality

issues. (Page 13.4)

Message

Scanner locking switch is locked or another problem occurred

Sensor failure:

[zzz]. Call for service

Shake [xxx] toner cartridge

Staple cartridge is empty. Replace it

Staple cartridge is not installed.

Install it in finisher

System error:

[zzz]. Please turn off then on

This IP address conflicts with an IP address already in use. Check it

Too much paper in finisher stacker.

Remove printed paper

Too much paper in output bin tray.

Remove printed paper

Meaning

The CCD (Charged

Couple Device) lock has been locked. The

CCD does not detect its home location or move.

There is a problem in the sensor signal.

The toner supply is not enough.

Stapler is run out.

The staple cartridge is not installed.

There is a problem in the system operation.

The IP address is used in other place elsewhere.

Suggested solutions

Unlock the CCD lock.

(Page 1.3) Or turn off

the machine and on again. Try again. If the problem persists, call for service.

Turn the machine off and turn it on again. If the problem persists, please call for service.

Thoroughly roll the new cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge.

(Page 13.3)

Order Staple

Cartridge.

(Page 15.2) And

replace it.

(Page 16.2)

Install the staple cartridge following the steps explained on the back of the finisher door.

(Page 16.2) If you

want to continue the print job and disregard of this error message, go to

Admin Setting

to adjust the option.

(Page 12.2)

Turn the machine off and turn it on again. If the problem persists, please call for service.

Check the IP address or obtain a new IP address.

The stacker is full of printouts.

The printed papers are full on the output tray.

Remove printouts from the stacker.

Remove printed outs from the output tray.

14

.13

<Troubleshooting>

Message

Transfer belt is not valid for this machine. Check user’s guide

Prepare new transfer belt unit

Waste tank is full.

Replace it

USE AUXILIARY

ACCESS

Meaning

The transfer belt of the machine is not for your machine.

The life of the transfer belt expires totally.

The life span of the waste toner container has expired and the printer will stop printing until a new waste toner container is placed into the printer.

The credit is not enough to access the job according to

Foreign Device.

Suggested solutions

Install the a

Samsung-genuine part designed for your machine.

Replace the part with a new one. Call for service.

Replace a waste toner container with a

Samsung-genuine waste toner container.

(Page 13.8)

Insert credit into the

Foreign Device.

Solving other problems

The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the recommended solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is corrected. If the problem persists, please call for service.

Touch screen problem

Condition

The touch screen does not show anything.

Suggested solutions

• Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen.

• Turn the machine off and turn it on again. If the problem persists, please call for service.

Paper feeding problems

Condition

Paper is jammed during printing.

Paper sticks together.

Suggested solutions

Clear the paper jam. (Page 14.3)

Multiple sheets of paper do not feed.

Paper does not feed into the machine.

• Ensure that there is not too much paper in the tray. The tray can hold up to 520 sheets of paper, depending on the thickness of the paper.

• Make sure that you are using the correct type

of paper. (Page 4.3)

• Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper.

• Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together.

• Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and weight.

• If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam,

clear the paper jam. (Page 14.3)

• Remove any obstructions from inside the machine.

• Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly.

• There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray.

• The paper is too thick. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the

machine. (Page 4.3)

• If an original does not feed into the machine, the DADF rubber pad may require to be replaced. Contact a service representative.

Condition

The paper keeps jamming.

Transparencies stick together in the paper exit.

Envelopes skew or fail to feed correctly.

Suggested solutions

• There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray. If you are printing on special materials, use the multi-purpose tray.

• An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use only paper that meets the specifications

required by the machine. (Page 4.3)

• There may be debris inside the machine.

Open the front cover and remove the debris.

• If an original does not feed into the machine, the DADF rubber pad may need to be replaced. Contact a service representative.

Use only transparencies specifically designed for laser printers. Remove each transparency as it exits from the machine.

Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes.

Printing problems

Condition

The machine does not print.

Possible cause Suggested solutions

The machine is not receiving power.

Check the power cord connections. Check the power switch and the power source.

The machine is not selected as the default printer.

The connection cable between the computer and the machine is not connected properly.

Select Samsung CLX-8385

Series PCL 6 or

Samsung

CLX-8385 Series PS

as your default printer in your

Windows.

Check the machine for the following:

• The side cover is not closed. Close the side cover.

• Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam. (Page 14.3)

• No paper is loaded. Load paper. (Page 4.7)

• The toner cartridge or the imaging unit is not installed. Install the toner cartridge or imaging unit.

If a system error occurs, contact your service representative.

Disconnect the printer cable and reconnect it.

14

.14

<Troubleshooting>

Condition

The machine does not print.

(continued)

Possible cause

The connection cable between the computer and the machine is defective.

The port setting is incorrect.

Suggested solutions

If possible, attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job. You can also try using a different printer cable.

Check the Windows printer setting to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct port. If the computer has more than one port, make sure that the machine is attached to the correct one.

Check the printer properties to ensure that all of the print settings are correct.

Repair the printer software.

See Software section.

The machine may be configured incorrectly.

The printer driver may be incorrectly installed.

The machine is malfunctioning.

The document size is so big that the hard disk space of the computer is not enough to access the print job.

Check the display message on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a system error. Contact a service representative.

Get more hard disk space and print the document again.

The machine selects print materials from the wrong paper source.

A print job is extremely slow.

The paper option that was selected in the printer properties may be incorrect.

The job may be very complex.

For many software applications, the paper source selection is found under the

Paper

tab within the printer properties. Select the correct paper source.

See the printer driver help screen.

Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality settings.

Condition

Half the page is blank.

The machine prints, but the text is wrong, garbled, or incomplete.

Possible cause

The page orientation setting may be incorrect.

The paper size and the paper size settings do not match.

The printer cable is loose or defective.

The wrong printer driver was selected.

Pages print, but they are blank.

The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner.

Suggested solutions

Change the page orientation in your application. See the printer driver help screen.

Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray.

Or, ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection in the software application settings you use.

Disconnect the printer cable and reconnect. Try a print job that you have already printed successfully. If possible, attach the cable and the machine to another computer and try a print job that you know works. Finally, try a new printer cable.

Check the application’s printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected.

Try printing a job from another application.

The software application is malfunctioning.

The operating system is malfunctioning.

The file may have blank pages.

Some parts, such as the controller or the board, may be defective.

Exit Windows and reboot the computer. Turn the machine off and then back on again.

Redistribute the toner, if necessary.

If necessary, replace the toner cartridge.

Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages.

Contact a service representative.

14

.15

<Troubleshooting>

Condition

PDF file does not print correctlysome parts are missing in the graphics, text or illustrations.

Before printing, the machine emits vapor near the output tray.

Your machine has an odd smell during initial use.

The print quality of photos is not good.

Images are not clear.

The machine does not print special sized paper such as a billing paper.

Possible cause

Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products.

Using damp paper can cause vapor during printing.

The oil used to protect the fuser is evaporating.

The resolution of the photo is very low.

Paper size and paper size setting do not match.

Suggested solutions

Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on

Print As Image

from the Acrobat printing options.

Note:

It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image.

This is not a problem. Just keep printing.

After printing about 100 color pages, there will be no more smell. It is a temporary issue.

Reduce the photo size. If you increase the photo size in the software application, the resolution will be reduced.

Set the correct paper size in the

Custom

in the

Paper

tab in the printer propeties. See

Software section.

Printing quality problems

If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly, you may notice a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the problem.

Condition Suggested solutions

Light or faded print

If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page:

• The toner supply is not enough. You may be able to temporarily extend the toner cartridge life. If this does not improve the print quality, install a new toner cartridge.

• The color tone might not be adjusted. Adjust

the color tone. (Page 12.12)

• The paper may not meet paper specifications; for example, the paper may

be too moist or rough. (Page 4.3)

• If the entire page is light, the print resolution setting is too low or the toner save mode is on. Adjust the print resolution and turn the toner save mode off. See the help screen of the printer driver and refer to Software section, respectively.

• A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning. Contact a service representative.

• The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU, contact a service representative.

Toner specks

• The paper may not meet specifications; for example, the paper may be too moist or

rough. (Page 4.3)

• The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine. Contact a service representative.

• The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a service representative.

• Check the location of the machine. If the area is not well-ventilated, this problem may

occur. (Page 3.1)

Dropouts

If faded areas, generally rounded, occur randomly on the page:

• A single sheet of paper may be defective.

Try reprinting the job.

• The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots on its surface.

Try a different brand of paper. (Page 4.3)

• The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner. Try a different kind or brand of paper.

• If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.

14

.16

<Troubleshooting>

Condition

White Spots

Vertical lines

Color or Black background

Toner smear

Suggested solutions

White spots appears on the page:

• The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from a paper falls to the inner devices within the machine, so the transfer roller may be dirty.

Clean the inside of your machine.

(Page 13.2) Contact a service

representative.

• The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a service representative.

If black vertical streaks appear on the page:

• The drum inside the printer has probably been scratched. Remove the imaging unit

and install a new one. (Page 13.6)

If white vertical streaks appear on the page:

• The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU.

Contact a service representative.

• The inside of the Imaging Unit may be dirty.

Change the Imaging Unit.

If vertical streaks appear on the page:

• The surface of the scanner glass and its white sheet may be dirty. Clean these unit.

See 13.2 . If this problem persists, contact a

service representative.

If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable:

• Change the IBT if it has reached its lifespan.

• Check the environmental conditions: very dry conditions (low humidity) or a high level of humidity (higher than 80% RH) can increase the amount of background shading.

• Remove the old imaging unit and then,

install a new one. (Page 13.4)

• Clean the inside of the machine. Contact a service representative.

• Check the paper type and quality.

(Page 4.3)

• Remove the imaging unit and then, install a

new one. (Page 13.4)

• Change the IBT if it has reached its lifespan.

Condition Suggested solutions

Vertical repetitive defects

If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals:

• The imaging unit may be damaged. If a repetitive mark occurs on the page, run a cleaning sheet through several times to clean the cartridge; contact a service representative. After the printout, if you still have the same problems, remove the imaging unit and then, install a new one.

(Page 13.4)

• Parts of the machine may have toner on them. If the defects occur on the back of the page, the problem will likely correct itself after a few more pages.

• The fusing assembly may be damaged.

Contact a service representative.

Background scatter

Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page.

• The paper may be too damp. Try printing with a different batch of paper. Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much moisture.

• If background scatter occurs on an envelope, change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams on the reverse side.

Printing on seams can cause problems.

• If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page, adjust the print resolution through your software application or in printer properties.

Misformed characters

• If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images, the paper stock may be too slick. Try different paper.

(Page 4.3)

• If characters are improperly formed and producing a wavy effect, the scanner unit may need service. Contact a service representative.

14

.17

<Troubleshooting>

Condition

Page skew

Suggested solutions

• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.

• Check the paper type and quality.

(Page 4.3)

• Ensure that the paper or other material is loaded correctly and the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack.

Curl or wave

• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.

• Check the paper type and quality. Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper

curl. (Page 4.3)

• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.

Wrinkles or creases

• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.

• Check the paper type and quality.

(Page 4.3)

• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.

Back of printouts are dirty

Solid Color or

Black pages

Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the machine. Contact a service representative.

• The imaging unit may not be installed properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it.

• The imaging unit may be defective and need replacing. Remove the imaging unit and

install a new one. (Page 13.4)

• The machine may require repair. Contact a service representative.

Condition

Loose toner

Character Voids

Horizontal stripes

Curl

Suggested solutions

• Clean the inside of the machine. Contact a service representative.

• Check the paper type and quality.

(Page 4.3)

• Remove the imaging unit and then, install a

new one. (Page 13.4)

• If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service representative.

Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black:

• If you are using transparencies, try another type of transparency. Because of the composition of transparencies, some character voids are normal.

• You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper. Remove the paper and turn it around.

• The paper may not meet paper

specifications. (Page 4.3)

If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear:

• The imaging unit may be installed improperly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it.

• The imaging unit may be defective. Remove the imaging unit and install a new one.

(Page 13.6)

• If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service representative.

If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine:

• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.

An unknown image repetitively appears on the next few sheets or loose toner, light print, or contamination occurs.

Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1,000 m (3,281ft) or above. The high altitude may affect the print quality from loose toner or light imaging. You can set this option through

Printer Settings Utility

or the

Printer

Tab in printer driver’s properties. See

page 3.5.

14

.18

<Troubleshooting>

Copying problems

Condition

Copies are too light or too dark.

Smears, lines, marks, or spots appears on copies.

Copy image is skewed.

Blank copies print out.

Image rubs off the copy easily.

Frequent copy paper jams occur.

Toner cartridge produces fewer copies than expected before running out of toner.

Suggested solutions

Use

Light

and

Dark

arrows to darken or lighten the backgrounds of copies.

• If the defects are on the original, press

Light

and

Dark

arrows to lighten the background of your copies.

• If there are no defects on the original, clean

the scan unit. (Page 13.2)

• Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the DADF.

• Check that the copy paper is loaded correctly.

Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the DADF.

• Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a new package.

• In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in the machine for extended periods of time.

• Fan the stack of paper, then turn it over in the tray. Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply. Check/adjust the paper guides, if necessary.

• Ensure that the paper is the proper paper weight. 75 g/m

2

(20 lb bond) paper is recommended.

• Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared.

• Your originals may contain pictures, solids, or heavy lines. For example, your originals may be forms, newsletters, books, or other documents that use more toner.

• The machine may be turned on and off frequently.

• The scanner lid may be left open while copies are being made.

Scanning problems

Condition

The scanner does not work.

The unit scans very slowly.

Suggested solutions

• Make sure that you place the original to be scanned face down on the scanner glass, or face up in the DADF.

• There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan. Try the Prescan function to see if that works. Try lowering the scan resolution rate.

• Check that the printer cable is connected properly.

• Make sure that the printer cable is not defective. Switch the cable with a known good cable. If necessary, replace the cable.

• Check that the scanner is configured correctly. Check scan setting in the

SmarThru

Configuration

or the application you want to use to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port.

• In case of use of account feature, make sure that you have extra scan count remained. For example, if you try to scan 10-page document while you have 5 scan count left, the scan job would be canceled.

• Check if the machine is printing received data. If so, scan the document after the received data has been printed.

• Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.

• Communication speed slows in scan mode because of the large amount of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned image. Set your computer to the

ECP printer mode through BIOS setting. It will help to increase the speed. For details about how to set BIOS, refer to your computer user’s guide.

14

.19

<Troubleshooting>

Condition

Message appears on your computer screen:

• “Device can't be set to the H/W mode you want.”

• “Port is being used by another program.”

• “Port is

Disabled.”

• “Scanner is busy receiving or printing data.

When the current job is completed, try again.”

• “Invalid handle.”

• “Scanning has failed.”

Suggested solutions

• There may be a copying or printing job in progress. Try your job again when that job is finished, try your job again.

• The selected port is currently being used.

Restart your computer and try again.

• The printer cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off.

• The scanner driver is not installed or the operating environment is not set up properly.

• Ensure that the machine is properly connected and the power is on, then restart your computer.

• The USB cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off.

Samsung Scan Manager Problem

Condition

Samsung Scan

Manager does not work.

Suggested solutions

Check your system requirements.

Samsung

Scan Manager

works in Window and

Macintosh (Page 2.2.)

Fax problems (optional)

Condition

The machine is not working, there is no display and the buttons are not working.

No dial tone sounds.

Suggested solutions

• Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.

• Ensure that there is power being supplied to the electrical outlet.

The numbers stored in memory do not dial correctly.

• Check that the phone line is properly connected.

• Check that the phone socket on the wall is working by plugging in another phone.

Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory correctly. Print a

Fax Phone Book

.

(Page 6.8)

Condition

The original does not feed into the machine.

Faxes are not received automatically.

The machine does not send.

The incoming fax has blank spaces or is of poor quality.

Suggested solutions

• Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and you are inserting it in correctly. Check that the original is the right size, not too thick or thin.

• Make sure that the DADF is firmly closed.

• The DADF rubber pad may need to be replaced. Contact a service representative.

• The receiving mode should be set to

Fax

.

• Make sure that there is paper in the tray.

• Check to see if the display shows any error message. If it does, clear the problem.

• Make sure that the original is loaded in the

DADF or on the scanner glass.

• Check the fax machine you are sending to, to see if it can receive your fax.

• The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty.

• A noisy phone line can cause line errors.

• Check your machine by making a copy.

• The toner cartridge may have reached its estimated cartridge life. Replace the toner

cartridge, referring to page 13.4.

The fax machine sending the fax had a temporary document jam.

Stretched words appear on an incoming fax.

There are lines on the originals you sent.

The machine dials a number, but the connection with the other fax machine fails.

Faxes do not store in memory.

Check your scan unit for marks and clean it.

(Page 13.2)

The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper, or cannot answer incoming calls.

Speak with the other machine operator and ask her/him to solve out the problem.

Blank areas appear at the bottom of each page or on other pages, with a small strip of text at the top.

There may not be enough memory space to store the fax. If the display shows the low memory message, delete any faxes you no longer need from the memory and then try to store the fax again. Please call for service.

You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting. For details

about paper settings. (Page 4.9)

14

.20

<Troubleshooting>

Common Windows problems

Condition

“File in Use” message appears during installation.

“General

Protection Fault”,

“Exception OE”,

“Spool32”, or

“Illegal Operation” messages appear.

“Fail To Print”, “A printer timeout error occurred.” messages appear.

Suggested solutions

Exit all software applications. Remove all software from the StartUp Group, then restart

Windows. Reinstall the printer driver.

Close all other applications, reboot Windows and try printing again.

These messages may appear during printing.

Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing. If the message appears in standby mode or after printing has been completed, check the connection and/or whether an error has occurred.

Note

Refer to Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages.

Common PostScript problems

The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when several printer languages are being used.

Note

To receive a printed or screen-displayed message when

PostScript errors occur, open the Print Options window and click the desired selection next to the PostScript errors section.

Problem Possible Cause Solution

PostScript file cannot be printed.

The PostScript driver may not be installed correctly.

• Install the PostScript driver, referring to

Software section.

• Print a configuration page and verify that the

PS version is available for printing.

• If the problem persists, contact a service representative.

“Limit Check

Error” message appears.

A PostScript error page prints.

The optional tray is not selected in the driver.

Window/

Macintosh

Linux

The print job was too complex.

The print job may not be PostScript.

The printer driver has not been configured to recognize the optional tray.

The machine does not staple correctly when printing more than one copy from Acrobat

Reader with a collate option.

The machine does not staple correctly when printing more than one copy with a collate option

You might need to reduce the complexity of the page or install more memory.

Make sure that the print job is a PostScript job. Check to see whether the software application expected a setup or

PostScript header file to be sent to the machine.

Open the PostScript driver properties, select the

Device Settings

tab, and set the

Tray

option of the

Installable Options

section to

Installed

.

Try to print with the latest

Adobe Reader program or print with turning on "Print as Image" option from

Acrobat printing options. It might take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image.

Turning off collation options on applications (including

CUPS pstops collation option) may solve this problem. If you want to use the collation option, go to printer driver’s advanced option and turn the collation on.

14

.21

<Troubleshooting>

Common Linux problems

Problem

The machine does not print.

Possible Cause and Solution

The CUPS (Common UNIX Printing System) version distributed with SuSE Linux 9.2 (cups-

1.1.21) has a problem with ipp (Internet Printing

Protocol) printing.

• Check if the printer driver is installed in your system. Open the Unified Driver configuration tool and switch to the Printers tab in the

Printers configuration window to look at the list of available printers. Make sure that your machine is displayed on the list. If not, use the

Add new printer wizard to set up your device.

• Check if the printer has started. Open Printers configuration and select your machine on the printers list. Look at the description in the

Selected printer pane. If its status contains

“(stopped)” string, please, press the

Start

button. After that, normal operation of the printer should be restored. The “stopped” status might be activated when some problems in printing occurred. For instance, this could be an attempt to print documents when the port is claimed by a scanning application.

• Check if the port is not busy. Since functional components of MFP (printer and scanner) share the same I/O interface (port), the situation of simultaneous access for different

“consumer” application to the same port is possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one of them is allowed to gain control over the device at a time. The other “consumer” will encounter “device busy” response. You should open the ports configuration and select the port assigned to your printer. In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other application. If this is the case, you should wait for completion of the current job or you should press the Release port button, if you are sure that the owner is not functioning properly.

• Check if your application has special print options such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified in the command line parameter then remove it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select

“print” -> “Setup printer” and edit the command line parameter in the command item.

• The CUPS (Common UNIX Printing System) version distributed with SuSE Linux 9.2 (cups-

1.1.21) has a problem with ipp (Internet

Printing Protocol) printing.Use the socket printing instead of ipp or install later version of

CUPS (cups-1.1.22 or higher).

14

.22

<Troubleshooting>

Problem

The machine does not appear on the scanners list.

Possible Cause and Solution

• Check if your machine is attached to your computer. Make sure that it is connected properly via the USB port and is turned on.

• Check if the scanner driver for your machine is installed in your system. Open the Unified

Driver configuration tool, switch to Scanner configuration, then press

Drivers

. Make sure that the window lists a driver with a name corresponding to your machine's name. Check if the port is not busy. Since functional components of MFP (printer and scanner) share the same I/O interface (port), the situation of simultaneous access to different

“consumer” applications using the same port is possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one of them is allowed to gain control over the device at a time. The other “consumer” will encounter a “device busy” response. This usually happens while starting the scan procedure, and an appropriate message box appears.

• To identify the source of the problem, you should open ports configuration and select the port assigned to your scanner. The port symbol

/dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1 relates to LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at / dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to / dev/mfp4 respectively, and so forth sequentially. In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied with some other application. If this is the case, you should wait for completion of the current job or you should press the Release port button, if you are sure that the port owner is not functioning properly.

Problem

The machine does not scan.

I cannot scan via

Gimp Front-end.

I encounter error

“Cannot open port device file” when printing a document.

Possible Cause and Solution

• Check if a document is loaded into the machine.

• Check if your machine is connected to the computer. Make sure it is connected properly if an I/O error is reported while scanning.

• Check if the port is not busy. Since functional components of MFP (printer and scanner) share the same I/O interface (port), the situation of simultaneous access for different

“consumer” applications to the same port is possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one of them is allowed to gain control over the device at a time. The other “consumer” will encounter “device busy” response. This usually happens while starting the scan procedure, and an appropriate message box will be displayed.

To identify the source of the problem, you should open ports configuration and select the port assigned to your scanner. port’s symbol / dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1 relates to LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at / dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to / dev/mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially. In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other application. If this is the case, you should wait for completion of the current job or you should press the Release port button, if you are sure that the port owner is not functioning properly.

• Check if Gimp Front-end has “Xsane: Device dialog.” on the “Acquire” menu. If not, you should install the Xsane plug-in for Gimp on your computer. You can find Xsane plug-in package for Gimp on downloaded Linux package (from Samsung website) or on the

Gimp home page. For detailed information, refer to Help for Linux or Gimp Front-end application.

If you wish to use an other kinds of scan applications, refer to the Help for application.

Please avoid changing print job parameters (via

LPR GUI, for example) while a print job is in progress. Known versions of CUPS server cut off the print jobs whenever print options are changed and then try to restart the job from the beginning.

Since Unified Linux Driver locks port while printing, the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked and therefore unavailable for subsequent print jobs. If this situation occurred, try to release the port.

14

.23

<Troubleshooting>

Problem

Some color images come out all black.

Some color images come out in unexpected color.

The machine does not print whole pages and its output is half page printed.

Possible Cause and Solution

This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU

Ghostscript version 7.05) when the base color space of the document is indexed color space and it is converted through CIE color space.

Because Postscript uses CIE color space for

Color Matching System, you should upgrade

Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU

Ghostscript version 7.06 or later. You can find recent Ghostscript versions at www.ghostscript.com.

This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU

Ghostscript version 7.xx) when the base color space of the document is indexed RGB color space and it is converted through CIE color space. Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching System, you should upgrade

Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU

Ghostscript version 8.xx or later. You can find recent Ghostscript versions at www.ghostscript.com.

It is a known problem that occurs when a color printer is used on version 8.51 or earlier of

Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and reported to bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript Bug

688252.

The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v.

8.52 or above. Download the latest version of

AFPL Ghostscript from http://sourceforge.net/ projects/ghostscript/ and install it to solve this problem.

Common Macintosh problems

Problem

PDF file does not print correctly-some parts are missing in the graphics, text or illustrations.

Suggested solutions

Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products.

Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on

Print As

Image

from the Acrobat printing options.

Note:

It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image.

Update your Mac OS to OS 10.3.3. or higher.

The document has printed, but the print job has not disappeared from the spooler in

Mac OS 10.3.2.

Some letters are not displayed normally during the cover page printing.

When printing a document in Macintosh with Acrobat Reader 6.0 or higher, colors print incorrectly.

This problem is caused because Mac

OS cannot find the font during the cover page printing.

Alphanumeric characters, in the Billing

Info field, are only allowed for printing on the cover page. Other characters will be broken on the printout.

Make sure that the resolution setting in your printer driver matches the one in

Acrobat Reader.

14

.24

<Troubleshooting>

15

Ordering supplies and accessories

This chapter provides information on purchasing cartridges and accessories available for your machine.

This chapter includes:

Supplies

Accessories

How to purchase

Note

The optional parts or features may differ by countries. Contact your sales representatives whether the part you want is available in your country.

Supplies

When the toner runs out or, the life span of the supplies expires you can order the following types of toner cartridges and supplies for your machine:

Type Yield a

Part number

Toner cartridge

CLX-K8385A (Black) Average continuous black cartridge yield:

20,000 standard pages.

Imaging unit

Average continuous colored cartridge yield:

15,000 standard pages

(Yellow/Magenta/

Cyan)

CLX-C8385A (Cyan)

CLX-M8385A

(Magenta)

CLX-Y8385A (Yellow)

Approx. 30,000 pages CLX-R8385K (Black)

CLX-R8385C (Cyan)

CLX-R8385M

(Magenta)

Waste toner container

Approx.

48,000 images b

CLX-R8385Y (Yellow)

CLX-W8380A a. Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.

b. Image counts are based on one color on each page. If you print documents in full color (Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black), the image count will be added by 4 images.

Caution

When purchasing new print cartridges or other supplies, these must be purchased in the same country where the machine was purchased. Otherwise, print cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with your machine, as configurations of print cartridges and other supplies vary, depending on the specific country.

Accessories

You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine’s performance and capacity.

The following accessories are available for your machine:

Accessory Description

Memory module Extand your machine’s memory capacity.

Fax option kit This kit lets you use your machine as a fax machine.

Part number

CLX-MEM400:1GB

SCX-FAX210

Note:

After installing the kit, you have to set up your machine to activate this machine.

(See Page 16.3)

SCX-S6555A

Optional tray 2/3 If you are experiencing frequent paper supply problems, you can attach up to two additonal 520 sheet trays. You can print documents in various sizes and types of print materials in each tray.

High Capacity

Feeder

If you are frequently experiencing paper supply problems, you can attach an additional 2,100 sheet tray.

SCX-HCF100

Caution:

When using the optional High

Capacity Feeder, you must install the foot as shown in the Optional

High Capacity Feeder

Install Guide provided with the optional High

Capacity Feeder.

Otherwise, the machine can fall down and break, causing injury to human.

15

.1

<Ordering supplies and accesso-

Accessory

Stand

Description

You can place the machine on the ergonomicallydesigned cabinet which lets you reach the machine conveniently.

Also, you can easily move the cabinet with its wheels, if necessary, and store miscellaneous items like papers into the cabinet.

Part number

• Tall Stand: SCX-

DSK10T

• Short Stand: SCX-

DSK10S

Caution:

When using the optional Stand, you must install the foot as shown in the Optional

Stand Install Guide provided with the optional Stand.

Otherwise, the machine can fall down and break, causing injury to human.

Note:

If you do not use the optional tray then

Tall Stand is recommended. In case you add two optional trays, use Short Stand.

Staple Cartridge 3 x 5,000 staples per package, covers maximum thickness of

50 sheets, 1 staple position.

FDI (Foreign

Device

Interface) kit

This card is installed inside the machine to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader. Those devices allow the payfor-print service on your machine.

SmarThru

Workflow

4-Bin Mailbox

Windows 2000/XP/

2003. This feature lets you send additional information along with the scanned document to a specified network location.

You can load up to 100 sheets of paper in each stacker.

To use 4-Bin Mailbox, you need to purchase and install 2-Bin

Finisher first.

SCX-STP000

SCX-KIT20F

SCX-KIT11S

SCX-MBT40S

Accessory

2-Bin Finisher

(Stacker

&Stapler)

Description

The 2-Bin Finisher consists of big size output tray which holds up to 500 sheets of paper and small size output tray which holds up to 100 sheets of paper.

500 sheets

Part number

SCX-FIN20S

SCX-FIN11S Finisher

(Stacker

&Stapler)

How to purchase

To order Samsung-authorized supplies or accessories, contact your local

Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine, or visit www.samsung.com/supplies and select your country/region to obtain information on calling for technical support.

15

.2

<Ordering supplies and accesso-

16

Installing accessories

Your machine is a full-featured model that has been optimized to meet most of your printing needs. Recognizing that each user may have different requirements, however, Samsung makes several accessories available to enhance your machine’s capabilities.

This chapter includes:

Precautions to take when installing accessories

Installing a memory module

Replacing the Stapler

Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit

Precautions to take when installing accessories

Disconnect the power cord

Never remove the control board cover while the power is being supplied on.

To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock, always disconnect the power cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external accessories.

Discharge static electricity

The control board and internal accessories (network interface or DIMM) are sensitive to static electricity. Before installing or removing any internal accessories, discharge static electricity from your body by touching something metal, such as the metal back plate on any device plugged into a grounded power source. If you walk round before finishing the installation, repeat this procedure to discharge any static electricity again.

Installing a memory module

Your machine has a dual in-line memory module (DIMM) slot. Use this memory module slot to install additional memory.

The order information is provided for optional memory module. (Page 15.1)

1

Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine.

2

Open the control board cover by grasping it and slide toward you.

1

1

control board cover

3

Take out a new memory module from the plastic bag.

4

Holding the memory module by the edges, align the memory module on the slot at about a 30-degree tilt. Make sure that the notches of the module and the grooves on the slot fit each other.

5

Press the memory module into the slot with care until you hear a

'click'.

Note

The notches and grooves illustrated above may not match those on an actual DIMM and its slot.

6

Replace the control board cover.

7

Reconnect the power cord and printer cable, and turn the machine on.

16

.1

<Installing accessories>

Activating the added memory in the PS printer properties

After installing the memory DIMM, you need to select it in the printer properties of the PostScript printer driver in order to use it.

1

Make sure that the PostScript printer driver is installed on your computer. For details about installing the PS printer driver, see

Software section

.

2

Click the Windows

Start

menu.

3

For Windows 2000, select

Settings

and then

Printers

.

For Windows XP/2003, select

Printers and Faxes

.

For Windows 2008/Vista, select

Control Panel

>

Hardware and

Sound

>

Printers

.

For Windows 7, select

Control Panel

>

Hardware and Sound

>

Devices and Printers

.

For Windows Server 2008 R2, select

Control Panel

>

Hardware

>

Devices and Printers

.

4

Select the

Samsung CLX-8385 Series PS

printer.

Click the right mouse button on the machine icon and select

Properties

.

For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the

Printer properties

.

Note

If Printer properties item has

X

mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer.

5

Select

Device Settings

.

6

select the Installable Options section and set the necessary options.

7

Click

OK

.

Replacing the Stapler

When the stapler is completely empty, the message for installing the staple cartridge appears on the display screen.

1

Open the finisher cover.

2

Pull the stapler unit out.

3

Lift the empty staple cartridge from the stapler unit.

4

Unpack the new staple cartridge.

16

.2

<Installing accessories>

5

Place the staple cartridge back into the stapler unit.

6

Slide the stapler unit in until it locks in place.

7

Close the finisher cover.

Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit

After installing the Fax kit, you have to set up the machine in order to use this function.

1

Press

Machine Setup

on the control panel.

2

Press

Admin Setting

.

3

When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad and press

OK

. (Page 3.5)

4

Press the

General

tab.

5

Press the

Country

.

Change the country, then some the values for fax and paper size will be changed automatically for your country.

16

.3

<Installing accessories>

15

Specifications

This chapter includes:

General specifications

Printer specifications

Copier specifications

Scanner specifications

Facsimile specifications (optional)

General specifications

Item

DADF a

Capacity

DADF document size

Paper input capacity

Paper output capacity

Power rating

Power consumption

Description

Up to 100 sheets 75 g/m

2

(20 lb bond)

• Width:

69 (2.7 inches) to 216 (8.5 inches) mm

• Length:

145 (5.7 inches) to 356 (14.0 inches) mm

• Tray 1

500 multi-page for plain paper 80 g/m

[20 lb(75 g/m

2

) bond 520 sheets]

2

• Multi-purpose tray

100 multi-page for plain paper 80 g/m

2

(20 lb bond)

• Optional tray 2/3

500 multi-page for plain paper 80 g/m

[20 lb(75 g/m

2

) bond 520 sheets]

2

• Optional High capacity tray

1,950 multi-page for plain paper 80 g/m

2

[20 lb(75 g/m

2

) bond 2,100 sheets]

For details about paper input capacity, see

page 4.3

• Face down: 500 sheets 75 g/m

2

(20 lb bond)

• Optional Stacker: 500 sheets 75 g/m

2

(20 lb bond)

• 2-Bin Finisher: 600 sheets 75 g/m

2

(20 lb bond)

• 2-Bin Finisher & 4-Bin Mail box: 1000 sheets

75 g/m

2

(20 lb bond)

AC 110 - 127 V or AC 220 - 240 V

See the Rating label on the machine for the correct voltage, frequency (hertz) and type of current for your machine.

• Average operation mode: Less than 650 W

• Power save mode: Less than 20 W

• Standby mode: Less than 100 W

• Power off mode: 1 W

Item

Noise level b

Boot-up time

Description

• Standby mode: 40 dB(A)

• Printing mode: 54 dB(A)

• Copying mode: 57 dB(A)

• Less than 30 seconds (from sleep mode)

• Less than 70 seconds (from power off)

The boot-up time will be longer, if data volume is a lot in the HDD

Operating environment

Display

Consumables

Life c

Temperature: 10 °C to 32 °C (50° F to 89.6° F)

Humidity: 20% to 80% RH

7 inch WVGA (800 x 480) Color-TFT graphic LCD with Touch-Screen, 16 bit color (64k Color)

• Toner cartridge d

Average continuous black cartridge yield:

20,000 standard pages e

Average continuous Yellow/Magenta/Cyan cartridge yield: 15,000 standard pages e

• Imaging unit

Approx. 30,000 pages

• Waste toner container

Approx. 48,000 images f

Memory Standard: 1,280 MB (1,024 MB main memory and

256 MB fixed IP memory)

Maximum: Expandable to 2,304 MB

Slots: One available DIMM slot for expandable memory.

606.8 x 575.0 x 815.5 mm (without optional trays), 23.89 x 22.64 x 32.11 inches

External dimension

(W x D x H)

Weight

(including consumables)

Package weight

71.5 Kg (157.63 lbs)

Paper: 9.7 Kg ( 21.38 lbs), Plastic: 2.7 Kg (5.95 lbs)

175° C (347° F) Fusing temperature a. DADF (Duplex Automatic Document Feeder): The machine with this feature scans both sides of a paper.

b. Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: machine basic installation, A4 paper, simplex printing.

c. May be affected by operating environment, printing interval, media type, and media size.

d. It varies depending on the product configuration.

e. Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.

f. Image counts are based on one color on each page. If you print documents in full color (Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black), the image count will be added by 4 images.

17

.1

<Specifications>

Printer specifications

Item Description

Printing method

Printing speed a

Color Laser Beam Printing

Up to 38 ppm in A4

(40 ppm in Letter)

Duplex printing speed Up to 33 ppm in A4

(35 ppm in Letter)

First print out time

Print resolution

Black & White

• From ready: Less than 14 seconds

• From coldboot: Less than 85 seconds

Color

• From ready: Less than 14 seconds

• From coldboot: Less than 85 seconds

Up to 9,600 x 600 dpi effective output (600 x

600 x 4 dpi)

Printer language PCL5ce, PCL6, PostScript 3, PDF Direct

V1.4

OS compatibility b

• Windows 2000/XP/2003/2008/Vista/7/

2008 R2

• Various Linux OS

• Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.6

Interface

• High Speed USB 2.0

• Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base TX a. Print speed will be affected by operating system used, computing performance, application software, connect on method, media type, media size, and job complexity.

b. Please visit www.samsung.com/printer to download the latest software version.

Item

Copy speed a

Copier specifications

Description

Up to 38 cpm in A4 (40 cpm in Letter)

First copy out time

Copy resolution

Zoom rate

• From ready: Less than 13 seconds

• From coldboot: Less than 85 seconds

DADF

• Scan: Up to 300 x 300 dpi

(text, text/photo, magazine, photo)

• Print: Up to 600 x 600 dpi

(text, text/photo, magazine, photo)

Scanner glass (Platen)

• Scan: Up to 600 x 600 dpi

(text, text/photo, magazine, photo)

• Print: Up to 600 x 600 dpi (text, text/photo, magazine)

Up to 1,200 x 1,200 dpi (photo)

• Scanner glass (Platen): 25 to 400%

• DADF: 25 to 200%

Multiple copies 1 to 999 copies a. SDMC: Copy speed is based on single document multiple copy.

17

.2

<Specifications>

Scanner specifications

Compatibility

Item

Scanning method

Resolution a

Scan File format

WIA standard

Scan to USB

Scan to PC

Scan to Email

Scan to Server

Effective scanning length

Effective scanning width

Color bit depth

TWAIN standard

Description

TWAIN standard / WIA standard

DADF and Flat-bed Color CCD

(Charge Coupled Device) module

Up to 600 x 600 dpi (Up to 4,800 x

4,800 dpi by software enhancement)

Up to 600 x 600 dpi

100, 200, 300 dpi

75,150,200,300,600 dpi

100, 200, 300, 600 dpi (B/W)

100,200,300 dpi (Gray, Color)

PDF, TIFF, JPEG b

• Scanner glass: 348 mm (13.7 inches)

• DADF: 348 mm (13.7 inches)

Max. 208 mm (8.2 inches)

• Internal: 36 bits

• External: 24 bits

Mono bit depth • 1 bit for Linearity & Halftone

• 8 bits (External), 12 bits

(Internal) for Gray scale

Grayscale 256 levels a. Due to the applications for scanning, the maximum resolution might differ.

b. JPEG is not available when you select the mono mode in scan color.

Facsimile specifications (optional)

Compatibility

Item

Applicable line

Data coding

Modem speed

Transmission speed

Maximum document length

Resolution Black &

White

Color

Description

ITU-T G3

Public Switched Telephone Network

(PSTN) or behind PABX

MH/MR/MMR/JBIG/JPEG (Tx only)

33.6 Kbps

Approx. 3 seconds/page a

• Scanner glass: 356 mm (14 inches)

• DADF: 356 mm (14 inches)

• Standard

Up to 203 x 98 dpi

• Fine

Up to 203 x 196 dpi

• Super Fine (Fine photo)

Up to 300 x 300 dpi

Up to 406 x 392 dpi

Up to 203 x 392 dpi (Rx b

only)

• Standard

Up to 200 x 200 dpi

• Fine

Up to 200 x 200 dpi

• Super Fine

Up to 200 x 200 dpi

Halftone

Memory

Auto dialer (Speed Dial)

256 levels

HDD Stroe, 500 jobs

Up to 200 numbers a. Standard resolution, MMR(JBIG), Maximum modem speed, Phase"C" by ITU-T

No.1 chart, Memory Tx, ECM.

b. Rx stands for receiving a fax.

17

.3

<Specifications>

18

Glossary

Note

The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as mentioned in this user's guide.

ADF

An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a mechanism that will automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the paper at once.

AppleTalk

AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh

(1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.

BIT Depth

A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits increases, the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and white.

BMP

A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft

Windows graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file format on that platform.

BOOTP

Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them. The BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation' computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system.

CCD

Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you move the machine.

Collation

Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies.

Control Panel

A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or monitoring instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of the machine.

Coverage

It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as the coverage.

18

.1

<Glossary>

CSV

Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to exchange data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is used in Microsoft Excel, has become a pseudo standard throughout the industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms.

DADF

A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a mechanism that will automatically feed and flip over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper.

Default

The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state, reset, or initialized.

DHCP

A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information required by the client host to participate on an IP network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.

DIMM

Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds memory. DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data, received fax data.

DNS

The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks, such as the Internet.

Dot Matrix Printer

A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter.

DPI

Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size.

DRPD

Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers.

Duplex

A mechanism that will automatically flip over a sheet of paper so that the machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with a Duplex can print double-sided of paper.

Duty Cycle

Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20 working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day.

ECM

Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise.

Emulation

Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another.

An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system, so that the second system behaves like the first system.

Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which is in contrast to simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its internal state.

Ethernet

Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control

(MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread

LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present.

EtherTalk

A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.

FDI

Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your machine.

FTP

A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol

(such as the Internet or an intranet).

Fuser Unit

The part of a laser printer that melts the toner onto the print media. It consists of a hot roller and a back-up roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer.

Gateway

A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network.

Grayscale

A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented by various shades of gray.

Halftone

An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots.

HDD

Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk, is a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.

18

.2

<Glossary>

IEEE

The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international non-profit, professional organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity.

IEEE 1284

The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of

Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral (for example, a printer).

Intranet

A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization's information or operations with its employees. Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service, the internal website.

IP address

An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard.

IPM

The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete within one minute.

IPP

The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing as well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing solution than older ones.

IPX/SPX

IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet

Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose

(typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).

ISO

The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international standard-setting body composed of representatives from national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and commercial standards.

ITU-T

The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize and regulate international radio and telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization, allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow international phone calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates telecommunication.

ITU-T No. 1 chart

Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile transmissions.

JBIG

Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used on other images.

JPEG

Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used standard method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the

World Wide Web.

LDAP

The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over

TCP/IP.

LED

A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine.

MAC address

Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-34-11-4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks.

MFP

Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the following functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a copier, a fax, a scanner and etc.

MH

Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-based run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space, this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes.

MMR

Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.6.

Modem

A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information.

MR

Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by

ITU-T T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the differences are encoded and transmitted.

NetWare

A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack.

Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.

OPC

Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is usually green or gray colored and a cylinder shaped.

An exposing unit of a drum is slowly worn away by its usage of the printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets scratches from grits of a paper.

Originals

The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text, etc, which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but which is not itself copied or derived from something else.

OSI

Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the

International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications. OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network design that divides the required set of complex functions into manageable, self-contained, functional layers. The layers are, from top to bottom, Application, Presentation, Session, Transport,

Network, Data Link and Physical.

PABX

A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone switching system within a private enterprise.

PCL

Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language

(PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has been released in varying levels for thermal, matrix printer, and page printers.

PDF

Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device independent and resolution independent format.

PostScript

PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. - that is run in an interpreter to generate an image.

Printer Driver

A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer.

Print Media

The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used on a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.

PPM

Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute.

PRN file

An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies many tasks.

18

.3

<Glossary>

Protocol

A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection, communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints.

PS

See PostScript.

PSTN

The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the world's public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial premises, is usually routed through the switchboard.

Resolution

The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the dpi, the greater the resolution.

SMB

Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated Interprocess communication mechanism.

SMTP

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, textbased protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a clientserver protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the server.

Subnet Mask

The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host address.

TCP/IP

The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol

(IP); the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run.

TCR

Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each transmission such as job status, transmission result and number of pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions.

TIFF

Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped image format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have been made by various image processing applications.

Toner Cartridge

A kind of bottle within a machine like printer which contains toner.

Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms the text and images on the printed paper. Toner can be melted by the heat of the fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper.

TWAIN

An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAINcompliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be initiated from within the program.; an image capture API for Microsoft

Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems.

UNC Path

Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a UNC path is: \\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional directory>

URL

Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the resource is located.

USB

Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the

USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals. Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals.

Watermark

A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps, currency, and other government documents to discourage counterfeiting.

WIA

Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIAcompliant scanner.

18

.4

<Glossary>

I

NDEX

A

admin setting

12.1

altitude adjustment

12.3

answering machine/fax

6.6

authentication network accounting

12.8

printing a report

12.2

,

12.15

setting up

3.5

,

12.2

auto center

5.11

B

Book copy

5.8

C

CCD Lock

1.3

cleaning inside

13.2

outside

13.2

scan unit

13.2

Clear

1.5

Clear All

1.5

Clone copy

5.8

collated

5.4

color mode faxing

6.8

scanning

7.9

,

9.4

control panel

1.3

,

1.5

copy copying

5.2

covers

5.9

duplex copy

5.3

erasing background

5.11

erasing edge

5.10

making a booklet

5.8

page number

12.5

poster

5.7

reduce/enlarge

5.3

shifting margin

5.11

solving copy problems

14.19

the size of the originals

5.3

transparencies

5.9

copy setup

12.5

country setup

12.5

D

DADF cover

1.3

input tray

1.3

output tray

1.3

width guides

1.3

darkness copying

5.5

faxing

6.8

scanning

7.9

,

9.4

date & time

3.5

,

12.2

printing date&time in copied out

12.2

default settings

3.7

altitude adjustment

12.3

changing the default settings

3.7

energy saver

12.3

language

12.3

loading paper

3.6

machine test

12.3

measurements

12.2

output option

12.3

setting a fax header

6.3

sound

12.3

supplies management

12.3

system timeout

12.3

tray management

12.3

tray setting

3.6

display screen

1.5

document box

13.2

driver feature

2.2

installation

3.3

duplex copying

5.3

faxing

6.7

scanning

7.8

,

9.3

E

email address entering email addresses to input field

7.5

1

Global

7.5

Group

7.5

Individual

7.5

erasing background copying

5.11

faxing

6.8

scanning

7.9

,

9.5

erasing punch hole

5.11

error correction mode

12.5

error message

14.10

extension telephone

6.6

F

fax option kit enabling option feature after installing the kit

16.3

ordering

1.2

,

15.1

fax receiving changing the receive mode

6.6

extension telephone

6.6

in answering machine/fax

6.6

in memory

6.7

receiving in duplex

6.7

secure receiving

6.6

fax sending automatic resending

6.4

delay sending

6.5

duplex sending

6.3

redialing the last number

6.4

sending a fax

6.3

sending a fax manually

6.4

sending a priority fax

6.5

setting a fax header

6.3

fax setup

12.5

faxing color mode

6.8

darkness

6.8

duplex

6.7

enabling the fax kit option

12.12

,

16.3

erasing background

6.8

original type

6.8

phonebook

6.8

printing a fax report

13.1

resolution

6.7

solving faxing problems

14.20

FDI authentication

12.8

dummy

1.4

FDI (Foreign Interface Device) ordering

1.2

,

15.2

finisher (Stacker & Stapler) connection

1.4

ordering

1.2

,

15.2

paper jam

14.9

front cover

1.3

FTP

7.7

G

general settings

12.2

Gray scan

7.9

,

9.4

Group

Group fax number

6.9

I

ID copy

5.6

Individual email addresses for scanning

7.5

individual fax number

6.8

Interrupt

1.5

J

jam clearing paper from the duplex unit area

14.8

clearing paper from the exit area

14.7

clearing paper from the fuser unit

14.8

clearing paper from the multi-purpose tray

14.7

clearing paper from the optional tray

14.5

,

14.6

clearing paper from the stacker (finisher)

14.9

clearing paper from the tray1

14.3

clearing the original from DADF

14.1

clearing the original from scanner glass

14.2

tips for avoiding paper jams

14.10

Job Status

1.5

,

1.8

JPEG

7.10

,

9.5

K

keyboard

3.7

L

language

3.6

LED

1.5

Interrupt

1.7

Power Saver

1.7

Status

1.7

LINE socket

1.4

Linux problems

14.22

requirements

2.3

M

Machine Info

12.1

Machine Setup

1.8

,

12.1

machine status

12.2

Machine Status

1.8

Macintosh problems

14.24

requirements

2.3

Mailbox creating Mailbox

6.11

deleting the data of the Mailbox

6.12

Mailbox List

6.11

Mailbox No.

6.11

Mailbox Passcode

6.11

polling

6.11

printing a Mailbox

6.12

sending to remote Mailbox

6.12

storing the originals

6.12

Maintenance

13.1

maintenance parts

13.9

toner cartridge

13.3

memory DIMM installing

16.1

message on the display screen

14.10

Mono

7.9

,

9.4

multi-purpose tray

1.3

N

network port

1.4

requirements

3.2

setting up

3.2

,

12.7

notification receiving a fax in Mailbox

6.12

N-up copy

5.7

O

OCR

7.10

,

9.5

On Hook Dial

1.5

hardware

1.5

2 sending a fax

6.4

optional service

12.12

optional tray

1.2

,

1.3

,

15.1

ordering supplies

15.1

original size copying

5.3

scanning

7.9

,

9.4

original type copying

5.5

faxing

6.8

scanning

7.9

,

9.4

originals

4.1

clearing jam

14.1

loading in the DADF

4.1

loading on the scanner glass

4.1

output options

12.3

P

page numbering in copying

12.5

paper changing the size

4.8

clearing jam

14.3

loading in the multi-purpose tray

4.8

loading in the optional tray

4.7

loading in the tray1

4.7

paper feeding problems

14.14

setting the paper size of the tray

4.9

phonebook fax

6.8

fax phonebook from SyncThru Web Service

6.9

polling deleting the polling document

6.10

polling a remote fax

6.11

polling from remote Mailbox

6.11

printing the polling document

6.10

storing the originals for polling

6.10

PostScript driver features

2.2

problems

14.21

Power Save

3.6

Power Saver

1.5

,

1.7

hardware

1.5

,

1.7

using power save mode

3.6

,

12.3

print media guidelines

4.4

media sizes

4.4

selecting print media

4.2

specification

4.3

print/report accounting reports

12.15

configuration report

12.15

e-mail confirmation report

12.15

fax report

12.15

from the website

13.9

network auth. log report

12.15

network configuration

12.15

PCL font list

12.15

PS3 font list

12.15

scan report

13.1

scan to server confirmation

12.15

Schedule jobs report

12.15

supplies information

12.15

usage page report

12.15

Printer software CD

2.1

printing

8.1

problem solving

14.14

USB memory

9.6

problems copying

14.19

display message

14.10

faxing

14.20

Linux

14.22

Macintosh

14.24

paper feeder

14.14

PostScript

14.21

printing

14.14

printing quality

14.16

scanning

14.19

touch screen

14.14

Windows

14.21

Q

quality scanning

7.10

,

9.5

solving the printing problem

14.16

R

Redial/Pause

1.5

remote code

12.5

replacing waste toner container

13.8

replacing components imaging unit

13.6

toner cartridge

13.4

replacing stapler

16.2

Report

12.15

Resolution faxing

6.7

scanning

7.8

,

9.3

S

Scan to Email

7.4

confirmation

12.15

Scan to Server

7.7

confirmation

12.15

scanned file format

7.10

,

9.5

scanning color mode

7.9

,

9.4

darkness

7.9

,

9.4

erasing background

7.9

,

9.5

file format

7.10

,

9.5

original size

7.9

,

9.4

original type

7.9

,

9.4

printing an email report

13.1

quality

7.10

,

9.5

resolution

7.8

,

9.3

sending it via email

7.4

sending it via FTP

7.7

sending it via SMB

7.7

solving scanning problems

14.19

USB flash memory

9.2

,

10.3

serial number

13.1

service center registration

12.2

shifting margin

5.11

side cover

1.3

SMB

7.7

sound

12.3

specifications

17.1

,

18.1

speed dial no.

6.8

Stacker

1.2

,

15.2

stand

1.2

,

1.3

,

15.2

staple cartridge ordering

1.2

,

15.2

replacing

16.2

Start

1.5

Stop

1.5

supplied software

2.1

supplies browsing the supplies life

12.2

checking the supplies life

13.1

expected imaging unit life

12.3

,

13.6

expected toner cartridge life

12.3

,

13.3

management

12.3

ordering supplies

15.1

Supplies Management

12.3

SyncThru Web Service

13.9

email address

7.4

fax settings

6.9

SMB/FTP setting

7.7

System timeout

3.6

T

telephone

6.6

terminal ID

12.5

TIFF

7.10

,

9.5

toner cartridge

1.3

toner reorder notification

13.2

touch screen

3 problem solving

14.14

tray adjusting the width and length

4.8

optional tray

1.3

tray1

1.3

troubleshooting

14.1

U

USB port

1.4

USB flash memory printing

9.6

scanning

9.2

,

10.3

W

waste toner container replace

13.8

Windows problems

14.21

requirements

2.2

REV

4

.00

Samsung Printer

Software section

S

OFTWARE SECTION

C

ONTENTS

Chapter 1:

I

NSTALLING

P

RINTER

S

OFTWARE IN

W

INDOWS

Installing Printer Software ........................................................................................................ 5

Installing Software for Local Printing ................................................................................. 5

Installing Software for Network Printing ............................................................................. 8

Reinstalling Printer Software ................................................................................................... 11

Removing Printer Software ..................................................................................................... 12

Installing mono printer driver .................................................................................................. 13

Chapter 2:

B

ASIC

P

RINTING

Printing a Document .............................................................................................................. 14

Printing to a file (PRN) .......................................................................................................... 14

Printer Settings ..................................................................................................................... 15

Basic Tab .................................................................................................................... 16

Paper Tab .................................................................................................................... 16

Graphics Tab ............................................................................................................... 18

Advanced Tab .............................................................................................................. 19

Samsung Tab ............................................................................................................... 19

Using a favorite setting ................................................................................................. 19

Using Help ................................................................................................................... 20

Chapter 3:

A

DVANCED

P

RINTING

Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper (N-Up Printing) ..................................................... 21

Printing Posters ..................................................................................................................... 22

Printing Booklets .................................................................................................................. 22

Printing on Both Sides of Paper ............................................................................................... 23

Change percentage of your document ...................................................................................... 23

Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size ......................................................................... 23

1

Using Watermarks ................................................................................................................. 24

Using an Existing Watermark ......................................................................................... 24

Creating a Watermark ................................................................................................... 24

Editing a Watermark ..................................................................................................... 24

Deleting a Watermark ................................................................................................... 24

Using Overlays ...................................................................................................................... 25

What is an Overlay? ...................................................................................................... 25

Creating a New Page Overlay ......................................................................................... 25

Using a Page Overlay .................................................................................................... 25

Deleting a Page Overlay ................................................................................................ 25

Chapter 4:

U

SING

W

INDOWS

P

OST

S

CRIPT

D

RIVER

Printer Settings ..................................................................................................................... 26

Advanced .................................................................................................................... 26

Using Help ................................................................................................................... 26

Chapter 5:

U

SING

D

IRECT

P

RINTING

U

TILITY

Overview Direct Printing Utility ................................................................................................ 27

Printing ................................................................................................................................ 27

From the Direct Printing Utility window ............................................................................ 27

Using the shortcut icon ................................................................................................. 27

Using the right-click menu ............................................................................................. 27

Chapter 6:

S

HARING THE

P

RINTER

L

OCALLY

Setting Up a Host Computer ................................................................................................... 28

Setting Up a Client Computer .................................................................................................. 28

Chapter 7:

S

CANNING

Scanning Using SmarThru Office .............................................................................................. 29

Starting SmarThru Office ............................................................................................... 29

Quick Start Guide ......................................................................................................... 29

Using SmarThru Office .................................................................................................. 29

Uninstalling SmarThru Office .......................................................................................... 30

Scanning Process with TWAIN-enabled Software ........................................................................ 30

2

Scanning Using the WIA Driver ................................................................................................ 31

Windows XP/Server 2003 .............................................................................................. 31

Windows 2008/Vista ..................................................................................................... 31

Windows 7 .................................................................................................................. 31

Chapter 8:

U

SING

S

MART

P

ANEL

Understanding Smart Panel .................................................................................................... 32

Opening the Troubleshooting Guide ......................................................................................... 33

Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings ............................................................................. 33

Chapter 9:

U

SING

Y

OUR

P

RINTER IN

L

INUX

Getting Started ..................................................................................................................... 34

Installing the Unified Linux Driver ............................................................................................ 34

Installing the Unified Linux Driver ................................................................................... 34

Installing the SmartPanel .............................................................................................. 35

Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver ............................................................................... 35

Using the Unified Driver Configurator ....................................................................................... 36

Opening the Unified Driver Configurator .......................................................................... 36

Printers Configuration ................................................................................................... 36

Scanners Configuration ................................................................................................. 37

Ports Configuration ....................................................................................................... 37

Configuring Printer Properties ................................................................................................. 38

Printing a Document .............................................................................................................. 38

Printing from Applications .............................................................................................. 38

Printing Files ................................................................................................................ 39

Scanning a Document ............................................................................................................ 39

Using the Image Manager .............................................................................................. 40

Chapter 10:

U

SING

Y

OUR

P

RINTER WITH A

M

ACINTOSH

Installing Software ................................................................................................................ 42

Uninstalling software ............................................................................................................. 42

Setting Up the Printer ............................................................................................................ 43

For a Network-connected ............................................................................................... 43

3

For a USB-connected .................................................................................................... 43

Printing ................................................................................................................................ 44

Printing a Document ..................................................................................................... 44

Changing Printer Settings .............................................................................................. 44

Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper .................................................................. 48

Duplex Printing ............................................................................................................ 48

Scanning .............................................................................................................................. 49

Scanning with USB ....................................................................................................... 49

Scanning with network .................................................................................................. 49

4

1

Installing Printer

Software in Windows

This chapter includes:

• Installing Printer Software

• Reinstalling Printer Software

• Removing Printer Software

• Installing mono printer driver

N

OTE

: The following procedure is based on Windows XP, for other operating systems, refer to the corresponding Windows user's guide or online help.

Installing Printer Software

You can install the printer software for local printing or network printing. To install the printer software on the computer, perform the appropriate installation procedure depending on the printer in use.

A printer driver is software that lets your computer communicate with your printer. The procedure to install drivers may differ depending on the operating system you are using.

All applications should be closed on your PC before beginning installation.

Installing Software for Local Printing

A local printer is a printer directly attached to your computer using the printer cable supplied with your printer, such as a USB or parallel cable. If your printer is attached to a network, skip

this step and go to “Installing Software for Network Printing” on page 8.

You can install the printer software using the typical or custom method.

N

OTE

: If the “Found New Hardware Wizard” window appears during the installation procedure, click in the upper right corner of the box to close the window, or click

Cancel

.

Typical Installation

This is recommended for most users. All components necessary for printer operations will be installed.

1

Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer and powered on.

2

Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window appears.

If the installation window does not appear, click

Start

and then

Run

. Type

X:\Setup.exe

, replacing “

X

” with the letter which represents your drive and click

OK

.

If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008

Server R2 click

Start

All programs

Accessories

Run

.

Type

X:\Setup.exe

replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive and click

OK

and type

.

If the

AutoPlay

window appears in Windows Vista,

Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2, click

Run

Setup.exe

in

Install or run program

field, and click

Continue

in the

User Account Control

window.

3

Click

Next

.

• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.

5

Installing Printer Software in Windows

4

Select

Typical installation for a local printer

. Click

Next

.

and click

Finish

. You are now sent to the Samsung web site.

Otherwise, just click

Finish

.

N

OTE

: If your printer is not already connected to the computer, the following window will appear.

• After connecting the printer, click

Next

.

• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click

Next

, and

No

on the following screen. Then the installation will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the installation.

• The installation window that appears in this User’s

Guide may differ depending on the printer and interface in use.

5

After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test page, select the checkbox and click

Next

.

Otherwise, just click

Next

and skip to step 7.

6

If the test page prints out correctly, click

Yes

.

If not, click

No

to reprint it.

7

To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from Samsung, select the checkbox

6

Installing Printer Software in Windows

N

OTE

: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t

work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling

Printer Software” on page 11.

Custom Installation

You can choose individual components to install.

1

Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer and powered on.

2

Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window appears.

If the installation window does not appear, click

Start

and then

Run

. Type

X:\Setup.exe

, replacing “

X

” with the letter which represents your drive and click

OK

.

If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008

Server R2 click

Start

All programs

Accessories

Run

.

Type

X:\Setup.exe

replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive and click

OK

and type

.

If the

AutoPlay

window appears in Windows Vista,

Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2, click

Run

Setup.exe

in

Install or run program

field, and click

Continue

in the

User Account Control

window.

3

Click

Next

.

N

OTE

: If your printer is not already connected to the computer, the following window will appear.

• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.

4

Select

Custom installation

. Click

Next

.

• After connecting the printer, click

Next

.

• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click

Next

, and

No

on the following screen. Then the installation will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the installation.

• The installation window that appears in this User’s

Guide may differ depending on the printer and interface in use.

6

Select the components to be installed and click

Next

.

5

Select your printer and click

Next

.

N

OTE

: You can change the desired installation folder by clicking [

Browse

].

7

After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test page, select the checkbox and click

Next

.

Otherwise, just click

Next

and skip to step 9.

8

If the test page prints out correctly, click

Yes

.

If not, click

No

to reprint it.

7

Installing Printer Software in Windows

9

To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from Samsung, select the checkbox and click

Finish

. You are now sent to the Samsung web site.

Otherwise, just click

Finish

.

3

Click

Next

.

• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.

4

Select

Typical installation for a network printer

. Click

Next

.

Installing Software for Network

Printing

When you connect your printer to a network, you must first configure the TCP/IP settings for the printer. After you have assigned and verified the TCP/IP settings, you are ready to install the software on each computer on the network.

You can install the printer software using the typical or custom method.

Typical Installation

This is recommended for most users. All components necessary for printer operations will be installed.

1

Make sure that the printer is connected to your network and powered on. For details about connecting to the network, see the supplied printer’s User’s Guide.

2

Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window appears.

If the installation window does not appear, click

Start

and then

Run

. Type

X:\Setup.exe

, replacing “

X

” with the letter which represents your drive and click

OK

.

If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008

Server R2 click

Start

All programs

Accessories

Run

.

Type

X:\Setup.exe

replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive and click

OK

and type

.

If the

AutoPlay

window appears in Windows Vista,

Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2, click

Run

Setup.exe

in

Install or run program

field, and click

Continue

in the

User Account Control

window.

5

The list of printers available on the network appears.

Select the printer you want to install from the list and then click

Next

.

8

Installing Printer Software in Windows

• If you click the

Advanced

button, you can search a printer with the

SNMP Community Name

. Default name is ‘public’.

• If you do not see your printer on the list, click

Update

to refresh the list, or select

Add TCP/IP Port

to add your printer to the network. To add the printer to the network, enter the port name and the IP address for the printer.

To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address, print a Network Configuration page in machine.

• To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select

Shared Printer [UNC]

and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the

Browse

button.

• If you select

Add TCP/IP Port

, you can enter IPv4,

IPv6 or the Hostname.

N

OTE

: If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn off the firewall and click

Update

.

For Windows operating system, click

Start

Control Panel

and start windows firewall, and set this option unactivated.

For other operating system, refer to its on-line guide.

6

After the installation is finished, a window appears asking you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from

Samsung. If you so desire, select the corresponding checkbox(es) and click

Finish

.

Otherwise, just click

Finish

.

1

Make sure that the printer is connected to your network and powered on. For details about connecting to the network, see the supplied printer’s User’s Guide.

2

Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window appears.

If the installation window does not appear, click

Start

and then

Run

. Type

X:\Setup.exe

, replacing “

X

” with the letter which represents your drive and click

OK

.

If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008

Server R2 click

Start

All programs

Accessories

Run

.

Type

X:\Setup.exe

replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive and click

OK

and type

.

If the

AutoPlay

window appears in Windows Vista,

Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2, click

Run

Setup.exe

in

Install or run program

field, and click

Continue

in the

User Account Control

window.

3

Click

Next

.

• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.

4

Select

Custom installation

. Click

Next

.

N

OTE

: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t

work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling

Printer Software” on page 11.

Custom Installation

You can choose individual components to install and set a specific IP address.

9

Installing Printer Software in Windows

5

The list of printers available on the network appears.

Select the printer you want to install from the list and then click

Next

.

T

IP

: If you want to set a specific IP address on a specific network printer, click the

Set IP Address

button. The Set IP

Address window appears. Do as follows:

• If you click the

Advanced

button, you can search a priter with the

SNMP Community Name

. Default name is ‘public’.

• If you do not see your printer on the list, click

Update

to refresh the list, or select

Add TCP/IP Port

to add your printer to the network. To add the printer to the network, enter the port name and the IP address for the printer.

To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address, print a Network Configuration page in machine.

• To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select

Shared Printer [UNC]

and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the

Browse

button.

• If you select

Add TCP/IP Port

, you can enter IPv4,

IPv6 or the Hostname.

N

OTE

: If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn off the firewall and click

Update

.

For Windows operating system, click

Start

Control Panel

and start windows firewall, and set this option unactivated.

For other operating system, refer to its on-line guide.

a. Select a printer to be set with a specific IP address from the list.

b. Configure an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway for the printer manually and click

Configure

to set the specific IP address for the network printer.

c. Click

Next

.

6

Select the components to be installed. After selecting the components, the following window appears. You can also change the printer name, set the printer to be shared on the network, set the printer as the default printer, and change the port name of each printer. Click

Next

.

To install this software on a server, select the

Setting up this printer on a server

checkbox.

7

After the installation is finished, a window appears asking you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from

Samsung. If you so desire, select the corresponding checkbox(es) and click

Finish

.

10

Installing Printer Software in Windows

Otherwise, just click

Finish

.

N

OTE

: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t

work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling

Printer Software” on page 11.

Reinstalling Printer Software

You can reinstall the software if installation fails.

1

Start Windows.

2

From the

Start

menu select

Programs

or

All Programs

Samsung Printers

your printer driver name

Maintenance

.

3

Select

Repair

and click

Next

.

4

The list of printers available on the network appears.

Select the printer you want to install from the list and then click

Next

.

• If you click the

Advanced

button, you can search a priter with the

SNMP Community Name

. Default name is ‘public’.

• If you do not see your printer on the list, click

Update

to refresh the list, or select

Add TCP/IP Port

to add your printer to the network. To add the printer to the network, enter the port name and the IP address for the printer.

• To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select

Shared Printer [UNC]

and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the

Browse

button.

• If you select

Add TCP/IP Port

, you can enter IPv4,

IPv6 or the Hostname.

You will see a component list so that you can reinstall any item individually.

11

Installing Printer Software in Windows

N

OTE

: If your printer is not already connected to the computer, the following window will appear.

• After connecting the printer, click

Next

.

• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click

Next

, and

No

on the following screen. Then the installation will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the installation.

• The reinstallation window that appears in this User’s

Guide may differ depending on the printer and interface in use.

5

Select the components you want to reinstall and click

Next

.

If you installed the printer software for local printing and you select

your printer driver name

, the window asking you to print a test page appears. Do as follows: a. To print a test page, select the check box and click

Next

.

b. If the test page prints out correctly, click

Yes

.

If it doesn’t, click

No

to reprint it.

6

When the reinstallation is done, click

Finish

.

Removing Printer Software

1

Start Windows.

2

From the

Start

menu select

Programs

or

All Programs

Samsung Printers

your printer driver name

Maintenance

.

3

Select

Remove

and click

Next

.

You will see a component list so that you can remove any item individually.

4

Select the components you want to remove and then click

Next

.

5

When your computer asks you to confirm your selection, click

Yes

.

The selected driver and all of its components are removed from your computer.

After the software is removed, click

Finish

.

12

Installing Printer Software in Windows

Installing mono printer driver

This printer provides you the printer drivers with a mono driver so you can use your printer as a monochrome printer. You must install the mono driver on your computer. Following steps guide you through the step by step installation process.

1

Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer and powered on. Or your computer and printer are connected to the network.

2

Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive. The

CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window appears.

3

Click Cancel.

N

OTE

: If you have installed a mono driver before, then the

Use Existing Driver

window. Select as the window explains, and click

Next

. Also, depending on your computer configuration, the printer sharing window or the print the test page window may appear; make the appropriate selection.

14

Enter your printer name, and click

Next

.

15

Click

Finish

to start installing a mono printer driver.

N

OTE

: If your printer is connected to a network, go to printer's

Properties

and select the

Ports

tab, then click

Add

Port

and

Standard TCP/IP Port

, and create a new port to connect to the printer. To create a new port, follow the procedure laid out in the wizard window.

If the confirmation window appears, click Finish.

4

Click

Start

Printers and Faxes

.

5

Select

Add Printer

.

6

When

Add Printer Wizard

appears, click

Next

.

7

Select

Local printer attached to this computer

, and

Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer

, then click

Next

. Go to step 13.

If your computer does not find the printer, then follow the next step.

8

Select

Next

in the

Select a Printer Port

window.

9

In the

Select a Printer Port

window, select

Have Disk...

.

10

Click

Browse

to find a mono driver for your printer.

ex) Windows XP 32 bit

Select CD-ROM drive →

Printer

PC_MONO

WINXP_2000_VISTA-32

11

Select

***.inf

file and click

Open

.

12

Click

OK

in the

Install From Disk

window.

13

Select a mono driver in the

Printers

field, and click

Next

.

13

Installing Printer Software in Windows

2

Basic Printing

This chapter explains the printing options and common printing tasks in Windows.

This chapter includes:

• Printing a Document

• Printing to a file (PRN)

• Printer Settings

- Basic Tab

- Paper Tab

- Graphics Tab

- Advanced Tab

- Samsung Tab

- Using a favorite setting

- Using Help

The basic print settings are selected within the Print window. These settings include the number of copies and print range.

Make sure that your printer is selected.

Printing a Document

N

OTE

:

• Your printer driver

Properties

window that appears in this

User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.

However the composition of the printer properties window is similar.

• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible with your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s

Guide.

• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can check the supplied CD-ROM.

• When you select an option in printer properties, you may see an exclamation mark or mark. An exclamation mark means you can select that certain option but it is not recommended, and mark means you cannot select that option due to the machine’s setting or environment.

The following procedure describes the general steps required for printing from various Windows applications. The exact steps for printing a document may vary depending on the application program you are using. Refer to the User’s Guide of your software application for the exact printing procedure.

1

Open the document you want to print.

2

Select

Print

from the

File

menu. The Print window is displayed. It may look slightly different depending on your application.

14

Basic Printing

3

Select your machine from the

Select Printer

list.

To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver, click

Properties

or

Preferences

in the

application’s Print window. For details, see “Printer

Settings” on page 15.

If you see

Setup

,

Printer

, or

Options

in your Print window, click it instead. Then click

Properties

on the next screen.

Click

OK

to close the printer properties window.

4

To start the print job, click

OK

or

Print

in the Print window.

N

OTE

:

• The PostScript driver is recommended for best print image quality from PostScript-based applications such as Acrobat

Reader

®

, Adobe Illustrator

®

, Adobe Photoshop

®

, etc.

• If you are using Windows Internet Explorer, the Samsung

AnyWeb Print too will save your time for screen-captured images or printing the image. Click

Start

>

All programs

>

Samsung Printers

>

Samsung AnyWeb Print

>

Download the latest version

to link the website where the tool is available for downloading.

Printing to a file (PRN)

You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file for your purpose.

To create a file:

1

Check the

Print to file

box at the

Print

window.

2

Click

Print

.

3

Type in the destination path and the file name, and then click

OK

.

For example c:\Temp\file name.

N

OTE

:

If you type in only the file name, the file is automatically saved in

My Documents

.

Printer Settings

You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to access all of the printer options you need when using your printer. When the printer properties are displayed, you can review and change the settings needed for your print job.

Your printer properties window may differ, depending on your operating system. This Software User’s Guide shows the

Properties window for Windows XP.

Your printer driver

Properties

window that appears in this

User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.

If you access printer properties through the Printers folder, you can view additional Windows-based tabs (refer to your

Windows User’s Guide) .

N

OTE

:

• Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the printer driver. Change all print settings available in the software application first, and change any remaining settings using the printer driver.

• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are using the current program.

To make your changes permanent

, make them in the Printers folder.

• The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other

Windows OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's

Guide or online help.

1. Click the Windows

Start

button.

2. Select

Printers and Faxes

.

3. Select

your printer driver icon

.

4. Right-click on the printer driver icon and select

Printing Preferences

.

5. Change the settings on each tab, click OK.

15

Basic Printing

Basic Tab

Use

Basic

tab to adjust how the document appear on the printed page. Click the

Basic

tab to display the options shown

below. See “Printing a Document” on page 14 for more

information on accessing printer properties. several pages. Paste printed pages together to form one poster-

size document. For details, see “Printing Posters” on page 22.

Booklet Printing

option allows you to print your document on both sides of the paper to make into a booklet. For details, see

“Printing Booklets” on page 22.

Double-Sided Printing

Double-Sided Printing

allows you to print on both sides of paper.

If this option does not appear, your printer does not have this feature.

• For details, see “Printing on Both Sides of Paper” on page 23.

Paper Tab

Use the

Paper

tab options to set the basic paper handling specifications. Click the

Paper

tab to display the options shown

below. See “Printing a Document” on page 14 for more

information on accessing printer properties.

Orientation

Orientation

allows you to select the direction in which information is printed on a page.

Portrait

: prints across the width of the page, letter style.

Landscape

: prints across the length of the page, spreadsheet style.

Rotate 180 Degrees

: allows you to rotate the page the selected degrees.

Portrait

Landscape

Quality

The available

Quality

options may vary depending on your machine. The higher the setting, the sharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics. The higher setting may also increase the printing time of a document.

Layout Options

Layout Options

allows you to select various ways to layout your document.

Single Page Per Side

is a basic layout option. This option allows you to print a page on one side of a paper.

Multiple Pages Per Side

option allows you to print several

pages on one side of a paper. For details, see “Printing Multiple

Pages on One Sheet of Paper (N-Up Printing)” on page 21.

Poster Printing

option allows you to print your document into a poster-size document. This option prints your document into

16

Basic Printing

Copies

Copies

allows you to choose the number of copies to be printed.

You can select number of copies to be printed for color and grayscale each. You can select from 1 to 999 copies.

Paper Options

Paper Options

allows you to choose paper tray you want to use.

N

OTE

: When printing on an envelope, select the

Envelope

tab to set the options.

Size

: This option allows you to set the size of paper to be loaded in the tray. This setting appears in the list, so that you can select it.

Source

: Make sure that

Source

is set to the corresponding paper tray.Use

MP Tray

when printing on special materials, such as envelopes and transparencies.

Type

: This option allows you to set the type of paper to be loaded in the tray. This setting appears in the list, so that you can select it. This will let you get the best quality printout. If not, the desired print quality may not be achieved.

-

Plain

: Normal plain paper. Select this type if your machine is monochrome and printing on the 60 G./m2 (16 lb) cotton paper.

-

Thick

: 90 to 120g/m2 (24 to 32 lb) thick paper.

-

Thin

: 60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lb) thin paper.

-

Cotton

: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) cotton paper such as

Gilbert 25 % and Gilbert 100 %.

-

Color

: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) color-backgrounded paper.

-

Preprinted

: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) preprinted paper.

-

Recycled

: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) recycled paper.

-

Envelope

: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) envelope.

-

Transparency

: 138 to 146 g/m2 (36 to 39 lb) transparency paper.

-

Labels

: 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lb) label.

-

CardStock

: 120 to 163 g/m2 (24 to 43 lb) cardstock.

-

Bond

: 105 to 120 g/m2 (28 to 32 lb) bond.

-

Archive

: 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lb) If you need to keep the print-out for a long period time, such as archives, select this option.

-

Letterhead

: 90g/m2(24 lb) letterhead.

-

Punched

:60~90g/m2(16~24 lb) punched paper.

Output Bin

: This option allows you to choose the output bin for prinouts.

N

OTE

: You need to install an optional finisher such as 2-Bin

Finisher or 4-Bin Mailbox.

Advanced Paper Options

:

First Page

This property allows you to print the first page using a different paper type from the rest of the document. You can select the paper source for the first page.

For example, load thick stock for the first page into the Multipurpose Tray, and plain paper into Tray n. Then, select

Tray n

in the

Source

option and

Multi-Purpose Tray

in the

First Page

option.

Cover Page

This property provides you to print a cover page using a specific paper size and type from a specific paper source which you selected. If you configure the options to make printing on twosided, the first 2 pages or the last 2 pages of document will be used as a front or back cover.

-

No Covers

: Prints the document without covers.

-

Front Cover

: Prints the document with a front cover. The front cover can be a blank paper or the first page in the document.

-

Back Cover

: Prints the document with a back cover. The back cover can be a blank paper or the last page in the document.

-

Front and Back Cover

: Prints the document with a front cover and a back cover. The covers can be blank papers or the first and the last pages in the document.

Transparency Separator

17

Basic Printing

-

No Separator

: Does not place separator sheets between transparencies.

-

Printed Separator

: Places the same image on the divider sheets as printed on the transparency.

-

Blank Separator

: Places a blank sheet between transparencies.

N

OTE

: If you click

Reset

, settings in the

Advanced

option returns to the default setting.

Scaling Options

This option allows you to automatically or manually scale your print job on a page. This option can be grayed out according to the Layout Options setting in the Basic tab.

Fit to Page

: This option allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the document size. For

details, see “Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size” on page 23.

Percentage

: This option allows you to change the size of a page’s contents to appear larger or smaller on the printed page

by typing in a percentage you want. For details, see “Change percentage of your document” on page 23.

Graphics Tab

Use the

Graphic

tab options to adjust the print quality for your specific printing needs. Click the

Graphic

tab to display the

options shown below. See “Printing a Document” on page 14

for more information on accessing printer properties.

Color Mode

You can choose color options. Setting to

Color

typically produces the best possible print quality for color documents. If you want to print a color document in grayscale, select

Grayscale

. If you want to adjust the color options manually, click

Advanced

button.

Advanced

: You can adjust the color options manually.

-

Levels

: You can manually adjust the level of color settings like brightness, contrast and more.

-

Matching

: You can choose the color mode among

Default

Settings

,

ICM Setting

, and

RGB Color

(You can import the color file you created with Samsung Easy Color Manager to the printer driver. For more information go to http:// solution.samsungprinter.com/personal/colormanager/

)

.

N

OTE

:

• If you click the

Reset

button, settings in the

Advanced

option returns to the default setting.

• If you click the

Import Image

button, you can use the image you want to use for adjusting color settings. Click

Default Image

to use the default image.

Font/Text

Darken Text

:Check this box to print all the text in your document darker than on a normal document.

All Text Black

:Check this box to print all the texts in your document in solid black, regardless of the color it appears on the screen.

Advanced

:

-

Download as Outline

: This option allows the driver to download any TrueType fonts that are used in your document not stored (resident) on your machine. If, after printing a document, you find that the fonts did not print correctly,

18

Basic Printing choose

Download as Bit Image

and resubmit your print job.

This feature is available only when you use the PCL printer driver.

-

Download as Bit Image

: This option allows the driver to download the font data as bitmap images. Documents with complicated fonts, such as Korean or Chinese, or various other fonts, will print faster in this setting. Download as bit image is useful when printing from Adobe programs.

-

Print as Graphics

: This option allows the driver to download any fonts as graphics. When printing documents with high graphic content and relatively few TrueType fonts, printing performance (speed) may be enhanced in this setting.

-

Use Printer Fonts

: When

Use Printer Fonts

is checked, the printer uses the fonts that are stored in its memory (resident fonts) to print your document, rather than downloading the fonts used in your document. Because downloading fonts takes time, selecting this option can speed up your printing time. When using Printer fonts, the printer will try to match the fonts used in your document to those stored in its memory. If, however, you use fonts in your document that are very different from those resident in the printer, your printed output will appear very different from what it looks like on the screen.

N

OTE

:If you click the

Reset

button, settings in the

Advanced

option returns to the default setting.

Raster Compression

This option determines the compression level of images for transferring data from a computer to a printer. If you set this option to

Maximum

, the printing speed will be high, but the printing quality will be low.

Graphic Controller

Fine Edge

allows users to emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for improving readability and align each color channel registration in color printing mode.

Advanced Tab

Use the

Advanced

tab to set various printing options. Click the

Advanced

tab to display the options shown below. See

“Printing a Document” on page 14 for more information on

accessing printer properties.

Watermark

This option allows you to print text over an existing document. For

details, see “Using Watermarks” on page 24.

Overlay

Overlays are often used to take the place of preprinted forms and

letterhead paper. For details, see “Using Overlays” on page 25.

Output Options

Print Order

: This options allows you to set the sequence in which the pages will print. Select the print order from the dropdown list.

-

Normal

: This option allows you to print all pages from the first page to the last page.

-

Reverse All Pages

: This option allows you to print all pages from the last page to the first page.

-

Print Odd Pages

: This option allows you to print only the odd numbered pages of the document.

-

Print Even Pages

: This option allows you to print only the even numbered pages of the document.

Staple

: This option staples the print outs.

Request Offset

: If you don’t want the printout-sets to be in one stack, the machine places printout-sets slightly offset from one another.

Output Mode

: This option allows you to choose the way printouts are to be arranged.

N

OTE

: You need to install an optional finisher such as 2-Bin

Finisher or 4-Bin Mailbox.

19

Basic Printing

Advanced

: This option allows you to set advanced output options for printing, such as printing an information page, and saving as a form to later use as an overlay.

N

OTE

:If you click the

Reset

button, settings in the

Advanced

option returns to the default setting.

Job Settings

This option allows you to choose how to print or save the printing file by using the optional HDD.

Print Mode

: The default

Print Mode

is

Normal

which is for printing without saving the printing file in the optional HDD.

User ID

: This option is used when you need to find a saved file using the control panel.

Job Name

: This option is used when you need to find a saved file using the control panel.

Samsung Tab

Use the

Samsung

tab to display the copyright and the version number of the driver. If your computer is connected to the

Internet, you can have access to following services:

Click the Samsung tab to display the options.

See “Printing a Document” on page 14 for more information

about accessing printer properties.

Help

This option allows you to open the

Help

file by searching a keyword.

Service

Check for updates

: This option allows you to download updates for your printer driver.

Samsung Website

: This option directly connects you to

Samsung Website.

Registration

: This option allows you to register your machine.

Buy Supplies

: This option allows you to order supplies online.

Using a favorite setting

The

Presets

option, which is visible on each preferences tab except for

Samsung

tab, allows you to save the current preferences settings for future use.

To save a

Presets

item:

1

Change the settings as needed on each tab.

2

Enter a name for the item in the

Presets

input box.

3

Click

Add

. When you save

Presets

, all current driver settings are saved.

If you click

Add

, the

Add

button changes to

Update

button. Select more options and click

Update

, settings will be added to the

Presets

you made.

To use a saved setting, select it from the

Presets

drop down list. The machine is now set to print according to the setting you selected.

To delete saved setting, select it from the

Presets

drop down list and click

Delete

.

You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by selecting

Default Preset

from the

Presets

drop down list.

Using Help

Click from the upper-right corner of the window, and then click on any option. The help screen gives detailed information about the printing features provided by the printer driver.

20

Basic Printing

3

Advanced Printing

This chapter explains printing options and advanced printing tasks.

N

OTE

:

• Your printer driver

Properties

window that appears in this

User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.

However the composition of the printer properties window is similar.

• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can check the supplied CD-ROM.

This chapter includes:

• Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper (N-Up

Printing)

• Printing Posters

• Printing Booklets

• Printing on Both Sides of Paper

• Change percentage of your document

• Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size

• Using Watermarks

• Using Overlays

1 2

3 4

Printing Multiple Pages on One

Sheet of Paper (N-Up Printing)

You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet.

1

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 14.

2

From the

Basic

tab, choose

Multiple Pages Per Side

in the

Type

drop-down list.

3

Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet

(2, 4, 6, 9, or 16) in the

Pages per Side

drop-down list.

4

Select the page order from the

Pages Order

drop-down list, if necessary.

Check

Print Page Border

to print a border around each page on the sheet.

5

Click the

Paper

tab, select the

Size

,

Source

, and

Type

.

6

Click

OK

and print the document.

21

Advanced Printing

Printing Posters

This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4,

9, or 16 sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one poster-size document.

1

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 14.

2

Click the

Basic

tab, select

Poster Printing

in the

Type

drop-down list.

3

Configure the poster option:

You can select the page layout from

Poster 2x2

,

Poster

3x3

, or

Poster 4x4

. If you select

Poster 2x2

, the output will be automatically stretched to cover 4 physical pages.

Specify an overlap in millimeters or inches to make it easier to pasting the sheets together.

0.15 inches

0.15 inches

4

Click the

Paper

tab, select the

Size

,

Source

, and

Type

.

5

Click

OK

and print the document. You can complete the poster by pasting the sheets together.

Printing Booklets

9

8

9

8

This printer feature allows you to print your document on both sides of the paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet.

N

OTE

: If you want to make a booklet, you need to print on

Letter, Legal, A4, Us Folio, or Oficio sized print media.

1

To change the print settings from your software

application, access the printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 14.

2

From the

Basic

tab, choose

Booklet Printing

from the

Type

drop-down list.

3

Click the

Paper

tab, select the

Size

,

Source

, and

Type

.

N

OTE

: The

Booklet Printing

option is not available for all paper sizes. In order to find out the available paper size for this feature, select the available paper size in the

Size

option on the

Paper

tab.

If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be automatically canceled. Select only available paper. (paper without or mark).

4

Click

OK

and print the document.

5

After printing, fold and staple the pages.

22

Advanced Printing

Printing on Both Sides of Paper

You can print on both sides of a paper; duplex. Before printing, decide how you want your document oriented. You can only use this feature with Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized paper.

The options are:

Printer Setting

, if you select this option, this feature is determined by the setting you’ve made on the control panel of the printer.

None

Long Edge

, which is the conventional layout used in book binding.

Short Edge

, which is the type often used with calendars.

2

2

2

3

5

Long Edge

5

3

2

5

3

Short Edge

3

5

Reverse Duplex Printing

, allows you to select general print order compare to duplex print order.

N

OTE

: Do not print on both sides of labels, transparencies, envelopes, or thick paper. Paper jamming and damage to the printer may result.

1

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. “Printing a

Document” on page 14.

2

From the

Basic

tab, select the paper orientation.

3

From the

Double-sided Printing

section, select the binding option you want.

4

Click the

Paper

tab, select the

Size

,

Source

, and

Type

.

5

Click

OK

and print the document.

N

OTE

: If your printer does not have a duplex unit, you should complete the printing job manually. The printer prints every other page of the document first. After printing the first side of your job, the Printing Tip window appears. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the printing job.

A

Change percentage of your document

You can change the size of a page’s content to appear larger or smaller on the printed page.

1

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 14.

2

From the

Paper

tab.

3

Enter the scaling rate in the

Percentage

input box.

You can also click the up/down arrows to select the scaling rate.

4

Select the

Size

,

Source

, and

Type

in

Paper Options

.

5

Click

OK

and print the document.

Fitting Your Document to a

Selected Paper Size

This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the digital document size. This can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small document.

1

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 14.

2

From the

Paper

tab.

3

Select the paper size you want from the

Fit to page

.

4

Select the

Size

,

Source

, and

Type

in

Paper Options

.

5

Click

OK

and print the document.

23

Advanced Printing

Using Watermarks

The Watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For example, you may want to have large gray letters reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document.

There are several predefined watermarks that come with the printer, and they can be modified, or you can add new ones to the list.

Using an Existing Watermark

1

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 14.

2

Click the

Advanced

tab, and select the desired watermark from the

Watermark

drop-down list. You will see the selected watermark in the preview image.

3

Click

OK

and start printing.

N

OTE

: The preview image shows how the page will look when it is printed.

Creating a Watermark

1

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 14.

2

From the

Advanced

tab, select

Edit

from the

Watermark

drop-down list. The

Edit Watermarks

window appears.

3

Enter a text message in the

Watermark Message

box.

You can enter up to 256 characters. The message displays in the preview window.

When the

First Page Only

box is checked, the watermark prints on the first page only.

4

Select watermark options.

You can select the font name, style, size, and shade from the

Font Attributes

section, as well as set the angle of the watermark from the

Message Angle

section.

5

Click

Add

to add a new watermark to the

Current

Watermaks

list.

6

When you have finished editing, click

OK

or

Print

until you exit the

Print

window.

To stop printing the watermark, select

None

from the

Watermark

drop-down list.

24

Advanced Printing

Editing a Watermark

1

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 14.

2

From the

Advanced

tab, select

Edit

from the

Watermark

drop-down list. The

Edit Watermarks

window appears.

3

Select the watermark you want to edit from the

Current

Watermaks

list and change the watermark message and options.

4

Click

Update

to save the changes.

5

Click

OK

or

Print

until you exit the

Print

window.

Deleting a Watermark

1

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 14.

2

From the

Advanced

tab, select

Edit

from the

Watermark

drop-down list. The

Edit Watermarks

window appears.

3

Select the watermark you want to delete from the

Current

Watermaks

list and click

Delete

.

4

Click

OK

or

Print

until you exit the

Print

window.

WORLD BEST

Using Overlays

What is an Overlay?

An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on any document. Overlays are often used to take the place of preprinted forms and letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing the exact same information that is currently on your letterhead. To print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in the printer. You need only tell the printer to print the letterhead overlay on your document.

Creating a New Page Overlay

To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image.

1

Create or open a document containing text or an image for use in a new page overlay. Position the items exactly as you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay.

2

To save the document as an overlay, access printer

properties. See “Printing a Document” on page 14.

3

From the

Advanced

tab, select

Edit

from the

Text

dropdown list. The

Edit Overlay

window appears.

4

In the

Edit Overlay

window, click

Create

.

5

In the

Save As

window, type a name of up to eight characters in the

File name

box. Select the destination path, if necessary. (The default is C:\Formover.)

6

Click

Save

. The name appears on the

Overlay List

.

7

Click

OK

or

Print

until you exit the

Print

window.

The file is not printed. Instead it is stored on your computer hard disk drive.

N

OTE

: The overlay document size must be the same as the documents you print with the overlay. Do not create an overlay with a watermark.

Using a Page Overlay

After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with your document. To print an overlay with a document:

1

Create or open the document you want to print.

2

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 14.

3

Click the

Advanced

tab.

4

Select the desired overlay from the

Text

drop-down list.

5

If the overlay file you want does not appear in the

Text

drop-down list, select

Edit

from the list and click

Load

.

Select the overlay file you want to use.

If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source, you can also load the file when you access the

Load

window.

After you select the file, click

Open

. The file appears in the

Overlay List

box and is available for printing. Select the overlay from the

Overlay List

box.

6

If necessary, check

Confirm Page Overlay When

Printing

box. If this box is checked, a message window appears each time you submit a document for printing, asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on your document.

If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the overlay automatically prints with your document.

7

Click

OK

or

Print

until you exit the

Print

window.

The selected overlay prints on your document.

N

OTE

: The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the document you will print with the overlay.

Deleting a Page Overlay

You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.

1

In the printer properties window, click the

Advanced

tab.

2

Select

Edit

in the

Overlay

drop down list.

3

Select the overlay you want to delete from the

Overlay

List

box.

4

Click

Delete

.

5

When a confirming message window appears, click

Yes

.

6

Click

OK

or

Print

until you exit the

Print

window.

25

Advanced Printing

4

Using Windows

PostScript Driver

If you want to use the PostScript driver provided with your system CD-ROM to print a document.

PPDs, in combination with the PostScript driver, access printer features and allow the computer to communicate with the printer. An installation program for the PPDs is provided on the supplied software CD-ROM.

This chapter includes:

Printer Settings

You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to access all of the printer options you need when using your printer. When the printer properties are displayed, you can review and change the settings needed for your print job.

Your printer properties window may differ, depending on your operating system. This Software User’s Guide shows the

Properties window for Windows XP.

Your printer driver

Properties

window that appears in this

User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.

N

OTE

:

• Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the printer driver. Change all print settings available in the software application first, and change any remaining settings using the printer driver.

• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are using the current program.

To make your changes permanent

, make them in the Printers folder.

• The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other

Windows OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's

Guide or online help.

1. Click the Windows

Start

button.

2. Select

Printers and Faxes

.

3. Select

your printer driver icon

.

4. Right-click on the printer driver icon and select

Printing Preferences

.

5. Change the settings on each tab, click OK.

Advanced

You can use advanced settings by clicking the

Advanced

button.

Paper/Output

this option allows you to select the size of the paper loaded in the tray.

Graphic

this option allows you to adjust the print quality for your specific printing needs.

Document Options

this options allow you to set the PostScript options or printer features.

Using Help

You can click from the upper right corner of the window, and then click on any setting.

26

Using Windows PostScript Driver

5

Using Direct Printing

Utility

This chapter explains how to use Direct Printing Utility to print PDF files without having to open the files.

C

AUTION

• You can not print PDF files that are restricted to print.

Deactivate the printing restriction feature, and retry printing.

• You can not print PDF files that are restricted by a password.

Deactivate the password feature, and retry printing.

• Depending on how a PDF file was created, it may not be able to be printed using the

Direct Printing Utility

program.

• Depending on the installation of Hard Disk on your printer,

PDF files can or can not be printed using the

Direct

Printing Utility

program.

• The

Direct Printing Utility

program supports PDF version

1.4 and below. For a higher version, you must open the file to print it.

Overview Direct Printing Utility

Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends a PDF file directly to your printer without having to open the file. It sends data through the Windows spooler using the port of the printer driver. It only supports PDF format.

To installing this program, you should select

Custom installation

and put a check mark in this program when you install the printer driver.

Printing

There are several ways you can print using Direct Printing

Utility.

From the Direct Printing Utility window

1

From the

Start

menu select

Programs

or

All Programs

Samsung Printers

Direct Printing Utility

Direct Printing Utility

.

Or, double-click the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your desk top.

The Direct Printing Utility window opens.

2

Select the printer you will use in the Select Printer section and click

Browse

.

3

Select the PDF file you will print and click

Open

.

The PDF file is added in the Select Files section.

4

Customize the printer settings for your needs. See the next column.

5

Click

Print

.

The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.

Using the shortcut icon

1

Select the PDF file you will print and by dragging drop it to the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your desk top.

The selected PDF file is sent to the default printer.

N

OTE

:

If the default printer does not support Direct Printing Utility, the message window alerting you to select the appropriate printer opens. Select the appropriate printer in the Select Printer section.

2

Customize the printer settings for your needs.

3

Click

Print

.

The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.

Using the right-click menu

27

Using Direct Printing Utility

1

Right-click on the PDF file you will print and select

Direct

Printing

.

The Direct Printing Utility window opens with the PDF file is added.

2

Select the printer you will use.

3

Customize the printer settings for your needs. See the below part.

4

Click

Print

.

The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.

6

Sharing the Printer

Locally

You can connect the printer directly to a selected computer, which is called “host computer,” on the network.

The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other Windows

OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's Guide or online help.

N

OTE

:

• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible with your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of

Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.

• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can check the supplied CD-ROM.

Setting Up a Host Computer

1

Start Windows.

2

From the

Start

menu select

Printers and Faxes

.

3

Double-click

your printer driver icon

.

4

From the

Printer

menu, select

Sharing

.

5

Check the

Share this printer

box.

6

Fill in the

Shared Name

field, and then click

OK

.

Setting Up a Client Computer

1

Right-click the Windows

Start

button and select

Explore

.

2

Select

My Network Places

and then right-click

Search for Computers

.

3

Fill in the IP address of host computer in

Computer name

field, and click

Search

. (In case host computer requires

User name

and

Password

, fill in User ID and password of host computer account.)

4

Double-click

Printers and Faxes

.

5

Right-click printer driver icon, select

Connect

.

6

Click

Yes

, if the installation confirm message appears.

28

Sharing the Printer Locally

7

Scanning

Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files on your computer. Then you can fax or e-mail the files, display them on your web site or use them to create projects that you can print using Samsung SmarThru software or the WIA driver.

This chapter includes:

• Scanning Using SmarThru Office

• Scanning Process with TWAIN-enabled Software

• Scanning Using the WIA Driver

N

OTE

:

• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible with your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s

Guide.

• You can check your printer name in the supplied CD-

ROM.

• The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various factors, including computer speed, available disk space, memory, the size of the image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus, depending on your system and what you are scanning, you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions, especially using enhanced dpi.

Scanning Using SmarThru Office

SmarThru Office

is the accompanying software for your machine. You can use

SmarThru Office

to scan images or documents from local or network scanners.

Starting SmarThru Office

Follow the steps below to start

SmarThru Office

:

1

Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly connected to each other.

2

Once you have installed

SmarThru Office

, you will see the

SmarThru Office

icon on your desktop.

3

Double-click the

SmarThru Office

icon.

4

The

SmarThru Office

appears.

For more information, click

Help

>

SmarThru Office Help

.

Quick Start Guide

This menu displays direct buttons for some features. The direct buttons include:

Categories

,

Binder

,

Life Cycle

,

Scan and OCR

,

Fix and

Enhance

, and

Samsung Website

. You can disable this menu by checking “

Do not show this diaglog again

”.

Using SmarThru Office

Scanning

1

Click

Scan

icon.

N

OTES

:

• In Windows XP operating system, you can use

SmarThru Office

launcher, which is on the right end of taskbar, to easily open the

Scan

Setting

window.

• In other operating systems beside Windows XP, click the

SmarThru Office

icon in the tray area of the windows

29

Scanning

taskbar to activate the

SmarThru Office

launcher.

2

Scan Setting

window opens.

Select Scanner

: Allows you to select between the Local or

Network scanner.

Select Profile

: Allows you to save settings frequently used for future use. Click

New Profile

to save the setting.

Scan Settings

: Allows you to customize settings for

Scan Size

and

Paper Source

.

Scan To

: Allows you to customize settings for

File Name

and location to send scanned data.

N

OTE

: Click

Advanced

button to set more scan options.

3

Set scan settings and click

Scan

.

For more information, click

Help

>

SmarThru Office Help

.

Scan To

FTP

You can upload files to an FTP server while working on

SmarThru

Office

.

1

Select

File

>

Send to

>

Send By FTP

.

2

Send By FTP

window opens.

3

Add your file and click

Upload

.

Email

You can send email while working on

SmarThru Office

.

30

Scanning

N

OTE

:

You need an email client program, such as <WIN-OS-

UI>Outlook Express, to send email in

SmarThru Office

. Procedure for sending email may differ depending on email client program you are using.

1

Select

File

>

Send to

>

Send By E-mail

.

2

An email client opens.

3

Type in necessary information and send your email.

Fax

You can send emails while working on

SmarThru Office

.

1

Select

File

>

Send to

>

Send By Fax

.

2

Send Fax

window opens.

3

Type in necessary information and click

Send Fax

.

N

OTE

: For more information about

SmarThru Office

, click

Help

>

SmarThru Office Help

. The

SmarThru Office Help

window appears; you can view on screen help supplied on the SmarThru program.

Uninstalling SmarThru Office

N

OTE

: Before beginning uninstallation, ensure that all applications are closed on your computer.

1

From the

Start

menu, select

Programs

>

Samsung Printers

.

2

Select

SmarThru Office

, and then select

Uninstall SmarThru

Office

.

3

When your computer asks you to confirm, read the statement and click

OK

.

4

Click

Finish

.

Scanning Process with TWAINenabled Software

If you want to scan documents using other software, you will need to use TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe

Photoshop. The first time you scan with your machine, select it as your TWAIN source in the application you use.

The basic scanning process involves a number of steps:

1

Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly connected to each other.

2

Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).

OR

Place a single document face down on the document glass.

3

Open an application, such as Photoshop.

4

Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options.

5

Scan and save your scanned image.

N

OTE

: You need to follow the program’s instructions for acquiring an image. Please refer to the user’s guide of the application.

Scanning Using the WIA Driver

Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition

(WIA) driver for scanning images. WIA is one of the standard components provided by Microsoft

®

Windows

®

XP and works with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver, the

WIA driver allows you to scan and easily manipulate images without using additional software.

N

OTE

: The WIA driver works only on Windows OS with USB port except on Windows 2000.

Windows XP/Server 2003

1

Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).

OR

Place a single document face down on the document glass.

2

From the

Start

menu, select

Settings

Control Panel

Scanners and Cameras

.

3

Double click

your scanner driver

icon. The

Scanner and

Camera Wizard

appears.

4

Click

Next

.

5

Set the option in

Choose scanning preferences

window and click

Preview

to see how your options affect the picture.

6

Click

Next

.

7

Enter a picture name, and select a file format and destination to save the picture.

8

Your picture has been successfully copied to your computer. Choose one of the options on screen.

9

Click

Next

.

10

Click

Finish

.

31

Scanning

Windows 2008/Vista

1

Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).

OR

Place a single document face down on the document glass.

2

From the

Start

menu, select

Control Panel

Hardware and Sound

Scanners and Cameras

.

3

Double click

Scan a document or picture

.

Windows Fax and Scan

appears.

N

OTE

:

• To view scanners, user can click on

View scanners and cameras

.

If there is no

Scan a document or picture

, open the MS paint program and click

From Scanner or Camera...

on

File

menu.

4

Click

New Scan

. Scan driver appears.

5

Choose your scanning preferences and click

Preview

to see your preferences affect the picture.

6

Click

Scan

.

N

OTE

: If you want to cancel the scan job, press the Cancel button on the Scanner and Camera Wizard.

Windows 7

1

Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).

OR

Place a single document face down on the document glass.

2

From the

Start

menu, select

Control Panel

Hardware and Sound

Devices and Printers

.

3

Click right button of mouse on device driver icon in

Printers and Faxes

Start Scan

.

New Scan

application appears.

4

Choose your scanning preferences and click

Preview

to see your preferences affect the picture.

5

Click

Scan

.

8

Using Smart Panel

Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the status of the printer, and allows you to customize the printer’s settings.

If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS user

, Smart Panel is installed automatically when you install the printer software.

If you are a Linux OS user, download

Smart Panel

from the

Samsung website (www.samsung.com/printer) and install. See

“Installing the SmartPanel” on page 35.

N

OTE

:

• To use this program, you need:

- Windows. To check for windows operating system(s) that are compatible with your printer, refer to Printer

Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.

- Mac OS X 10.3 or higher

- Linux. To check for Linux systems that are compatible with your printer, refer to Printer Specifications in your Printer

User’s Guide.

- Internet Explorer version 5.0 or higher for flash animation in HTML Help.

• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can check the supplied CD-ROM.

Understanding Smart Panel

If an error occurs while printing, Smart Panel appears automatically, showing the error.

You can also launch Smart Panel manually. Double-click the

Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (in Windows), or

Notification Area (in Linux). You can also click it on the status bar (in Mac OS X).

Double-click this icon in Windows.

Click this icon in Mac OS X.

Click this icon in Linux.

If you are a Windows user, from the

Start

menu, select

Programs

or

All Programs

Samsung Printers

your printer driver name

Smart Panel

.

N

OTE

:

• If you have already installed more than one Samsung printer, first select the printer model you want in order to use the corresponding Smart Panel. Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the Smart Panel icon and select

your printer name

.

• The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this

Software User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer or

Operating System in use.

The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the printer, the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s) and various other information. You can also change settings.

32

Using Smart Panel

1

1

Toner Level

You can view the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s). The printer and the number of toner cartridge(s) shown in the above window may differ depending on the printer in use. Any printers do not have this feature.

Buy Now

You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) online.

Troubleshooting Guide

You can view Help to solve problems.

Printer Setting

If you connect your printer to a network, the

SyncThru

Web Service

window appears instead of the Printer

Settings Utility window.

Driver Setting

(Only for Windows)

You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to access all of the printer options you need for using your

printer. For details, See “Printer Settings” on page 15.

Opening the Troubleshooting Guide

Using the troubleshooting guide, you can view solutions for error status problems.

Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the

Smart Panel icon and select

Troubleshooting Guide

.

Changing the Smart Panel

Program Settings

Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the

Smart Panel icon and select

Options

.

Select the settings you want from the

Options

window.

33

Using Smart Panel

9

Using Your Printer in

Linux

You can use your machine in a Linux environment.

This chapter includes:

• Getting Started

• Installing the Unified Linux Driver

• Using the Unified Driver Configurator

• Configuring Printer Properties

• Printing a Document

• Scanning a Document

Getting Started

You need to download Linux software package from the

Samsung website (www.samsung.com/printer) to install the printer and scanner softwares.

Unified Linux Driver package contains printer and scanner drivers, providing the ability to print documents and scan images. The package also delivers powerful applications for configuring your machine and further processing of the scanned documents.

After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the driver package allows you to monitor a number of machine devices via fast ECP parallel ports and USB simultaneously.

The acquired documents can then be edited, printed on the same local or network machine devices, sent by e-mail, uploaded to an FTP site, or transferred to an external OCR system.

The Unified Linux Driver package is supplied with a smart and flexible installation program. You don't need to search for additional components that might be necessary for the Unified

Linux Driver software: all required packages will be carried onto your system and installed automatically; this is possible on a wide set of the most popular Linux clones.

Installing the Unified Linux

Driver

Installing the Unified Linux Driver

1

Make sure that you connect your machine to your computer. Turn both the computer and the machine on.

2

When the Administrator Login window appears, type in

root

in the Login field and enter the system password.

N

OTE

: You must log in as a super user (root) to install the printer software. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator.

3

From the Samsung website, download and unpack the

Unified Linux Driver package to your computer.

4

Click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the

Terminal screen appears, type in:

[[email protected] root]#tar zxf [FilePath]/

UnifiedLinuxDriver.tar.gz

[[email protected] root]#cd [FilePath]/cdroot/Linux

[[email protected] Linux]#./install.sh

N

OTE

: If you do not use the graphical interface and failed to install the software, you have to use the driver in the text mode. Follow the steps 3 to 4, and then follow the instructions on the terminal screen.

5

When the welcome screen appears, click

Next

.

34

Using Your Printer in Linux

6

When the installation is complete, click

Finish

.

The installation program has added the Unified Driver

Configurator desktop icon and the Unified Driver group to the system menu for your convenience. If you have any difficulties, consult the onscreen help that is available through your system menu or can otherwise be called from the driver package Windows applications, such as

Unified Driver Configurator

or

Image Manager

.

Installing the SmartPanel

1

Make sure that you connect your machine to your computer. Turn both the computer and the machine on.

2

When the Administrator Login window appears, type in

root

in the Login field and enter the system password.

N

OTE

: You must log in as a super user (root) to install the printer software. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator.

3

From the Samsung website, download and unpack the

Unified Linux Driver package to your computer.

4

Click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the

Terminal screen appears, type in:

[[email protected] root]#tar zxf [FilePath]/

SmartPanel.tar.gz

[[email protected] root]#cd [FilePath]/cdroot/Linux/ smartpanel

[[email protected] smartpanel]#./install.sh

N

OTE

: If you do not use the graphical interface and failed to install the software, you have to use the driver in the text mode. Follow the steps 3 to 4, and then follow the instructions on the terminal screen.

Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver

1

When the Administrator Login window appears, type in

root

in the Login field and enter the system password.

N

OTE

: You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the printer software. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator.

2

Click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the

Terminal screen appears, type in:

[[email protected] root]#cd /opt/Samsung/mfp/uninstall/

[[email protected] uninstall]#./uninstall.sh

3

Click

Uninstall

.

4

Click

Next

.

5

Click

Finish

.

35

Using Your Printer in Linux

Using the Unified Driver

Configurator

Unified Linux Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring Printer or MFP devices. Since an MFP device combines the printer and scanner, the Unified Linux Driver

Configurator provides options logically grouped for printer and scanner functions. There is also a special MFP port option responsible for the regulation of access to an MFP printer and scanner via a single I/O channel.

After installing the Unified Linux driver, the Unified Linux Driver

Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop.

Opening the Unified Driver

Configurator

1

Double-click

Unified Driver Configurator

on the desktop.

You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select

Samsung Unified Driver

and then

Unified Driver

Configurator

.

2

Press each button on the Modules pane to switch to the corresponding configuration window.

Printers Configuration button

Scanners Configuration button

(for MFP device only)

Ports Configuration button

Printers Configuration

Printers configuration has the two tabs:

Printers

and

Classes

.

Printers Tab

You can see the current system’s printer configuration by clicking on the printer icon button on the left side of the Unified

Driver Configurator window.

Switches to Printer configuration.

Shows all of the installed printer.

Shows the status, model name and

URI of your printer.

You can use the following printer control buttons:

Refresh

: renews the available printers list.

Add Printer

: allows you to add a new printer.

Remove Printer

: removes the selected printer.

Set as Default

: sets the current printer as a default printer.

Stop

/

Start

: stops/starts the printer.

Test

: allows you to print a test page to check if the machine is working properly.

Properties

: allows you to view and change the printer

properties. For details, see page 38.

You can use the onscreen help by clicking

Help

.

3

After changing the configurations, click

Exit

to close the

Unified Driver Configurator.

36

Using Your Printer in Linux

Classes Tab

The Classes tab shows a list of available printer classes.

Shows all of the printer classes.

Shows the status of the class and the number of printers in the class.

Refresh

: Renews the classes list.

Add Class... :

Allows you to add a new printer class.

Remove Class :

Removes the selected printer class.

Scanners Configuration

In this window, you can monitor the activity of scanner devices, view a list of installed Samsung MFP devices, change device properties, and scan images.

Switches to

Scanners configuration.

Shows all of the installed scanners.

Shows the vendor, model name and type of your scanner.

Properties...

: Allows you to change the scan properties

and scan a document. See page 39.

37

Using Your Printer in Linux

Ports Configuration

In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check the status of each port and release a port that is stalled in busy state when its owner is terminated for any reason.

Switches to ports configuration.

Shows the port type, device connected to the port and status

Shows all of the available ports.

Refresh

: Renews the available ports list.

Release port :

Releases the selected port.

Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners

Your machine may be connected to a host computer via the parallel port or USB port. Since the MFP device contains more than one device (printer and scanner), it is necessary to organize proper access of “consumer” applications to these devices via the single I/O port.

The Samsung Unified Linux Driver package provides an appropriate port sharing mechanism that is used by Samsung printer and scanner drivers. The drivers address their devices via so-called MFP ports. The current status of any MFP port can be viewed via the Ports Configuration. The port sharing prevents you from accessing one functional block of the MFP device, while another block is in use.

When you install a new MFP device onto your system, it is strongly recommended you do this with the assistance of an

Unified Driver Configurator. In this case you will be asked to choose I/O port for the new device. This choice will provide the most suitable configuration for MFP’s functionality. For MFP scanners I/O ports are being chosen by scanner drivers automatically, so proper settings are applied by default.

Configuring Printer Properties

Using the properties window provided by the Printers configuration, you can change the various properties for your machine as a printer.

1

Open the Unified Driver Configurator.

If necessary, switch to Printers configuration.

2

Select your machine on the available printers list and click

Properties

.

3

The Printer Properties window opens.

Printing a Document

Printing from Applications

There are a lot of Linux applications that you are allowed to print from using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You can print on your machine from any such application.

1

From the application you are using, select

Print

from the

File

menu.

2

Select

Print

directly using

lpr

.

3

In the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your machine from the Printer list and click

Properties

.

Click.

The following five tabs display at the top of the window:

General

: allows you to change the printer location and name. The name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in Printers configuration.

Connection

: allows you to view or select another port. If you change the printer port from USB to parallel or vice versa while in use, you must re-configure the printer port in this tab.

Driver

: allows you to view or select another printer driver. By clicking

Options

, you can set the default device options.

Jobs

: shows the list of print jobs. Click

Cancel job

to cancel the selected job and select the

Show completed jobs

check box to see previous jobs on the job list.

Classes

: shows the class that your printer is in. Click

Add to Class

to add your printer to a specific class or click

Remove from Class

to remove the printer from the selected class.

4

Click

OK

to apply the changes and close the Printer

Properties Window.

4

Change the printer and print job properties.

38

Using Your Printer in Linux

The following four tabs display at the top of the window.

General

- allows you to change the paper size, the paper type, and the orientation of the documents, enables the duplex feature, adds start and end banners, and changes the number of pages per sheet.

Text

- allows you to specify the page margins and set the text options, such as spacing or columns.

Graphics

- allows you to set image options that are used when printing images/files, such as color options, image size, or image position.

Device

: allows you to set the print resolution, paper source, and destination.

5

Click

Apply

to apply the changes and close the Properties window.

6

Click

OK

in the LPR GUI window to start printing.

7

The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the status of your print job.

To abort the current job, click

Cancel

.

Printing Files

You can print many different types of files on the Samsung machine device using the standard CUPS way - directly from the command line interface. The CUPS lpr utility allows you do that. But the drivers package replaces the standard lpr tool by a much more user-friendly LPR GUI program.

To print any document file:

1

Type

lpr <file_name>

from the Linux shell command line and press

Enter

. The LPR GUI window appears.

When you type only

lpr

and press

Enter

, the Select file(s) to print window appears first. Just select any files you want to print and click

Open

.

2

In the LPR GUI window, select your printer from the list, and change the printer and print job properties.

For details about the properties window, see page 38.

3

Click

OK

to start printing.

Scanning a Document

You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator window.

1

Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on your desktop.

2

Click the button to switch to Scanners Configuration.

3

Select the scanner on the list.

Click your scanner.

When you have only one MFP device and it is connected to the computer and turned on, your scanner appears on the list and is automatically selected.

If you have two or more scanners attached to your computer, you can select any scanner to work at any time. For example, while acquisition is in progress on the first scanner, you may select the second scanner, set the device options and start the image acquisition simultaneously.

4

Click

Properties

.

5

Load the document to be scanned face up into the ADF

(Automatic Document Feeder) or face down on the document glass.

6

Click

Preview

in the Scanner Properties window.

39

Using Your Printer in Linux

The document is scanned and the image preview appears in the Preview Pane.

Drag the pointer to set the image area to be scanned.

7

Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan

Area sections.

Image Quality

: allows you to select the color composition and the scan resolution for the image.

Scan Area

: allows you to select the page size. The

Advanced

button enables you to set the page size manually.

If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings, select from the Job Type drop-down list. For details about the preset Job Type settings, see page 40.

You can restore the default setting for the scan options by clicking

Default

.

8

When you have finished, click

Scan

to start scanning.

The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window to show you the progress of the scan. To cancel scanning, click

Cancel

.

9

The scanned image appears in the new Image Manager tab.

10

When you are finished, click

Save

on the toolbar.

11

Select the file directory where you want to save the image and enter the file name.

12

Click

Save

.

Adding Job Type Settings

You can save your scan option settings to retrieve for a later scanning.

To save a new Job Type setting:

1

Change the options from the Scanner Properties window.

2

Click

Save As

.

3

Enter the name for your setting.

4

Click

OK

.

Your setting is added to the Saved Settings drop-down list.

To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job:

1

Select the setting you want to use from the Job Type dropdown list.

2

The next time you open the Scanner Properties window, the saved setting is automatically selected for the scan job.

To delete a Job Type setting:

1

Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type drop-down list.

2

Click

Delete

.

The setting is deleted from the list

Using the Image Manager

The Image Manager application provides you with menu commands and tools to edit your scanned image.

Use these tools to edit the image.

If you want to edit the scanned image, use the toolbar.

For further details about editing an image, see page 40.

40

Using Your Printer in Linux

You can use the following tools to edit the image:

Tools Function

Saves the image.

Cancels your last action.

Restores the action you canceled.

Allows you to scroll through the image.

Crops the selected image area.

Zooms the image out.

Zooms the image in.

Allows you to scale the image size; you can enter the size manually, or set the rate to scale proportionally, vertically, or horizontally.

Allows you to rotate the image; you can select the number of degrees from the dropdown list.

Allows you to flip the image vertically or horizontally.

Allows you to adjust the brightness or contrast of the image, or to invert the image.

Shows the properties of the image.

For further details about the Image Manager application, refer to the onscreen help.

41

Using Your Printer in Linux

10

Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

Your machine supports Macintosh systems with a built-in USB interface or a 10/100 Base-TX network interface card. When you print a file from a Macintosh computer, you can use the

PostScript driver by installing the PPD file.

10

After the installation is finished, click

Quit

.

N

OTE

:

• If you have installed scan driver, click

Restart

.

• After the installation is finished, see “Setting Up the Printer” on page 43

N

OTE

:

Some printers do not support a network interface. Make sure that your printer supports a network interface by referring to Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.

This chapter includes:

• Installing Software

• Uninstalling software

• Setting Up the Printer

• Printing

• Scanning

Installing Software

The CD-ROM that came with your printer provides you with the

PPD file that allows you to use the CUPS driver or Apple

LaserWriter driver

(only available when you use a printer which supports the PostScript driver)

, for printing on a

Macintosh computer.

Also, it provides you with the Twain driver for scanning on a

Macintosh computer.

1

Make sure that you connect your printer to the computer.

Turn on your computer and printer.

2

Insert the CD-ROM which came with your printer into the

CD-ROM drive.

3

Double-click

CD-ROM icon

that appears on your

Macintosh desktop.

4

Double-click the

MAC_Installer

folder.

5

Double-click the

Installer OS X

icon.

6

Enter the password and click

OK

.

7

The Samsung Installer window opens. Click

Continue

8

Select

Easy Install

and click

Install

.

Easy Install

is recommended for most users. All components necessary for printer operations will be installed.

If you select

Custom Install

, you can choose individual components to install.

9

The message which warns all application will close on your computer appears, Click

Continue

.

42

Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

Uninstalling software

Uninstall is required if you are upgrading the software, or if installation fails.

1

Make sure that you connect your printer to the computer.

Turn on your computer and printer.

2

Insert the CD-ROM which came with your printer into the

CD-ROM drive.

3

Double-click

CD-ROM icon

that appears on your

Macintosh desktop.

4

Double-click the

MAC_Installer

folder.

5

Double-click the

Installer OS X

icon.

6

Enter the password and click

OK

.

7

The Samsung Installer window opens. Click

Continue

8

Select

Uninstall

and click

Uninstall

.

9

The message which warns all application will close on your computer appears, Click

Continue

.

10

When the uninstallation is done, click

Quit

.

Setting Up the Printer

Set up for your printer will be different depending on which cable you use to connect the printer to your computer—the network cable or the USB cable.

For a Network-connected

N

OTE

:

Some printers do not support a network interface.

Before connecting your printer, make sure that your printer supports a network interface by referring to Printer

Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.

1

Follow the instructions on “Installing Software” on page 42

to install the PPD file on your computer.

2

Open the

Applications

folder →

Utilities

, and

Print

Setup Utility

.

•For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, open

System Preferences

from the

Applications

folder, and click

Printer & Fax

.

3

Click

Add

on the

Printer List

.

•For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, press the “

+

” icon then a display window will pop up.

4

For Mac OS X 10.3, select the

IP Printing

tab.

•For Mac OS X 10.4, click

IP Printer

.

•For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click

IP

.

5

Select

Socket/HP Jet Direct

in Printer Type.

When printing a document containing many pages, printing performance may be enhanced by choosing

Socket for

Printer Type

option.

6

Enter the machine’s IP address in the

Printer Address

field.

7

Enter the queue name in the

Queue Name

field. If you cannot determine the queue name for your machine server, try using the default queue first.

8

For MAC OS 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select

Samsung

in

Printer Model

and

your printer name

in

Model Name

.

•For MAC OS 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select

Samsung

in

Print Using

and

your printer name

in

Model

.

•For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly, select

Select a driver to use...

and

your printer name

in

Print Using

.

Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the default printer.

9

Click

Add

.

43

Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

For a USB-connected

1

Follow the instructions on “Installing Software” on page 42

to install the PPD file on your computer.

2

Open the

Applications

folder →

Utilities

, and

Print

Setup Utility

.

•For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, open

System Preferences

from the

Applications

folder, and click

Printer & Fax

.

3

Click

Add

on the

Printer List

.

•For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, press the “

+

” icon then a display window will pop up.

4

For MAC OS 10.3, select the

USB

tab.

•For MAC OS 10.4, click

Default Browser

and find the

USB connection.

•For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, click

Default

and find the USB connection.

5

Select

your printer name

.

6

For MAC OS 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select

Samsung

in

Printer Model

and

your printer name

in

Model Name

.

•For MAC OS 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select

Samsung

in

Print Using

and

your printer name

in

Model

.

•For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly, select

Select a driver to use...

and

your printer name

in

Print Using

.

Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the default printer.

7

Click

Add

.

Printing

N

OTE

:

• The Macintosh printer’s properties window that appears in this User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.

However the composition of the printer properties window is similar.

• You can check your printer name in the supplied CD-

ROM.

Printing a Document

When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer software setting in each application you use. Follow these steps to print from a Macintosh.w

1

Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want to print.

2

Open the

File

menu and click

Page Setup

(

Document

Setup

in some applications).

3

Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, and other options and click

OK

.

Make sure that your printer is selected.

Changing Printer Settings

You can use advanced printing features when using your printer.

From your Macintosh application, select

Print

from the

File

menu. The printer name which appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the printer in use. Except for the name, the composition of the printer properties window is similar.

N

OTE

: The setting options may differ depending on printers and Macintosh OS version.

Layout

The

Layout

tab provides options to adjust how the document appears on the printed page. You can print multiple pages on one sheet of paper. Select

Layout

from the

Presets

drop-down list to access the following features.

S

Mac OS 10.3

4

Open the

File

menu and click

Print

.

5

Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which pages you want to print.

6

Click

Print

when you finish setting the options.

S

Mac OS 10.5

Pages per Sheet

: This feature determines how many pages printed on one page. For details, see "Printing

Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper" on the next column.

Layout Direction

: You can select the printing direction on a page as like the examples on UI.

Border

: This option allows you to print a border around each page on the sheet.

Two-Sided

: This option allows you to print on both sides

of a paper. (See “Duplex Printing” on page 48.)

44

Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

Graphics

The

Graphics

tab provides options for selecting

Resolution(Quality)

and

Color Mode

. Select

Graphics

form the

Presets

' drop-down list to access the graphic features.

Job Accounting

This feature lets you control and lock all outgoing data, or change the password.

S

Mac OS 10.5

Resolution(Quality)

: You can select the printing resolution. The higher the setting, the sharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics. The higher setting also may increase the time it takes to print a document.

Color Mode

: You can set the color options. Setting to

Color

typically produces the best possible print quality for color documents. If you want to print a color document in grayscale, select

Grayscale

.

Paper

Set

Paper Type

to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print. This will let you get the best quality printout. If you load a different type of print material, select the corresponding paper type.

S

Mac OS 10.5

User permission

: If you check this option, only users with user permission can start a print job.

Group permission

: If you check this option, only groups with group permission can start a print job.

Job Setting

This option allows you to choose how to print or save the printing file by using the HDD

.

S

Mac OS 10.5

45

Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

S

Mac OS 10.5

Print Mode

: The default

Print Mode

is

Normal

which is for printing without saving the printing file in the optional

HDD.

User ID

: This option is used when you need to find a saved file using the control panel.

Job Name

: This option is used when you need to find a saved file using the control panel.

Printer Features

Advanced Options

Optional Finisher

S

Mac OS 10.5

Reverse Duplex Printing

: Allows you to select general print order compare to duplex print order.

If this option does not appear, your printer does not have this feature.

Darken Text

: Allows you to print all the text on your document darker than on a normal document.

Fit to Page

: This setting allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the digital document size. This can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small document.

RGB Color

: This setting determines how colors are rendered.

Standard

is the most widely used setting which the color tone of this mode is the closest to that of standard monitor (sRGB Monitor).

Vivid

mode is appropriate for printing presentation data and charts.

The color tone of Vivid mode produces more

Vivid

color images than that of Standard mode.

Device

mode is best used for printing fine lines, small characters and color drawings. The color tone of

Device

mode may be different from that of monitor, the pure toner colors are used for printing Cyan, Magenta and Yellow colors.

S

Mac OS 10.5

Output Mode

: This option allows you to choose the way printouts are to be arranged. (You need to install an optional finisher such as 2-Bin Finisher or 4-Bin Mailbox.)

Output Bin

: This option allows you to choose the output bin for prinouts. (You need to install an optional finisher such as 2-Bin Finisher or 4-Bin Mailbox.)

Staple

: This option staples the print outs.

Request Offset

: If you don’t want the printout-sets to be in one stack, the machine places printout-sets slightly offset from one another.

Front Cover

46

Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

S

Mac OS 10.5

Front Cover Option

: Allows you to choose the option for printing a front cover page. You can choose to print the front cover blank, preprinted, 1-sided printed or 2-sided printed.

Front Cover Source

: Allows you to choose the paper source for the front cover.

Front Cover Type

: Allows you to choose the paper type for the front cover.

Back Cover Transparency Seperator

S

Mac OS 10.5

Back Cover Option

: Allows you to choose the option for printing a back cover page. You can choose to print the back cover blank, preprinted, 1-sided printed or 2-sided printed.

Back Cover Source

: Allows you to choose the paper source for the back cover.

Back Cover Type

: Allows you to choose the paper type for the back cover.

Front and Back Cover Option

S

Mac OS 10.5

Transparency Seperator

: You can place transparency separator sheets between printouts.

Seperators Source

: You can choose the source for seperators.

Smart Color

S

Mac OS 10.5

Front and Back Cover Option

: Allows you to choose the option for printing a front and back cover page. You can choose to print the front and back cover blank, preprinted, 1-sided printed or 2-sided printed.

Front and Back Cover Source

: Allows you to choose the paper source for the front and back cover.

Front and Back Cover Type

: Allows you to choose the paper type for the front and back cover.

47

Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

S

Mac OS 10.5

Fine Edge

:Allows users to emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for improving readability and align each color channel registration in color printing mode.

Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper

You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper.

This feature provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages.

1

From your Macintosh application, select

Print

from the

File

menu.

2

Select

Layout

.

Duplex Printing

You can print on both sides of the paper. Before printing in the duplex mode, decide on which edge you will be binding your finished document. The binding options are:

Long-Edge Binding

: Which is the conventional layout used in book binding.

Short-Edge Binding

: Which is the type often used with calendars.

1

From your Macintosh application, select

Print

from the

File

menu.

2

Select the

Layout

.

S

Mac OS 10.5

3

Select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper on the

Pages per Sheet

drop-down list.

4

Select the page order from the

Layout Direction

option.

To print a border around each page on the sheet, select the option you want from the

Border

drop-down list.

5

Click

Print

, and the printer prints the selected number of pages on one side of each page.

S

Mac OS 10.5

3

Select a binding orientation from

Two Sided Printing

option.

4

Click

Print

and the printer prints on both sides of the paper.

C

AUTION

:

If you have selected duplex printing and then try to print multiple copies of a document, the printer may not print the document in the way you want. In case of "Collated copy" , if your document has odd pages, the last page of the first copy and the first page of the next copy will be printed on the front and back of one sheet. In case of "Uncollated copy", the same page will be printed on the front and back of one sheet. Therefore, if you need multiple copies of a document and you want those copies on both sides of the paper, you must print them one at a time, as separate print jobs

.

48

Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

Scanning

You can scan docoments using

Image Capture

program.

Macintosh OS offers

Image Capture

program.

Scanning with USB

1

Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly connected to each other.

2

Place a single document face down on the document glass.

OR load the document(s) face up into the ADF (or DADF).

3

Start

Applications

and click

Image Capture

.

N

OTE

: If

No Image Capture device connected

message appears, disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it. If the problem persists, please refer to the

Image Capture

’s help.

4

Set the scan options on this program.

5

Scan and save your scanned image.

N

OTE

:

• For more information about using

Image Capture

, please refer to the

Image Capture

’s help.

• Use TWAIN-compliant softwares to apply more scan options.

• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant softwares, such as

Adobe Photoshop.

• Scan process differs according to TWAIN-compliant softwares. Please refer to the user’s guide of the software.

• When scanning does not operate in

Image Capture

, update

Mac OS to the latest version. Scanning operates propery in

Mac OS 10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS 10.4.7 or higher.

Scanning with network

1

Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on.

2

Place a single document face down on the document glass.

OR load the document(s) face up into the ADF (or DADF).

3

Start

Applications

and click

Image Capture

.

4

For MAC OS X 10.4~10.5

Click

Devices

and click

Browse Devices

.

For MAC OS X 10.6

Select your device below SHARED. Skip to step 7.

5

For MAC OS X 10.4:

Select your machine in

Twain devices

option. Make sure that

Use TWAIN software

checkbox is checked, and click

Connect

.

49

Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

If a warning message appears, click

Change Port..

to

select port

.

If TWAIN UI appears, from the Preference tab, click

Change Port..

to

select port

.

For MAC OS X 10.5:

Make sure that

Connected

checkbox is checked beside your machine in

Bonjour Devices

.

If you want to scan using TWAIN, refer to the MAC OS X

10.4 procedure above.

6

Set the scan options on this program.

7

Scan and save your scanned image.

N

OTE

:

• For more information about using

Image Capture

, please refer to the

Image Capture

’s help.

• Use TWAIN-compliant softwares to apply more scan options.

• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant softwares, such as

Adobe Photoshop.

• Scan process differs according to TWAIN-compliant softwares. Please refer to the user’s guide of the software.

• When scanning does not operate in

Image Capture

, update

Mac OS to the latest version. Scanning operates propery in

Mac OS 10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS 10.4.7 or higher.

• For MAC OS X 10.3, use TWAIN-compliant softwares.

S

OFTWARE SECTION

I

NDEX

A

advanced printing, use

21

B

booklet printing

22

C

canceling scan

31

Color

18

D

document, print

Macintosh

44

Windows

14

double-sided printing

23

G

Graphics

18

Graphics properties, set

18

H

help, use

20

,

26

I

install printer driver

Macintosh

42

Windows

5

installing

Linux software

34

L

Linux driver, install

34

printer properties

38

printing

38

scanning

39

M

Macintosh driver install

42

uninstall

42

printing

44

scanning

49

setting up the printer

43

MFP driver, install

Linux

34

N

n-up printing

Macintosh

48

Windows

21

O

orientation, print

39

Windows

16

overlay create

25

delete

25

print

25

P

Paper properties, set

16

paper size, set print

39

paper source, set

39

paper tray, set copy

27

paper type, set print

39

poster, print

22

PostScript driver installing

26

print

50 document

14

fit to page

23

from Macintosh

44

from Windows

14

N-up

Macintosh

48

Windows

21

overlay

25

poster

24

PRN

14

scaling

23

watermark

24

print resolution

39

printer driver, install

Linux

34

printer properties

Linux

38

printer properties, set

Macintosh

44

Windows

15

,

26

printer software install

Macintosh

42

Windows

5

uninstall

Macintosh

42

Windows

12

printing booklets

22

double-sided

23

from Linux

38

R

resolution printing

39

S

scanning

Linux

39

SmarThru

29

TWAIN

30

WIA driver

31

scanning from Macintosh

49

setting darkness

18

image mode

18

true-type option

18

software install

Macintosh

42

Windows

5

reinstall

Windows

11

system requirements

Macintosh

42

uninstall

Macintosh

42

Windows

12

status monitor, use

32

T

TWAIN, scan

30

U

uninstall, software

Macintosh

42

Windows

12

uninstalling

MFP driver

Linux

35

W

watermark create

24

delete

24

edit

24

print

24

WIA, scan

31

51

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents